Home

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User`s Manual (Application)

1. gt Program ee y External input Input signal turns ON signal OFF XO Input devi nput device BEE XO l e 1 scan ON 3 WOperation when multiple pulses are detected within one scan The second pulse onwards is ignored Input pulse signals at intervals of one scan or longer Step 0 gt END Step0 gt _ END Step 0 _ gt Program A A nput signal turns ON P ON Ml External input Pulse of this section is ignored signal OFF l XO AE ON Input devi nput device Spp X0 l i E 1scanON gt 4 86 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 4 Pulse Catch Function Operation when the same pulse is detected for two scans or more The input device is turned ON for the detected number of scans Input pulse signals at intervals of one scan or longer Step 0 gt END Step 0 gt END Step 0 gt END Step O gt END Step 0 Program e _____ _____ ___ Input signal turns ON Input signal turns ON ON EN External input signal ES OFF XO ON Input devi nput device OFF XO ie 1 scan ON se 1 scan ON gt gt 2 scans ON y Operation when a pulse having an ON width of two scans or more is input The input device is turned ON for one scan only Step 0 gt END Step0 gt END Step 0 gt Program S ON _ External Input signal turns ON input signal OFF XO i ON
2. A A D A This register stores the serial communication error code 2 ch2 This register stores the serial communication error details 2 ch2 This register stores the serial communication setting ch2 This register stores the serial communication operational mode 2 ch2 This register stores the serial communication error code 3 ch3 This register stores the serial communication error details 3 ch3 This register stores the serial communication setting ch3 This register stores the serial communication operational mode 3 ch3 This register stores the serial communication error code 4 ch4 This register stores the serial communication error details 4 ch4 This register stores the serial communication setting ch4 This register stores the serial communication operational mode 4 ch4 This register stores the remaining points of send data ch1 This register stores the receive data points monitor ch1 This register stores the receive sum received data ch1 This register stores the receive sum received result ch1 This register stores the send sum ch1 This register stores the remaining points of send data ch2 This register stores the receive data points monitor ch2 R W R R R D DD 2 2 R W R W R R D D J D A JU A D D JU No SD8573 SD8574 SD8575 SD8580 SD8581 SD8583 SD8584 SD8585 SD8590 SD8591 SD8593 SD8594 SD8595 SD8621 SD8
3. iP E a ff a_i torecozonnt PT zwezo 1 11a 8 CH1 Internal clock Not used to CH8 A A phase input gt B Phase B input direction switch input is however employed in the case of 1 phase 1 count H W P External preset input E External enable input 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 19 1 High speed Counter Function Input assignment wise maximum frequency for high speed counters Input assignment wise maximum frequency for high speed counters is as follows MFX5U 32MO FX5UC 32MO Point e X6 to X17 are input frequencies up to 10 KHz regardless of maximum frequency value e Preset input and Enable Input are input frequencies up to 10 KHz regardless of maximum frequency value asap E A O O O E 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count ePife O of ff E 200 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 edge cal m KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge A 100KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 50 KHz count 2 reso teams fA je eee A A A 0 ee NETO 2 phase 2 count 1 edge 200 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 100 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 50 KHz count ECO O ani T 0 O 0 S 0 O O IO O NETO 2 phase 2 count 1 Bo 200 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 100 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 50 KHz count e e poe MES CC E a A ion IO O O O O O EC CA IS O E SS me 2 phase 2 count 1 edge EC KHz count 2 phase 2 count
4. Basic Settings Own Node Settings IP Address External Device Configuration External Device Configuration Application Settings Security Disable Direct Connection with MELSOFT Do Not Respond to CPU Module Search MMELSOFT Connection Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type WNon Protocol Communication Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type Advanced Settings Data Length Parity Bit Stop Bit Baud Rate Header Header Setting Value Terminator Terminator Setting Value Control Mode RS 232C Control Mode RS 485 Sum Check Code Control Procedure Fixed Setting 8 bit Process Mode 8 Bit Processing Mode Time out Period Time out Period SM SD Setting Latch Setting Advanced Settings 8 Bit Process Mode Time out Period Header Setting Value Terminator Setting Value FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible EMC Protocol Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type Advanced Settings Data Length Parity Bit Stop Bit Baud Rate Sum Check Code Fixed Setting Station Number Station Number Message Pattern Message Pattern Time out Period Time out Period 292 APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List SM SD Setting Latch Setting Advanced Settings Station Number Header Setting Value Time out Period SM SD for Compatible FX3 Series Compatibility WMODBUS_RTU Communication Basic Settings Communication
5. The LC device can be used as a high speed counter only when the FX3 compatible function is valid However this is only the LC device that is set up with parameter Also it is possible to use the HIOEN instruction Starting stopping the counting of the high speed counter The start and stop of the counting of the high speed counter of the UDCNTF instructions and HIOEN instructions with the FX3 compatible function valid are described below For the UDCNTF instruction or HIOEN instruction refer to LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Starting stopping the counting of the high speed counter UDCNTF instruction HIOEN instruction O The start of the high speed counter The simultaneous start of multiple CH The simultaneous stop of multiple CH Opo o The start gt stop and the stop start of the same CH in one scan The stop of the counter started by the UDCNTF instructions in the same step x The stop of the counter started by the UDCNTF instructions in a different step O The stop of the counter started by the HIOEN instruction the same step O The stop of the counter started by the HIOEN instruction a different step Supported x Not supported Not applicable 4 66 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function Poin tr e If the UDCNTF instructions and HIOEN instructions are used for the same CH it is not possible to use the H
6. e Recheck the structure of the step ladder Operation error e A value of 0 was input as a divisor in an e Review the data specified as the divisor in applied instruction the applied instruction Operation error e Data that cannot be converted was input Review the data specified in the applied in an applied instruction instruction Operation error A value of 0 a denormalized number a non number or was input in an applied instruction e Review the data specified in the applied instruction Operation error e An overflow occurred in an applied e Review the data specified in the applied instruction instruction Operation error e The output result is outside the allowable Review the data specified in the applied device range in an applied instruction instruction Operation error A module access device is specified to both s and d in a BMOV instruction Operation error e Data that is outside the allowable range e Review the data specified in the applied was input in an applied instruction instruction e Review the device specified in the BMOV instruction Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents of the parameters set to the sampling time TS Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents of the parameters set to the input filter constant a Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents o
7. o o ooooooooo 28 Step relay S o ooooooooooooooo 208 STOP Sal saree dig ode a ee aw 35 Subroutine program ooooooooo 29 System clock o o o ooooomoooooooo 49 System device 2 ketene Seta ra ows 215 System parameter oooooooooo 291 T Time setting n onana anaa 46 Time Zone scars cn er ae ir o a Et a 48 Timer US TDT e sueros Bn a aoe amp Bs ed 209 U User device cect Ge crea eo dB 8 fc dat ds 6 Gs 205 W Watchdog timer o ooooooo o 44 299 REVISIONS October 2014 First Edition January 2015 MAdded functions Fixed scan execution type program Online change PID control function FX3 compatible high speed counter function Routine timer MAdded or modified parts Section 1 3 3 1 3 2 Chapter 4 7 8 9 12 13 17 Section 19 2 Chapter 20 Section 21 2 Appendix 1 2 3 4 April 2015 A part of the cover design is changed This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 300 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation
8. 14 LATCH FUNCTION 14 1 Types of Latch 99 14 3 Latch Settings Latch settings This subsection describes the latch setting Setting latch on devices A range of multiple latches can be set for 1 type of device Two latch ranges latch 1 and latch 2 can be set However make sure that the range of latch 1 and latch 2 is not overlapping MiLatch range setting Set the device to latch its range and the latch type Operating procedure Device Setting window 1 Click Detailed Setting on the Device Setting Item Symbol o wail Sons at ay 2 On the Device Setting Tat lt jiy Dto 1777 window select the type of latch aT COO sai ae aa for the target device Then the Internal Relay M 7680 0 to 7679 Setting No Setting LAN RANGE em Ido Link Relay B 256 Dto FF No Setting No Setting is displayed special Link Rela SB 200 IS O Navigation window gt Annunciator E 128 Oto 12 Mo Setting No setting Parameter gt FX5UCPU gt step Relay 3 4096 Oto 4095 Setting CPU Parameter gt Memory Timer T 512 Oto 511 Mo Setting No Setting Device Setting gt Device Retentive Timer oT 16 to 1b petting Ho Setting Label Memory Area Detailed Counter D J56 Oto 255 Setting Mo Setting Setting gt Device Setting gt gt Lone Counter LE 64 to 63 petting Mo Setting Detail Setting Data Register D 5000 0 ta 7999 setting Mo Setting Latch Relay L 7680 Dto 7679 Total Device 11 1 Word JAK word Total Word Device 10 2 Word OTK Wo
9. CH1 SD6022 CH2 SD6062 PID instruction Built in analog monitor drive PID is executed The heater operation cycle is set to 2 sec Preset Heater output control Heater output 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 81 Program example 5 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning step response method PID control E z Use device The content of the devices used for the program is as follows Du ate Mt on Ir O D Weve Target value SV D500 5000 50 0 C 5000 50 0 C Measured value Pv s2 SD6022 According to input value According to input value 2 Parameter Sampling time TS D510 500 500 ms 500 500 ms Operation setting Operation direction s3 1 bO D511 0 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning ACT result result Input variation alarm s3 1 b1 D511 1 O Alarm is not provided O Alarm is not provided Output variation alarm s3 1 b2 D511 2 O Alarm is not provided O Alarm is not provided _Auto tuning _Auto tuning s3 1 b4 D511 4 1 AT is provided 0 AT is not provided Upper and lower limits of s3 1 b5 D511 5 O Setting is not provided Not used output value Select auto tuning mode Select auto tuning mode mode s3 1 b6 D511 6 0 Step response method 0 Step response method response method Not used Input filter constant a s3 2 D512 O Input filter is not 0 Input filter is not provided provided Proportional gain KP
10. Continue l Set whether or not to display the ERROR LED and BATTERY LED Critical Stop Moderate Continue XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FX5UCPU gt CPU Parameter gt RAS Setting gt LED Display Setting El LED Display RE E ERROR LED Minor Error Continue Error Display E BATTERY LED Battery Error Display T ERROR LED Display Minor Error Continue Sets whether or not the ERROR LED is displayed when a minor error Display Error occurs e Do Not Display Battery Error Sets whether or not the BATTERY LED is displayed when a battery e Display error occurs Do Not Display BATTERY LED Display 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 111 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function 112 Error Clear This function clears all the existing continuation errors at once Errors that can be cleared Error code 1080H 1090H 1800H 1810H 1811H 1900H 1920H 1921H 1FEO to 1FE6H 2008H 2120H 2121H 2400H 2440H 2441H 2522H 2801H 2820H 2821H 2822H 2823H 2840H 3360H to 3362H 3380H 3400H to 3406H 3420H 3500H 3502H to 3506H 350AH 350C to 350FH 3510H to 351DH 3580H 3581H 3600H 3611H to 3614H 3621H to 3624H 3631H to 3634H 3641H to 3644H 3651H to 3654H 3661H to 3664H 3671H to 3674H 3681H to 3684H 3691H to 3694H 36A1H to 36A4H 36B1H to 36B4H 36F0H 3780H 3781H How to clear errors Errors can be cleared in two ways Using the engineering tool Error na
11. Differential time TD s3 D516 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Input variation incremental alarm set value s3 20 D530 Not used Input variation decremental alarm set value D531 Notused used Not used Output variation incremental alarm set value s3 22 D532 E used 2000 2 second Output upper limit set value Output variation decremental alarm set value s3 23 D533 Not used 0 0 second Output lower limit set value Alarm output Input variation incremental is s3 24 bO D534 0 Not used Not used exceeded Input variation decremental s3 24 b1 D534 1 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation incremental s3 24 b2 D534 2 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation decremental s3 24 b3 D534 3 Not used Not used is exceeded PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV s3 25 D535 500 5 0 C Not used Output value upper limit ULV s3 26 D536 2000 2 second Not used Output value lower limit LLV s3 27 D537 0 0 second Not used Wait setting from end of tuning cycle to start of PID s3 28 D538 50 Wait is not provided Not used control KW Output value MV D502 According to operation According to operation This is an item not occupied o gt 1 The setting is always necessary 2 When CH1 is used 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 80 9 8 Examples of Program Program SM402 Initial pulse X010 PID control is started after auto tu
12. Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negl
13. This register stores the digital output value CH1 Digital operation value This register stores the digital operation value CH1 Analog input voltage monitor This register stores the analog input voltage value R W R W R W R W R W R W R W CH1 Averaging process setting This register stores the averaging process setting R W CH1 Time Average Frequency Average Moving Average This register stores the time average frequency average moving R W average i i APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD6034 SD6058 SD6059 SD6060 SD6061 SD6062 SD6063 SD6064 SD6066 SD6067 SD6068 SD6069 SD6070 SD6071 SD6072 SD6073 SD6074 SD6098 SD6099 SD6180 SD6181 SD6182 SD6183 SD6184 SD6188 SD6189 SD6190 SD6191 SD6192 SD6218 SD6219 CI This register stores the process alarm lower lower limit value R W This register stores the latest alarm code This register stores the latest error code This register stores the digital output value CH2 Time Average Frequency Average Moving Average This register stores the time average frequency average moving R W average i y A A D FX Compatible area The special registers for FX compatible area are shown below R Read only R W Read Write No SD8000 SD8001 SD8005 SD8006 SD8007 SD8008 SD8010 SD8011 SD8012 SD8013 SD8014 SD8015 SD8016 SD8017 CI i Power failure detection period This registe
14. V D D B D DW A R R R R R R R No SD8212 SD8213 SD8214 SD8215 SD8216 SD8217 SD8218 SD8230 SD8231 SD8232 SD8233 SD8234 SD8235 SD8236 SD8237 SD8310 SD8311 SD8330 SD8331 SD8332 SD8333 SD8334 SD8340 SD8341 SD8350 SD8351 SD8360 SD8361 SD8370 SD8371 SD8398 SD8399 SD8402 SD8403 SD8405 SD8408 SD8414 SD8415 SD8416 Code of communication error at slave station No 1 Code of communication error at slave station No 2 Code of communication error at slave station No 3 Code of communication error at slave station No 4 Code of communication error at slave station No 5 Code of communication error at slave station No 6 Code of communication error at slave station No 7 Number of communication error at master station Number of communication error at slave station No 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 RND Random number generation Low order RND Random number generation High order Counted number of scans for timing clock output 1 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 2 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 3 Counted number of scans for tim
15. Wif another or the same execution condition is satisfied while the fixed scan execution type program is being executed Operates according to the fixed scan execution mode setting Wif the execution condition is satisfied while the interrupt is disabled by the system Operates according to the fixed scan execution mode setting When an interrupt is generated during a standby while executing constant scan Executes the fixed scan execution type program Constant scan J ae Fixed scan interval a AS Waiting time Condition gt J established END processing Scan execution type program HE Fixed scan execution type program __ 1 If processing does not finish during the waiting time the scan time is extended Wif another interrupt occurs while the fixed scan execution type program is being executed If an interrupt program is triggered while the fixed scan execution type program is being executed the program operates in accordance with the interrupt priority Processing when the fixed scan execution type program starts The same processing as when the interrupt program starts Page 34 Processing at startup of interrupt program Fixed scan execution mode If execution condition for a fixed scan execution type program and fixed cycle interrupt 128 to 131 based on the internal timer of the CPU module is satisfied while interruption is disabled the operation of the program execution
16. tool the user cannot specify pointer numbers to be assigned Pointers are used for the following purposes e Specifies label and where to jump to for jump instruction CJ instruction e Specifies label top of subroutine program and call destination of subroutine instruction CALL instruction etc Global pointers Pointer for calling subroutine from all programs being run Program 1 program group A Program 3 program group C LT CALL P1000 7 P1000 H H lt Program 2 program group B H c CALL P1001 f P1001 l T Precautions when using global pointers e A global pointer of the same pointer number cannot be set as a label for more than one location e The initial pointer number for global pointers is fixed to 0 Label assignment pointers Pointer assigned to pointer type labels Pointer for label assignment are automatically assigned to pointer type labels by engineering tool Pointer numbers of pointers for label assignment cannot be directly specified By defining pointer type labels you can specify destination for jump instruction or subroutine program by label instead of pointer such as PO 21 9 Interrupt Pointer I Device used as label at top of interrupt program Can be used by all running programs Interrupt pointer interrupt program label SH e Interrupt Program IRET Poin tr Setting the execution type of program to the event execution type eliminates the need to write 10 the in
17. 2 phase 2 count 1 edge cal T KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge A 100KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 50 KHz count 2 reso toons fA je E Ee N 0 OAR AAN WO O S L O R rreson MET 2 phase 2 count 1 edge 200 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 100 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 50 KHz count 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 121 H7 2 phase 2 count 1 i E 200 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 100 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 50 KHz count it ECT fA P a 2 8 A A E a 0 E E ON E Yo pp E E 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count 200 KHz m 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count a 200 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 200 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 100KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 50 KHz count 5 rrosercomisa A iP oR eee eee 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count o 10 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 Bn 10 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 2 5 KHz count EEE A P fe E E a O A CA 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count A A 10 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 a 10 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 2 5 KHz count 1 phase 1 count SW 1 phase 1 count SW count S W fet hk 200 KHz m Se or a 0 0 O O A oK 2 phase 2 count 1 edge EEE K
18. Communication and error detection status of network modules are output to link special relays within the network Link special relays SB are devices intended to be used as a refresh destination for link special relays within the network Link special relays not used for refresh can be used for other purposes Step relay S Device used with step ladder Instructions Where step ladder is not used it can be used for purposes such as auxiliary relay 21 DEVICES 208 21 2 User Devices Timer T ST Device whereby measurement starts when the timer coil is turned ON time up occurs when current value reaches the setting value and the contact is turned ON The timer is an addition type counter When time is up the current value and setting value are the same value Types of timers There are timers T for which current value is maintained in 16 bits and retentive timers ST that maintain the current value even when the coil is turned OFF 4 Current value of timers T becomes 0 when the coil is turned OFF MTimer T Measurement starts when the timer s coil is turned ON Time up occurs when the current value of the timer matches the setting value and the timer s contact is turned ON When the timer s coil is turned OFF the current value becomes 0 and the timer s contact is turned OFF 2 XO 10 XO TO 1 TO coil 1 TO 4 y MA 0 escama gt TO contact 3 OFF HRetentive timer ST Measures time for
19. Input Logic Sets preset input logic when preset input is enabled e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Preset Value Sets preset input logic when preset input is enabled A E Input Comparison Enable Sets whether to enable or disable input comparison e Disable Disable when preset input is enabled e Enable Control Switch Sets preset execution timing when preset input is enabled Rising e Falling e Rising Falling Edge e Always During Input ON Enable Input Enable Disable Not available for FX3 compatible high speed counters Input Logic Ring Length Enable Disable Ring Length Measurement Unit Time Pulses No of per Rotation Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset Special relay list A list of special relays used for high speed counters is provided below Only the special relay corresponding to the LC device used as the high speed counter operates when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid The special relay special registers other than those described in the list below operates in the same manner as when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is not valid D D B D B B D DD 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 71 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function t direction monitor This is the device to monitor the directions of the counters from LC35 to LC55 when the FX3 compatible high speed counter is used Operation Description The c
20. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS series MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Application SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before use Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay attention to safety in order to handle the product correctly This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories L N WARNING and LN CAUTION N WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury 0 CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by N CAUTION may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WARNING Make sure to set up the following safety circuits outside the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents Most importantly set up the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as forward vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper a
21. Relationship with the SPD instruction Measurement time specified by operand of the SPD instruction is written in the special register for measuring unit time used by the rotational speed measurement function Measurement results of the SPD instruction are also stored in the special register of measurement results If rotational speed measurement has already been started by the HIOEN instruction the SPD instruction cannot be used for the same channel Inversely if pulse density is currently being measured by the SPD instruction rotational soeed measurement cannot be started for the same channel Other precautions There are common precautions when using high speed counters For details refer to L Page 163 Precautions when using high speed counters 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 1 19 1 High speed Counter Function 3 High speed comparison table The high speed comparison table is explained below Used to set high speed comparison table for high speed counters Sets match output setting for high speed counters XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed Counter gt Detail Setting gt High Speed Compare Table Window NO Counter GH Comparison Type Output Destination Device Comparison Value 1 Specification Method Comparison Value 1 Direct Comparison Value 1 Indirect T Disable Joe Set Direct Specification fl 2 Disable Set Direct
22. SD10846 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 5 SD10847 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 6 SD10848 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 7 SD10849 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 8 SD10850 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 9 SD10851 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 10 SD10852 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 11 SD10853 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 12 SD10854 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 13 SD10855 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 14 SD10856 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 15 SD10857 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 16 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List CI LM Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 5 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 5 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 6 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waitin
23. SD6026 SD6027 SD6028 SD6029 SD6030 SD6031 SD6032 SD6033 Built in positioning zero return dwell time axis 3 Built in positioning current address user unit Low order axis 4 Built in positioning current address user unit High order axis 4 Built in positioning current address pulse unit Low order axis 4 Built in positioning current address pulse unit High order axis 4 Built in positioning current speed user unit Low order axis 4 Built in positioning current speed user unit High order axis 4 Built in positioning execution table number axis 4 Built in positioning error code axis 4 Built in positioning error table number axis 4 Built in positioning maximum speed Low order axis 4 Built in positioning maximum speed High order axis 4 Built in positioning bias speed Low order axis 4 Built in positioning bias speed High order axis 4 Built in positioning acceleration time axis 4 Built in positioning deceleration time axis 4 Built in positioning zero return speed Low order axis 4 Built in positioning zero return speed High order axis 4 Built in positioning creep speed Low order axis 4 Built in positioning creep speed High order axis 4 Built in positioning zero point address Low order axis 4 Built in positioning zero point address High order axis 4 Built in positioning number of zero point signal for zero ret
24. SM8006 Battery error latch OFF Battery normal R ON Battery voltage low latch SM8007 Momentary power failure OFF No momentary power failure R ON Momentary power failure detected SM8008 Power failure detected OFF No momentary power failure R ON During momentary power failure SM8011 10 msec clock pulse ON and OFF in 10 ms cycles OFF 5 ms ON 5 ms SM8012 100 msec clock pulse ON and OFF in 100 ms cycles OFF 50 ms ON 50 ms SM8013 1 sec clock pulse ON and OFF in 1 sec cycles OFF 500 ms ON 500 ms SM8014 1 min clock pulse ON and OFF in 1 min cycles OFF 30 s ON 30 s SM8015 Clock stop and preset When SM8015 turns ON the real time clock is stopped At the edge from ON to OFF the time from SD8013 to SD8019 is written to the PLC and the clock is started again APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 233 SM8016 Time read display is stopped When SM8016 turns ON the time display is stopped R W SM8017 30 seconds correction At the edge from OFF to ON the RTC is set to the nearest minute R W When the second data is from 0 to 29 it is set to 0 When the second data is from 30 to 59 it is set to O and the minute data is incriminated by 1 SM8019 Real time clock error When the data stored in special registers is outside the allowable R time setting range this device turns ON SM8020 Zero OFF Zero flag OFF R ON Zero flag ON SM8021 Borrow OFF Borrow flag OFF R ON Borrow flag ON SM8022 Carry OFF Carr
25. Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 267 268 No SD10798 Connection No 3 protocol execution count SD10799 Connection No 3 protocol cancellation specification SD10800 Connection No 4 protocol execution status SD10802 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 1 SD10803 Connection No 4 received data v
26. When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN Specifications are subject to change without notice
27. Writes the portion edited on the ladder edit window of the engineering tool to the CPU module in increments of ladders Edited contents spanning multiple files or multiple portions can be written to the CPU module at once Poin tr For details on the operating procedure of online ladder block change on engineering tools refer to the following GX Works3 Operating Manual Editable contents Within a program block instructions and pointers P can be added changed or deleted Also as POU unit program blocks can be added changed or deleted However when the program FB file is not in agreement between engineering tool and a CPU module it cannot be added changed or deleted Range changeable in a single session The following shows the number of steps and number of ladder blocks which can be changed in a single session e Number of ladder blocks in a file 64 blocks or less 2048 steps or less e The total of the changed circuit block count in all files 256 blocks or less e The total capacity of the program file and the FB file after a change 1 M byte or less Online ladder block change during the boot operation If online change of ladder block is executed from the SD memory card during boot operation the corresponding file in the SD memory card which is the boot source can be changed as well Precautions This section describes the precautions on using online ladder block change Prohibited operation at online ladder blo
28. e 0 1ms e 0 4ms e 0 6ms e ims e 5ms e 10ms e 20ms e 70ms Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 192 19 6 General purpose Input Functions 19 7 PWM Function This chapter explains the PWM function Outline of PWM output The CPU module has a built in PWM function which allows PWM output on up to four channels For PWM output the output channel assignment pulse cycle units output pulse logic pulse width cycle etc are set using parameters and the HIOEN instruction is used to start stop pulse output Also the regular PWM instruction can be used PWM output specifications The PWM output specifications are explained below Number of output channels Up to four channels can be used for PWM output Output YO to Y7 can be selected for each channel in parameters Poin tr Outputs Y assigned for PWM output in parameter settings cannot be used by the positioning function Pulse output performance The cycle and pulse width are shown below Y4 to Y7 400 us 200 us Relationship between cycle and pulse width The relationship between period and pulse width is shown below When positive logic is set The relationship between the period and pulse width when the output pulse logic at start of pulse output is set to positive logic is shown below The pulse width is called the ON width PWM output start w command input Cycle ON width
29. e FX5 User s manual Hardware e FX5U User s manual Hardware e FX5UC User s manual Hardware e User s manual Application Programming manual Program Design Programming manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Communication manual e Serial communication manual e MODBUS communication manual e Ethernet communication manual e SLMP manual Positioning manual Analog manual Description Generic term for FX5 C32EX D and FX5 C32EX DS Generic term for output modules extension cable type and output modules extension connector type Generic term for FX5 8EYR ES FX5 8EYT ES FX5 8EYT ESS FX5 16EYR ES FX5 16EYT ES and FX5 16EYT ESS Generic term for FX5 C32EYT D and FX5 C32EYT DSS Generic term for FX5 C32ET D and FX5 C32ET DSS Generic term for FX5 32ER ES FX5 32ET ES and FX5 32ET ESS Generic term for FX5 extension power supply module and FX3 extension power supply module Different name for FX5 1PSU 5V Different name for FX3U 1PSU 5V The abbreviation for intelligent function modules Generic term for FX5 intelligent function modules and FX3 intelligent function modules Generic term for FX5 intelligent function modules Different name for FX3 special function blocks Different name for FX5 40SSC S Generic term for board for FX5U CPU module Generic term for FX5 232 BD FX5 485 BD and FX5 422 BD GOT Generic term for adapter for FX5 CPU module Generic term for FX5 232ADP and FX5 485ADP Generic term
30. 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 2 5 KHz count 1 phase 1 count S W 1 phase 1 count S W 1 count S W 200 KHz thas Font O O ie mE wsze ros 2 phase 2 count 1 edge KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 2 5 KHz count 120 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function pemen Af EA BN R Y LC he 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count SS C C G G EN 10 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 E E KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge A 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 2 5 KHz count TEC ff ta TL fe ok EEC A A A O A E 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count CN AR 10 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 E 10 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A E 2 5KHZ count E fa e e ETS EEES O O E O A C E 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count A B 10 KHz 2 phase 2 count 1 mn ine 10 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A 2 5KHz count A A phase input B B phase input P External preset input E External enable input MFX5U 64MU FX5U 80MUO e X10 to X17 are input frequencies up to 10 KHz regardless of maximum frequency value e Preset input and Enable Input are input frequencies up to 10 KHz regardless of maximum frequency value j e 0 0 A E EE CE Hee me 1 phase 2 count 1 phase 2 count 2 count CE E A 200 KHz
31. Annunciator F Detection No Table Fault detection program XO X10 _OFF gt ON OFF gt ON SET FS SM62 gt gt SD62 0 gt 5 SM62 SD63 01 H BCDP SD62 K4Y20 SD64 035 A Outputs No of f ere J the annunciator that turned ON SD79 0 Annunciator ON detection 21 DEVICES 206 21 2 User Devices How to turn annunciator F ON Use SET FO instruction The annunciator F turns ON only during the rise time of input conditions OFF gt ON the annunciator F remains ON even if the input condition is OFF Poin tr e The annunciator F can also be turned ON by OUT FO instruction but because it is processed every scan scan time is slower than when using SET FO instruction e If it is turned ON by means other than SET FO instruction or OUT FO instruction e g MOV instruction operation is the same as for internal relay Thus in SM62 does not turn ON and annunciator F numbers are not stored in SD62 and SD64 Annunciator F Detection No table to SD79 m Processing when annunciator F is ON Data stored in the special register becomes as follows SET F50 SET F25 SET F1023 aN O eae Up to 16 annunciator numbers can be stored EA 1 Annunciator F numbers that are ON are stored in SD64 to SD79 in sequence 2 Annunciator F numbers that are stored in SD64 are stored in SD62 3 Increments contents of SD63 Annunciator F Detection Number by 1 P
32. Ethernet Communication and MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Positioning Control Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control 13 MEMO PROGRAMMING This part consists of the following chapters 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 PROCESSING OF OPERATIONS ACCORDING TO CPU MODULE OPERATION STATUS 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 15 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 1 Scan Configuration The configuration of the scan of the CPU module is explained below 2 Initial processing and initialization processing in RUN mode Initial processing according to CPU module status and initialization processing in the RUN status are explained below Inside the CPU module Scan configuration Initial processing RUN time initialization processing I O refresh Program operations END processing Execute x Do not execute Initialization of input output module x Boot from SD memory card x CPU parameter check x xX System parameter check i x Assignment of I O numbers of input output module x Setting of module parameters x Initialization of device l
33. Fixed to 0 Fixed to 0 Step No 1st character 2nd character 3rd character File name first 8 characters of 4th character Unicode character E 5th character string 6th character 7th character 8th character 2 Drive number and file name Stored in the range from 1 Step No FB No File name b2 b1b0 SD81 With or without specification SD82 SD83 1st character 2nd character 3rd character File name first 8 characters of 4th character Unicode character l 5th character string 6th character 7th character 8th character 4 Parameter information b15 __b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SD87 SD88 SD89 2 SD memory card SD90 4 Data memory SD91 b15 b4 b3 b0 SD92 System information i Drive No File name Parameter storage destination Parameter type Module position Parameter No Network No Station No System information l SD93 Parameter type 1 System parameter SD94 2 CPU parameter SD95 3 Module parameter 4 Module extension parameter SD96 5 Memory card parameter SD97 Module position Built in high speed I O Intelligent module 0H 1H to 10H Built in serial communication 41H Built in analog Expansion board Expansion adapter 42H 60H 71H to 76H APPENDIX 241 Appendix 2 Special Register List SD81 to Detailed information 1 SD111 SD112 Detailed information 2 information category 242 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Regist
34. OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4634 High speed counter enable input logic CH7 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4635 High speed counter enable input logic CH8 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4644 High speed counter ring length CH1 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List No Name Description R W SM4645 oo speed counter ring length CH2 o Disabled ON Enabled SM4646 High speed counter ring length CH3 OFF Disabled ON Enabled SM4647 High speed counter ring length CH4 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4648 High speed counter ring length CH5 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4649 High speed counter ring length CH6 OFF Disabled ON Enabled SM4650 High speed counter ring length CH7 OFF Disabled ON Enabled SM4651 High speed counter ring length CH8 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4980 High speed comparison table high speed compare OFF Stopped R instruction operation ON Operation SM4982 High speed comparison table high speed compare OFF No error instruction error ON Error SM5000 Multi point output high speed comparison table operation OFF Stopped ON Operation SM5001 Multi point output high speed comparison table OFF Not completed completion ON Completion SM5020 Pulse width measurement operation CH1 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5021 Pulse width measurement operation CH2 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5022 Pulse width measurement opera
35. R W R W R R W This register stores the PLSY instruction accumulated number of pulses output to axis 1 This register stores the PLSY instruction accumulated number of pulses output to axis 2 This register stores the error code of Inverter communication ch1 This register stores the error parameter No of IVBWR instruction ch1 This register stores the error code of Inverter communication ch2 This register stores the error parameter No of IVBWR instruction ch2 This register stores the station number This register stores the total number of slave stations This register stores the refresh range This register stores the current link scan time This register stores the maximum link scan time This register stores the number of communication error at master station This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 1 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 2 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 3 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 4 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 5 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 6 This register stores the number of communication error at slave station No 7 This register stores the code of communication error at master station R R
36. SM4596 SM4597 SM4598 SM4599 SM4600 SM4601 SM4602 SM4603 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows The preset input operates with negative logic The preset input operates with positive logic e The timing to execute the preset is determined by the preset input logic and the preset control switch e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e When ON by the user e When OFF by the user e When set to negative logic with parameters e When set to positive logic with parameters 6 Cannot be modified while the high speed counter is operating Operates in the configured status when the high speed counter starts inter preset input comparison These devices are used to specify whether or not to perform a comparison with the preset value when there is preset input mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4612 SM4613 SM4614 SM4615 SM4616 SM4617 SM4618 SM4619 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Execute comparison processing with the preset value when there is preset Do not execute comparison processing when there is preset input input 8 t These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 143 19 1 Hig
37. SM4618 SM4619 SM4620 to SM4627 Not used High speed counter count direction monitor CH1 1 phase 2 input 2 Down counting Up counting phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH2 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH3 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH4 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH5 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH6 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH7 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction monitor CH8 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input High speed counter count direction switching CH1 1 phase 1 input Down counting Up counting S W High speed counter count direction switching CH2 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH3 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH4 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH5 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH6 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH7 1 phase 1 input S W High speed counter count direction switching CH8 1 phase 1 input S W Negative logic Positive logic Parameter setting values R R W
38. SM6021 1 Disable The built in analog is set to used CH CH2 SM6061 The PID output is initialized Built in analog monitor CH1 SD6022 PID instruction drive CH2 SD6062 Auto tuning is executed The heater operation cycle is set to 2 sec Preset Heater output control Heater output 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 79 Program example 4 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning limit cycle method PID control E z Use device The content of the devices used for the program is as follows jurina auto tunino inna PID co Target value SV 5000 50 0 C Measured value Pv s2 SD6022 According to input value 2 Operation setting 1 Backward operation CT O amis not provide Autotuning Autotuning s3 1 b4 1 AT is provided Upper and lower limits of s3 1 b5 D511 5 O Setting is not provided 1 Setting is provided output value Select auto tuning mode Select auto tuning mode mode s3 1 b6 D511 6 1 1 Limit cycle method cycle 1 Limit cycle method Not used Input filter constant a s3 2 D512 O Input filter is not O Input filter is not provided provided Proportional gain KP s3 D513 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Integral time my s3 4 D514 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Differential gain KD s3 D515 0 Differential gain is not 0 Differential gain is not provided provided
39. SM8175 X005 pulse catch Pulse catch ON when X005 is OFF gt ON SM8176 X006 pulse catch Pulse catch ON when X006 is OFF gt ON SM8177 X007 pulse catch Pulse catch ON when X007 is OFF gt ON R R R SM8183 Data communication error Master station OFF R ON Error SM8184 Data communication error Slave station No 1 OFF R ON Error SM8185 Data communication error Slave station No 2 OFF R ON Error SM8186 Data communication error Slave station No 3 OFF R ON Error i FF R i FF R FF R F R R R R SM8188 Data communication error Slave station No 5 ON Error SM8189 Data communication error Slave station No 6 O ON Error SM8190 Data communication error Slave station No 7 OF ON Error SM8191 Data communication in execution OFF Data communication in execution ON Data communication in nonexecution SM8246 LC46 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation ON Up count operation SM8247 LC47 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation ON Up count operation APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 235 ion No error 1 No error 2 No error 3 No error ON Error 5 OFF No error 6 No error T No error SM8248 LC48 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8249 LC49 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8250 LC50 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operat
40. STO Heater operation cycle M4 Auto tuning is executed M4 lt ST0 D502 STO lt D502 Auto tuning is executed The target value is set to 50 C The sampling time is set to 500 ms The operation direction is set to backward operation The auto tuning mode is set to limit cycle method The PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV is set to 5 0 C The output value upper limit ULV is set to ON for 2 sec PID instruction initial setting The output value lower limit LLV is set to ON for 0 sec The wait setting parameter kW from the end of tuning cycle to PID control start is set to 50 wait is not provided Auto tuning is started O Enable CH1 SM6021 1 Disable The built in analog is set to used CH CH2 SM6061 The PID output is initialized CH1 SD6022 CH2 SD6062 PID instruction Built in analog monitor drive Auto tuning is executed The heater operation cycle is set to 2 sec Preset Heater output control Heater output 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 71 Program example 3 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning step response method Use device The content of the devices used for the program is as follows uring auto t Target value SV D500 5000 50 0 C Not used Measured value pvy s2 SD6022 According to input value Not used 2 Parameter Sampling time TS D510 500 500 ms Not used Operation sett
41. STOP EY RUN status 86 11 REMOTE OPERATION 11 1 Remote RUN STOP e When set to STOP at contact ON When contact is set to OFF the CPU module is in the RUN status When contact is set to ON the CPU module is in the STOP status Step 0 gt END Step 0 gt END ON RUN contact 0 OFF RUN RUN STOP status STOP STOP status Engineering tool method Refer to the following LAGX Works3 Operating Manual Method using external devices that use SLMP Execute by SLMP command For details on commands refer to the following manual LTIMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Step 0 END Step 0 END ON Remote STOP command Ha t Tmb____ S External Device OFF ON Remote RUN command OFF o RUN RUN STOP status STOP STOP status 11 REMOTE OPERATION 11 1 Remote RUN STOP 87 88 11 2 Remote PAUSE With the RUN STOP RESET switch set to the RUN position of the CPU module the operation status is changed to PAUSE status from outside The PAUSE status is a status in which operation of the CPU module is stopped by holding the ON OFF status of all output Y Application of remote PAUSE Remote PAUSE can be used to hold the output Y turned ON when the CPU module is in the RUN status in the same ON status even when the CPU module is changed to STOP status Method of execution of remote PAUSE The following are the methods of execution of remote PAUSE E
42. aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult Mitsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system Note If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained in the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you notice a doubtful point an error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric representative When doing so please provide the manual number given at the end of this manual MEMO CONTENTS SARET IP REGAUTHONS 2s sees sete cas eee eee eed da e Tasa we ais ee oe 1 INTRODUCTION 224262248 des Beek Geer ease eee ees e ness ee ee dedo daa aa a
43. caused by disturbance etc and to minimize the fluctuations Setting range 0 to 32767 x 10 ms e When the differential time TD is large it prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused by disturbance etc e It is not always necessary to use the differential time when disturbance is small for example Deviation TD3 PID operation pe ee ee AI III A IIA XA r Disturbance TD PID operation TD2 PID operation Deviation EV Time Output value MV TD3 PID operation TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 TD2 PID operation TD1 PID operation Time PID operation in backward operation heating Temperature Changes caused by disturbance _TD3 PID operation oN MS Target value SV S PI operation without differential operation TD2 PID operation TD1 PID operation TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 Time Output value MV y Changes in output caused by disturbance N N TD3 PID operation TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 TD1 PID operation TD2 PID operation gt PI operation without differential operation Time 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters 65 66 Ex PID operation in forward operation cooling Temperature TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 PI operation without differential operation Changes caused by disturbance TD1 PID operation TD2 PID operation e e oe Target value SV STD3 PID operation Time Output value MV TD3
44. correctly e Verify that the reference axis and counterpart axis are not in use and the stop conditions are not satisfied e Verify that the reference axis and counterpart axis are not in use and the stop conditions are not satisfied e Verify that the reference axis and counterpart axis are not in use and the stop conditions are not satisfied e Verify that the reference axis and counterpart axis are not in use and the stop conditions are not satisfied e Check servo wiring and setting e Check the total number of tables in the parameters and tables registered in the comparison match instruction e Disable the ring length e Set the preset value within the ring length range Detailed information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information Error locat
45. correctly formatted An error was found in the data of the file The file specified in the parameters does not exist target module are different e The security key locking the program does not match the security key written in the CPU module e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure the model of the module to be set is consistent with the parameters of the module connected e Do not use more than 256 I O points in programs e Use up to 16 input output input output and intelligent function modules e Use up to 2 communication adapters e Use up to 4 analog adapters e Use up to 2 extension power supply modules e Use up to 1 expansion board e Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected e If the version of the CPU module is correct there may be a malfunction in the connected module Replace the connected module e Check the connection of the SD memory card If the problem persists there may be a malfunction in the SD memory card or CPU module e Format the SD memory card If the problem persists there may be a malfunction in the SD memory card or CPU module Recreate the file e Rewrite the project e Modify the module parameter set value and rewrite t
46. e The specified file does not exist e The size of the specified file has exceeded that of the existing file maa Error details and cause Action Protect error e An error occurred when writing data to the specified drive memory Check the specified drive memory Or write data again after changing the corresponding drive memory Finish the operation of the other engineering tool and then execute the function again If the operation of the other engineering tool is on hold resume and finish the operation of the other engineering tool and then execute the function again Check the request data that has been specified Check the data to be searched Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where the remote request can be executed For remote operation set the parameter to Enable remote reset Execute again after checking the specified drive memory or file Execute again after checking the specified drive memory or file Execute again after checking the file password 32 Execute again after checking the clock setting of the engineering tool personal computer Execute again after checking the size of the specified file Execute again after checking the size of the specified file Execute again after a while Execute again after changing the target drive memory Execute communication after unlocking the remote password processing Check the external device operation Check the status of t
47. e To rewrite the minimum value only the HCMOV instruction can be used e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing When the current value of a high speed counter becomes less than the minimum value the value is updated in END processing When the value is read using the HCMOV instruction it is first updated to the latest value and then read Further when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid the value is updated also when UDCNTF instruction is executed mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset High speed counter pulse density These devices store the measurement results of pulse density measurement mode Corresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4507 SD4537 SD4567 SD4597 SD4627 SD4657 SD4687 SD4717 SD4506 SD4536 SD4566 SD4596 SD4626 SD4656 SD4686 SD4716 MDescription These devices store the measurement results of pulse density measurement mode rotational soeed measurement mode Poin tr e These devices also store the pulse density measurement when in rotational speed measurement mode e If the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid these devices operate only when the SPD instruction operates Update timing The pulse density is updated at each measurement unit time when set to pulse density measurement
48. instruction instruction e SPD instruction ON execution e Power ON reset STOP PAUSE 140 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Flag that detects counter value overflow of high speed counter ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4532 SM4539 SM4533 SM4534 SM4535 SM4536 SM4537 SM4538 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Overflow occurs Overflow does not occur Current value counted 1 past maximum positive value e Does not operate when ring length setting is enabled e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Overflow occurs This is updated with the END processing When the FX3 e When OFF by the user compatible high speed counter function is valid the updating is made also e Power ON reset when instruction UDCNTF instruction is executed ON e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e SM50 turned ON h sp unter underflow Flag that detects counter value underflow of high speed counter mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4548 SM4555 SM4549 SM4550 SM4551 SM4552 SM4553 SM4554 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Underflow occurs Underflow does not occur Current value cou
49. ltem CHI Ha CH3 Hd ree Se e re E fae AS UT TN TN Output 5 1enal Set output sgnal Output Signal TO TO wal ral Pulse Width Cycle Unit Set pulse width cycle unit Pulse Width Cycle Unit Tma Tims ma ms Output Pulse Logic Set output pulse ber Output Pulse Logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Pulse Width Set pulse width Pulse Width l me l mes l me l mz Cycle set cycle Cycle me me OU me me Displayed items Use PWM Output Set whether to use PWM output or not Enable Enable Output Signal Set the output destination device of output signal YO to Y7 Pulse Width Cycle Unit Set pulse width cycle unit e ims e Tmicro s us Output Pulse Logic Sets output pulse logic e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Pulse Width Sets the ON OFF width of the pulse e When pulse width period unit is set to 1 ms 1 to 2147483 ms e When pulse width period unit is set to 1 micro s us 1 to 2147483647 micro s us Cycle Sets cycle e When pulse width cycle unit is set to 1 ms 1 to 2147483 ms e When pulse width cycle unit is set to 1 micro s us 1 to 2147483647 micro s us Poin tr The items specified in the parameters are stored in special devices when the CPU module is set from STOP to RUN 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function 195 List of Special relays special registers The list of special relays special registers used in PWM output is shown below R W Read or w
50. 1 s3 3 D513 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Integral time my s3 4 D514 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Differential gain KD s3 D515 0 Differential gain is not 0 Differential gain is not provided provided Differential time TD s3 D516 According to auto tuning According to auto tuning result result Input variation incremental alarm set value s3 20 D530 Not used Input variation decremental alarm set value D531 Not used Output variation incremental alarm set value s3 22 D532 Not used 2000 2 second Output upper limit set value Output variation decremental alarm set value s3 23 D533 Not used 0 0 second Output lower limit set value Alarm output Input variation incremental is s3 24 bO D534 0 Not used Not used exceeded Input variation decremental s3 24 b1 D534 1 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation incremental s3 24 b2 D534 2 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation decremental s3 24 b3 D534 3 Not used Not used is exceeded PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV s3 25 D535 AN Not used Output value upper limit ULV s3 26 D536 Not used Output value lower limit LLV Output value lower limit LLV lower limit LLV D537 Not used Wait setting from end of tuning cycle to start of PID s3 28 D538 A L used control KW Output value MV dd ps0z 1800 1 8 second 1800 1 8 second
51. 180 Rising edge ring counter value Pulse width latest value The latest value of the pulse width is stored O j When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from the rising edge up to the falling edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from the falling edge up to the rising edge e The latest value of the pulse width can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5025 SD5024 SD5045 SD5044 SD5065 SD5064 SD5085 SD5084 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value E Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value 4 80 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function Pulse width maximum value The maximum value of the pulse width is stored e When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from the rising edge up to the falling edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from the falling edge up to the rising edge e The maximum value of the pulse width can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5087 SD5086 SD5047 SD5046 SD5067 SD5066 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value SD5027 SD5026 es y m n Pulse width mi
52. 8 second According to operation This is an item not occupied 1 The setting is always necessary 2 When CH1 is used 2 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 8 9 8 Examples of Program Program SM402 MOV K5000 D500 DS O o MOV K500 D510 7 SET D511 0 SET D511 5 MOV K2000 D532 X010 RST D511 6 K1800 D536 D511 4 PID control is started after auto tuning MOV SET SM402 RST SM6021 Initial pulse SM402 RST D502 Initial pulse X010 X011 PID control is started without auto tuning MN D500 SD6022 D510 D502 PID control is started after auto tuning X010 PID control is started after auto tuning X011 OUTHS STO K2000 PID control is started without auto tuning M4 PID is executed STO Heater operation cycle M4 PID is executed M4 lt STO D502 H STO lt D502 Auto tuning is executed The target value is set to 50 C The sampling time is set to 500 ms The operation direction is set to backward operation PID instruction initial setting The upper and lower limits of output value is set to valid The output value upper limit is set to ON for 2 sec The output value lower limit is set to ON for O sec The auto tuning is set to step response method The output of auto tuning is set to 1 8 sec Auto tuning initial setting Auto tuning is executed The built in analog is set to used CH CH1 SM6021 CH2 SM6061 0 Enable 1 Disable The PID output is initial
53. APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code Error details and cause e Table shift cannot be completed in time because one or more tables shifted per 10 ms e The counterpart axis table for the interpolation operation cannot be found The counterpart axis table for the interpolation operation cannot be found The counterpart axis table for the interpolation operation cannot be found The counterpart axis table for the interpolation operation cannot be found Conditions such as limits were satisfied to stop pulses in the reference axis or counterpart axis Pulses are being output Conditions such as limits were satisfied to stop pulses in the reference axis or counterpart axis Pulses are being output Conditions such as limits were satisfied to stop pulses in the reference axis or counterpart axis Pulses are being output Conditions such as limits were satisfied to stop pulses in the reference axis or counterpart axis Pulses are being output There is a sum check error in ABS data read from servo The number of high speed comparison tables registered is greater than the upper limit e The preset value is greater than the ring length set value Action Set the interval of table shifts to 10 ms or greater e Set the table of the counterpart axis correctly e Set the table of the counterpart axis correctly e Set the table of the counterpart axis correctly e Set the table of the counterpart axis
54. B input switches OFF gt 0N 1 count up when phase A input is OFF and phase B input switches ON gt 0FF At down counting 1 count down when phase A input is ON and phase B input switches ON gt 0FF 1 count down when phase A input is OFF and phase B input switches OFF gt 0N At up counting At down counting A phase input 1 1 B phase input 4 4 6 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function E2 phase 2 input counter 4 edge count Counting method of 2 phase 2 input counter 4 edge count is as follows At up counting 1 count up when phase B input is OFF and phase A input switches OFF gt 0N 1 count up when phase A input is ON and phase B input switches OFF gt 0N 1 count up when phase B input is ON and phase A input switches ON gt 0FF 1 count up when phase A input is OFF and phase B input switches ON gt 0FF At down counting 1 count down when phase A input is OFF and phase B input switches OFF gt 0N 1 count down when phase B input is ON and phase A input switches OFF gt 0N 1 count down when phase A input is ON and phase B input switches ON gt 0FF 1 count down when phase B input is OFF and phase A input switches ON gt 0FF At up counting At down counting A phase input B phase input Minternal clock Counting method of internal clock is as follows OFF ON Count direction switching bit ON Internal clock 1 MHz OFF Up counting Down counting se SS Current value Under ordinary circumstances the inter
55. Control Built in Ethernet function A function related to the Ethernet such as the connection with the MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s MELSOFT products and GOTs and socket communication Manual Ethernet Communication Serial communication function A function related to the serial communication such as N N Network MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s MC protocol inverter communication function and non protocol Manual Serial communication Communication 4 FUNCTION LIST MODBUS RTU communication function Connection with the products which support MODBUS RTU is MELSEC Q F FX5 User s available The master and slave functions can be used Manual NODBUS Communication 4 FUNCTION LIST 43 44 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION This function detects CPU module hardware or program errors by monitoring the scan time Using the watchdog timer which is an internal timer in the CPU module the following scans are monitored e Initial scan 1st scan e 2nd scan and after 5 1 Scan time monitoring time setting Sets the scan time monitoring time O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt RAS Setting gt Scan Time Monitoring Time WDT Setting Window Hem it setting ooo 5 Scan Time Monitoring Tine WDT Setting ee ee a Initial Scan 000 me After 2nd Scan 00 me Displayed items Initial Scan Sets the scan time monitoring time WDT for the initial scan first 10 to 2000 ms 10 ms
56. Error Invalid module No Continue Operation Error Continue Memory Card Error Continue Module Verify Error stop system Configuration Error Continue F Displayed Instruction Invalid module No Sets the CPU module operation upon detection of an incorrect module Continue Continue Execution Error No e Stop Operation Error Sets the CPU module operation upon operation error e Continue Continue e Stop Memory Card Error Sets the CPU module operation upon a memory card error e Continue Continue e Stop Module Verify Error Sets the CPU module operation upon a module verification error e Continue Stop e Stop System Configuration Error Sets the CPU module operation upon a system configuration error Continue e Stop 110 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function Specify the operation which the CPU module should perform when an error occurs on each intelligent function module XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt System Parameter gt I O Assignment Setting Model Name Intelligent Module Mo serial Communication ch POPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detection f E Modde GPU FXBU 32MRES Critical Stop Moderate Continue CPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detection Sets the CPU module operation upon the detection of major or moderate errors in the configured module e Critical Stop Moderate Continue e Critical Stop Moderate Stop e Critical Continue Moderate
57. FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication lt JY997D55901 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication lt JY997D56101 gt MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication lt JY997D56201 gt MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual SLMP lt JY997D56001 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Positioning Control lt JY997D56301 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control lt JY997D60501 gt GX Works3 Operating Manual lt SH 081215ENG gt TERMS Description Performance specifications procedures before operation and troubleshooting of the CPU module Describes the details of hardware of the FX5U CPU module including input output specifications wiring installation and maintenance Describes the details of hardware of the FX5UC CPU module including input output specifications wiring installation and maintenance Describes basic knowledge required for program design functions of the CPU module devices labels and parameters Describes specifications of ladders ST FBD LD and other programs and labels Describes specifications of instructions and functions that can be used in programs Describes N N network MELSEC Communication protocol inverter communication non protocol communication and predefined protocol support Describes MODBUS serial communication Describes the functions of the built in Ethernet port communication function Explains methods for the device that is communicat
58. Function e Operation when preset input logic negative logic preset control switch rising edge falling edge The preset is executed when the preset input changes ON gt OFF and when it changes OFF gt 0N Presetinput OFF Count input of JU UU UU UU UU UU UU LIL Current value 1 OANWABRODN 0 0 e Operation when preset input logic negative logic preset control switch constant when ON The preset is constantly executed while the preset input is OFF ON Presetinput OFF Count input ofp J UU UU UU UU UU UU LLL Current value 1 O O NO0 0dOo yo O High speed counter preset value These devices set the values to store in the current values when presets are executed ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4513 SD4543 SD4573 SD4603 SD4633 SD4663 SD4693 SD4723 SD4512 SD4542 SD4572 SD4602 SD4632 SD4662 SD4692 SD4722 MDescription These devices set the values to set for the current values when presets are executed If the preset value is set to be greater than the ring length an error occurs when the high speed counter is started Point e The preset value can also be modified while the high speed counter is operating The update timing is END processing e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as foll
59. High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W order CH 1 rotation CH1 SD4519 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH 1 SD4530 High speed counter current value Low order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH2 R W SD4531 High speed counter current value High order CH2 SD4532 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W SD4533 High speed counter maximum value High order CH2 CH2 SD4534 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W SD4535 High speed counter minimum value High order CH2 CH2 SD4536 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH2 SD4537 High speed counter pulse density High order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH2 R W SD4538 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH2 SD4539 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH2 R W SD4540 High speed counter preset control switch CH2 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH2 SD4542 High speed counter preset value Low order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH2 R W SD4543 High sp
60. Input i nput device OFF X0 E 1scanON Cautions when using the pulse catch function e The pulse catch function operates only when Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch is set with parameters e The pulse catch function can be used on inputs XO to X17 on the CPU module Note however that these inputs can be used on up to eight channels Do not perform the following on inputs X0 to X17 for which the pulse catch function is selected Doing so results in the input device not turning ON normally in one scan after the pulse is detected e Use of direct device DX e Execution of input refreshing during execution of the REF RFS instructions etc 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 19 4 Pulse Catch Function 87 19 5 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function This section explains the FX3 compatible pulse catch function Outline of FX3 compatible pulse catch function An FX3 compatible pulse catch function is mounted on the CPU module When the input signal XO to X7 turns OFF gt ON a special relay SM8170 to SM8177 is immediately set to ON by interrupt processing Use of these special relays in a normal sequence program enables pulse signals that are incompletely sampled in regular input processing to be caught To use the FX3 compatible pulse catch function pulse catch setting and the input response time must be set with parameters Functions equivalent to the MELSEC Q L series pulse catch function are also mounted For details of functi
61. KHz 50 KHz A A A C C C C I I E MEN I ME e a e e E E EI oe A a e poe oee e oe fore EI ETT EI ETT CEI ET e fore ETT aR CH1 C252 4 edge count LC52 E 50 KHz 50 KHz CH4 C253 1 edge count LC53 AE MEMES EA C C E 4 C253 OP 4 edge count LC53 1 C254 1 edge count LC54 I T cra ozsa s i EIN 1 i E CON EN or IC CIO i fA LO EI CH4 C255 1 edge count LC55 Colo o la BIP Je 200 KHz 200 KHz CH4 C255 1 edge count LC55 oo JA B P JE 50 KHz 50 KHz A A phase input B Phase B input P External preset input E External enable input 168 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function FX3 compatible high speed counter setting This section describes the setting of the case when the FX3 compatible high speed counter is used FX3 compatible high speed counter are set by GX Works3 Point e If a high speed comparison table or a multi point output high speed comparison table is used it is necessary to set the parameter in the same manner as the FX5 high speed counter e It is necessary to specify also the input response time Parameter setting FX3 compatible high speed counter parameter setting method is explained below For parameter setting of each operation refer to the following e For FX3 compatible high speed counters refer to Page 169 FX3 compatible high speed counter e For high speed comparison table refer
62. Protocol Type Advanced Settings Parity Bit Stop Bit Baud Rate Fixed Setting Host Station No Host Station No Slave Response Timeout Slave Response Timeout Broadcast Delay Broadcast Delay Message to Message Delay Message to Message Delay Timeout Retry Count Setting Timeout Retry Count Setting Modbus Device Assigned Modbus Device Assigned Device Assigned SM SD Setting Latch Setting Advanced Settings Host Station No Slave Response Timeout Broadcast Delay Message to Message Delay Timeout Retry Count Setting FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible WPredefined Protocol Support Function Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type Advanced Settings Data Length Parity Bit Stop Bit Baud Rate Minverter Communication Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type Advanced Settings Data Length Parity Bit Stop Bit Baud Rate Fixed Setting Response Waiting Time Response Waiting Time SM SD Setting Latch Setting Advanced Settings Response Waiting Time FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible EN N Network Basic Settings Communication Protocol Type Communication Protocol Type Fixed Setting Host Station No Host Station No Total Number of Local Station Total Number of Local Station Refresh Range Refresh Range Timeout Retry Count Setting Timeout Retry Count Setting Monitoring Time Monitoring Time APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List 293 Link Device Pattern P
63. R W High speed counter preset input logic CH1 High speed counter preset input logic CH2 High speed counter preset input logic CH3 A High speed counter preset input logic CH4 A High speed counter preset input logic CH5 A High speed counter preset input logic CH6 A High speed counter preset input logic CH7 High speed counter preset input logic CH8 High speed counter preset input comparison CH1 Valid Invalid Parameter R W setting values High speed counter preset input comparison CH2 High speed counter preset input comparison CH3 High speed counter preset input comparison CH4 High speed counter preset input comparison CH5 High speed counter preset input comparison CH6 High speed counter preset input comparison CH7 High speed counter preset input comparison CH8 Not used 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function SM4628 SM4629 SM4630 SM4631 SM4632 SM4633 SM4634 SM4635 SM4636 to SM4643 SM4644 SM4645 SM4646 SM4647 SM4648 SM4649 SM4650 SM4651 SM4652 to SM4659 Parameter setting values Negative logic Positive logic High speed counter enable input logic CH2 High speed counter enable input logic CH3 High speed counter enable input logic CH4 High speed counter enable input logic CH5 High speed counter enable input logic CH6 High speed counter enable input logic CH7 High speed counter enable input logic CH8 High speed
64. RESET FOR NEXT e The relationship between FOR and e Make sure that FOR and NEXT instructions Error location At END instruction error NEXT instructions is invalid are each executed the same number of information instruction times In addition check the FOR syntax for execution any invalid jump instructions APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code 279 Error code 3341H FOR NEXT instruction error 3342H 3360H Nesting depth error 3361H Nesting depth error 3362H Nesting depth error 3380H 3381H Pointer execution error 3382H 33DOH Temporary area exceeded 33E0H Program structure error 33E1H 33E2H 33E3H Program structure error 33E4H Program structure error 33E5H Program structure error 33E6H Program structure error 33E7H Program structure error 33F1H Program structure error 33F2H APPENDIX 280 Appendix 3 Error Code The number of nesting levels of subroutine calls is invalid e The number of nesting levels of FOR instructions is invalid e The number of nesting levels of DI instructions is invalid e There is an END FEND GOEND or STOP instruction in a subroutine program e The temporary area was used incorrectly e The relationship between LD LDI LDP LDF LDPI LDFI and ANB ORB instructions is invalid e The relationship between FOR and NEXT instructions is invalid e The relationship between MC and MCR instructions is invalid e The relationship between STL and RETSTL in
65. SD4549 SD4560 High speed counter current value CH3 2147483648 to 2147483647 R W SD4562 High speed counter maximum value CH3 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 R W SD4564 High speed counter minimum value CH3 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647 R W SD4566 High speed counter pulse density CH3 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4567 SD4568 High speed counter rotational speed CH3 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4569 SD4570 High speed counter preset control switch CH3 0 Rising edge R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON SD4572 High speed counter preset value CH3 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4573 SD4574 High speed counter ring length CH3 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4575 SD4576 High speed counter measurement unit time CH3 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4577 SD4578 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH3 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value R W SD4579 SD4590 High speed counter current value CH4 2147483648 to 2147483647 R W SD4592 High speed counter maximum value CH4 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 R W SD4594 High speed counter minimum value CH4 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647 R W SD4596 High speed counter pulse density CH4 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4598 High speed counter rotational speed CH4 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4600 High speed counter preset control switch CH4 0 Rising edge Parameter set value R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON SD4602 High s
66. SM402 After RUN ON for one scan only R ON 1 scan OFF SM403 After RUN OFF for one scan only R NT scan 1 scan OFF SM409 0 01 second clock R 0 005 s 0 005 s SM410 0 1 second clock R 0 05 s 0 05 s SM411 0 2 second clock R 0 1s 0 1 s SM412 1 second clock R 0 5s 0 5 s 1s ns SM413 2 second clock R 1s Ms LJ SM414 2n second clock R S fns f SM415 2n ms clock R n ms ms In ms SM420 Timing clock output 1 n1 scan SM421 Timing clock output 2 n2 scan n2 scan n1 scan SM422 Timing clock output 3 n2 scan n2 scan n1 scan SM423 Timing clock output 4 n2 scan n2 scan n1 scan SM424 Timing clock output 5 n2 scan n2 scan n1 scan The special relays for drive information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write Memory card usable OFF Unusable ON Use enabled Memory card protect OFF Not protected ON Protected Memory card insertion OFF No drive 2 ON Drive 2 present APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 225 SM605 Memory card interchange protect OFF Remove insert enabled R W ON Remove insert prohibited SM606 Memory card disable request OFF Clear command R W ON Command SM607 Memory card disable status OFF Not disabled by SD memory card forced stop request R ON Disabled by SD memory card forced stop request SM632 Data memory write error detection OFF Write not executed normal R ON Write error SM633 Data memory writing OFF Write not executed R ON Wr
67. SM8801 Retry ch1 OFF No retry R ON Retry SM8802 Timeout ch1 OFF No timeout R ON Timeout SM8810 MODBUS RTU communication ch2 OFF Communication stop R ON Communication SM8811 Retry ch2 OFF No retry R ON Retry SM8812 Timeout ch2 OFF Not timeout R ON Timeout SM8820 MODBUS RTU communication ch3 OFF Communication stop R ON Communication SM8821 Retry ch3 OFF No retry R ON Retry SM8822 Timeout ch3 OFF No timeout R ON Timeout SM8830 MODBUS RTU communication ch4 OFF Communication stop R ON Communication SM8831 Retry ch4 OFF No retry R ON Retry SM8832 Timeout ch4 OFF No timeout R ON Timeout SM8861 Host station No setting SD latch enabled ch1 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8871 Host station No setting SD latch enabled ch2 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8881 Host station No setting SD latch enabled ch3 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled 238 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List SM8891 SM8920 SM8921 SM8930 SM8931 SM8940 SM8941 SM8950 SM8951 SM9040 SM9041 SM9042 SM9043 SM9044 SM9045 SM9046 SM9047 SM9056 SM9080 SM9081 Host station No setting SD latch enabled ch4 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled Inverter communication ch1 OFF No communication R ON Communication IVBWR instruction error ch1 OFF No error R ON Error Inverter communication ch2 OFF No communication R ON Communicati
68. Setting gt Basic Settings 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 69 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function Window Item Use Do Not Use Counter Use Not Use Counter derce Counter device Operation Mode GH 1 Set whether to use counter or not Enable Disable GH2 L35 Operation equivalent to G235 L36 Operation equivalent to 236 Set operation mode Operation Mode Normal Mode Mormal Mode Pulse Input Mode Set pulse input mode Pulse Input lode l Phaze 1 Input 5 Up Down Switch l Phaze 1 Input S W Up Down Switch Preset Input Set present Preset Input Enable Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Preset Value 0 Input Comparison Enable Disable Enable Enable Control Switch Rising Rising Enable Input Set enable input Enable Input Enabler Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Ring Length Setting Set ring length Ring Length Enable Disable Disable Disable Ring Length 2147403648 21474583648 Measurement Unit Time set measurement unit time Measurement Unit Time 1000 1000 Pulse No_of per Rotation bet the pulse No of per rotation Pulse No of per Rotation 1000 1000 Displayed items Item Default Set whether use counter or not Setting range Use Not Use Disable Enable CH1 Counter device Select the high speed counter of input assignment which is compatible with FX3 e LC35 Operation equivalent to C235 e LC41 Operati
69. The built in analog is set to used CH k Enable CH2 SM6061 The PID output is initialized CH1 SD6022 CH2 SD6062 PID instruction Built in analog monitor drive PID operation is executed The heater operation cycle is set to 2 sec Preset Heater output control Heater output 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 759 Program example 2 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning limit cycle method Use device The content of the devices used for the program is as follows Target value SV 1 Not used Measured value PV s2 SD6022 Not used Acn loe Autotuning Autotuning s3 1 b4 1 AT is provided is provided 1 AT is provided Not used Upper and lower limits of s3 1 b5 D511 5 0 Setting is not provided Not used output value Select auto tuning mode Select auto tuning mode mode s3 1 b6 D511 6 1 1 Limit cycle method cycle 1 Limit cycle method Not used Input filter constant a s3 2 D512 O Input filter is not Not used provided Proportional gain KP 1 s3 D513 According to auto tuning Not used result Integral time my s3 4 D514 According to auto tuning Not used result Differential gain KD s3 5 D515 0 Differential gain is not Not used provided Differential time TD s3 6 D516 According to auto tuning Not used result Input variation incremental alarm set value s3 20 D530 Not used Input variation decremental alarm set value D531 Not
70. The processing time from the CPU module switching from STOP gt RUN up to start of execution of operations in the sequence program fluctuates according to the system configuration and parameter settings Normally this time is within one second Processing of operations in STOP status In the STOP status execution of operations in the sequence program is stopped by the RUN STOP RESET switch or a remote stop The CPU module also enters the STOP status when a stop error occurs HOutput when CPU module enters STOP status When the CPU module enters the STOP status all output points Y turn OFF For device memory other than outputs Y non latch devices are cleared and latch devices are held However when SM8033 is on and CPU module switches RUN gt STOP it is possible to hold an output state and the current value of a device Processing of operations in paused status In a paused status execution of operations in the sequence program is stopped after one scan execution but with outputs and device memory states held by a remote pause 2 PROCESSING OF OPERATIONS ACCORDING TO CPU MODULE OPERATION STATUS 35 36 of operations by the CPU module during switch operations Processing of operations by the CPU module is as follows according to the RUN or STOP mode RUN gt STOP The program is executed up to the END instruction and then stops All output points turn OFF Latch devices are held and non latch device
71. Word Setting lt Detailed Settine gt lt Detailed Setting gt Dey ice Points Range 1024 Oto 1777 1024 Oto 1777 7680 Oto 7679 256 IIS 256 Dto FF 128 0to 127 4096 Oto 4095 512 IN 16 Oto 1b 56 Uto 255 54 Oto 63 8000 Oto 7999 7680 Dto 7679 11 1 Word 10 2 Word 15 7K Bit Ww Setting Mo Setting Mo Setting Setting Mo Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Ho Setting Ho Setting Ho Setting Mo Setting Mo Setting No Setting Mo Setting No Setting 1 The capacity of each area can be changed Page 94 Device Label Memory Area Setting 2 The number of points of user devices can be changed K Page 95 Device Setting 12 1 Default Capacity of Each Area JEK Word 2 1K Word 251K Bit The default capacity of each area is as follows Item Device high speed Area Capacity Device standard Area Capacity Label Area Capacity Latch Label Area Capacity Capacity 12 K words 35 K words 12 K words 1 K words 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 12 1 Default Capacity of Each Area 12 2 The Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area The setting range of the capacity of each area on the device label memory is as follows Item Setting range of capacity of each area Device high speed Area Capacity 0 to 12 K words Device standard Area Capacity 0 to 48 K words Label Area Capacity 0 to 48 K words Latch Label Area Capacity 0 to 48 K words Restriction of a la
72. alarm R ON Alarm SM6032 CH1 Warning output flag Process alarm lower limit OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6033 CH1 Warning output setting Process alarm OFF Enabled R W ON Disabled SM6057 CH1 A D alarm clear request OFF No clear request R W ON Clear request SM6058 CH1 A D alarm flag OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6059 CH1 A D error flag OFF No error R ON Error SM6060 CH2 A D conversion completed flag OFF A D conversion not completed R ON A D conversion completed SM6061 CH2 A D conversion enable disable setting OFF A D conversion enable R W ON A D conversion disable SM6062 CH2 Over scaling detection flag OFF No over scaling R ON Over scaling SM6064 CH2 Over scaling over detection OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6065 CH2 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag OFF Reset not completed R ON Reset completed SM6066 CH2 Maximum value reset request OFF No reset request R ON Reset request SM6067 CH2 Minimum value reset request OFF No reset request R ON Reset request SM6068 CH2 A D scaling enable disable setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6069 CH2 Digital clipping enable disable setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6071 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm upper limit OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6072 CH2 Warning output flag Process alarm lower limit OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6073 CH2 Warning output setting Process alarm OFF Enabled R W ON Disabled SM6097 CH2 A D alarm clear request OFF No cle
73. as follows SM400 SM8000 SM401 SM8001 SM402 SM8002 SM403 SM8003 SM409 SM8011 SM410 SM8012 SM411 SM412 SM8013 SM413 SM414 SM415 SM8014 SM420 SM8330 SM421 SM8331 SM422 SM8332 SM423 SM8333 SM424 SM8334 Always ON Always OFF After RUN ON for one scan only After RUN OFF for one scan only 0 01 second clock 0 1 second clock 0 2 second clock 1 second clock 2 second clock 2n second clock 2n ms clock 1 min clock Timing clock output 1 Timing clock output 2 Timing clock output 3 Timing clock output 4 Timing clock output 5 Special register used for system clock Special registers used for system clock are as follows SD412 SD414 SD415 SD420 SD8330 SD8331 SD8332 SD8333 SD8334 One second counter 2n second clock setting 2n ms clock setting Scan counter Counted number of scans for timing clock output 1 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 2 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 3 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 4 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 5 SM420 to SM424 SM8330 to SM8334 and SD8330 to SD8334 are used by the DUTY instruction For the DUTY instruction refer to the following LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 6 3 System clock 49 90 ONLINE CHANGE This chapter describes online change 7 1 Online Ladder Block Change
74. at RESET At memory card attachment or detachment o APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code 287 Error codes of the CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH The following table lists the error codes detected by other causes than the self diagnostics function of the CPU module Error details and cause Action Error code 4000H 4001H 4002H 4005H 4006H 4010H 4013H 4021H 4022H 4025H 4027H 4029H 402CH File related error e The requested operation cannot be executed currently 4030H 4031H 4040H 4041H 4042H 4043H 288 Common error e Serial communication sum check error Common error Common error e Connect the serial communication cable correctly e Take measures to reduce noise e Check the command data of SLMP MC protocol e Check the CPU module model name selected in the engineering tool e Check the target CPU module model name e An unsupported request was executed e An unsupported request was executed e Check the command data of SLMP MC protocol e Check the CPU module model name selected in the engineering tool e Execute the request again If the same error code is displayed again the possible cause is a hardware failure of the CPU module Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative Common error e The volume of data handled according to the specified e Check the command data of SLMP MC protocol request is too large Common error Initial communic
75. bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification re
76. bet the pulse No of per rotation Pulse No of per Rotation 1000 1000 Displayed items Use Not Use Set whether use counter or not Disable Disable Enable Operation Mode Set operation mode e Normal Mode e Pulse Density Assumption Mode e Rotation Speed Measurement Mode Pulse Input Mode Set pulse input mode e 1 Phase 1 Input S W Up Down Switch e 1 Phase 1 Input H W Up Down Switch e 1 Phase 2 Input e 2 Phase 1 Multiple e 2 Phase 2 Multiple e 2 Phase 4 Multiple e Internal Clock 1MHz 126 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Preset Input Enable Not available for high speed counters pulse density measurement mode Disable Input Logic Preset Value Input Comparison Enable Disable Control Switch Enable Input Enable Set whether to enable or disable the enable input e Disable Disable e Enable Input Logic Set the enable input logic value e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Ring Length Enable Not available for high speed counters pulse density measurement mode Disable Ring Length Measurement Unit Time Set measurement unit time Unit ms 1 to 2147483647 Pulses No of per Rotation Not available for high speed counters pulse density measurement mode Poin tr Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset In addition operations different from the parameter settings are possible by transferring values to special r
77. built in axis 3 positioning axis 3 SD5581 Built in positioning current address user unit High order axis 3 SD5582 Built in positioning current address pulse unit Low This register stores the current address pulse unit of built in order axis 3 positioning axis 3 SD5583 Built in positioning current address pulse unit High order axis 3 SD5584 Built in positioning current speed user unit Low order This register stores the current speed of built in positioning axis axis 3 3 SD5585 Built in positioning current speed user unit High order axis 3 SD5586 Built in positioning execution table number axis 3 This register stores the execution table number of built in R positioning axis 3 SD5590 Built in positioning error code axis 3 This register stores the error code of built in positioning axis 3 R W SD5591 Built in positioning error table number axis 3 This register stores the error table number of built in positioning R W axis 3 SD5596 Built in positioning maximum speed Low order axis 3 This register stores the maximum speed of built in positioning R W SD5597 Built in positioning maximum speed High order axis 3 axis 3 SD5598 Built in positioning bias speed Low order axis 3 This register stores the bias speed of built in positioning axis 3 R W SD5599 Built in positioning bias speed High order axis 3 SD5600 Built in positioning acceleration time axis 3 This re
78. bus error A signal error was detected during system processing Verify that extension cables are correctly connected Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected Implement anti noise measures If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module or in the extension cables System configuration information Error location information Program structure error e The temporary area was used incorrectly Check the detailed information error location information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and check the program The step number displayed in the error location information is counted from the top of the file It may be different from the step number in the program displayed by the jump function Drive file information Program execution error The device label assignment does not match the device label assignment in the program After the device assignment was changed only the parameters were written to the CPU module e The program file is invalid or the file does Write the correct program file Drive file not contain a program information e No program file exists e Write a program file Drive file information e A program with more than 64 k steps e Reduce the number of steps in the program was written e
79. communication The special registers for serial communication are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD8563 Receive sum received data ch1 Di APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List Description This register stores the operation mode ch1 This register stores the amount of remaining data ch2 MODBUS communication error code ch2 This register stores the receive data points ch2 MODBUS communication error details ch2 This register stores the receive sum calculated result This register stores the MODBUS communication current retry times ch2 This register stores the ch2 receive sum received data This register stores the ch2 receive sum calculated result This register stores the send sum ch2 This register stores the serial communication error code ch2 This register stores the operation mode ch2 This register stores the IP address This register stores the subnet mask This register stores the default gateway IP address This register stores error codes if writing to IP address storage area is failed This register stores error codes if clear to IP address storage area is failed Description 717 7 718 This register stores the serial communication error code 1 ch1 This register stores the serial communication error details 1 ch1 This register stores the serial communication setting ch1 This register stores the serial communication operational mode 1 ch1
80. decremental s3 24 b1 D534 1 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation incremental s3 24 b2 D534 2 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation decremental s3 24 b3 D534 3 Not used Not used is exceeded PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV s3 25 D535 A Not used Output value upper limit ULV s3 26 D536 Not used Output value lower limit LLV Output value lower limit LLV lower limit LLV D537 Not used Wait setting from end of tuning cycle to start of PID s3 28 D538 A L used control KW Output value MV dd D502 1800 1 8 second 1800 1 8 second 8 second Not used This is an item not occupied 1 The setting is always necessary 2 When CH1 is used 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 78 9 8 Examples of Program Program X010 MOV Auto tuning is started MOV MOV RST SET SM402 RST SM6021 Initial pulse D511 4 RST D502 Auto tuning is executed X010 Auto tuning is started D511 4 MON D500 SD6022 D510 D502 Auto tuning is executed OUTHS STO K2000 M4 Auto tuning is executed STO Heater operation cycle M4 Auto tuning is executed M4 lt ST0 D502 H STO lt D502 Auto tuning is executed The target value is set to 50 C The sampling time is set to 500 ms PID instruction The output of auto tuning mia SENNY is set to 1 8 sec The auto tuning mode is set to step response method Auto tuning is started 0 Enable CH1
81. describes the auto tuning function of PID instruction The auto tuning function will automatically set the important constants such as the proportional gain and the integral time to ensure optimum PID control There are two auto tuning methods limit cycle method and step response method Limit Cycle Method For acquiring satisfactory control results in PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable to the control target This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude a and vibration cycle t ton of the input value and then calculate the proportional gain KP integral time Tl and differential time TD based on the expressions shown in the table below What is the limit cycle method Changes in the input value in two position control in which the output Upper Limit Value ULV and output Lower Limit Value LLV are switched according to the deviation are measured and then three constants in the PID control are obtained How to obtain three constants in PID control Reference Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI x 100 ms Differential time TD x 10 ms Only proportional control P 4 operation zU LV LLV x100 PI control PI operation 0 9 ULV LLV x100 PID control PID operation 42 ULV LLV 00 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 7 Auto Tuning Operation characteristics in an examp
82. espais rodeo ere rra ies 224 Appendix 2 Special Register List conoser dare ra a A a e 240 Append 3 Error Code sv cursis od do SANS Ree 274 Emor code A 274 Operation When an error OCCUIS 1 eee eee eee eens 274 HOW tO clear eiTOrS cncc0es524c0ee meus reipi dest enees aa dsenses 275 LISO remo COGCS 2 sprites eae es ee les o ee ae ee ee do ee oia 275 Appendix 4 Parameter Uist ccc cctea ted eave d coves a eee Vee a AAA ee 291 System ParaMelers icc cr a dunes cedssesed ees dvwdce de sddeaudwavs desdanvaseweeeue o 291 CPW Parameters c22242544cRe5eneeensest hoo nie q eek AARDENNE Ee 291 Module parameters ee ee eee ee eee ee eens 292 Memory card parameters i seceu0ebehe4 sra AAA ae ANA 297 INDEX 298 REVISION St pasos aros to E ee a a a a daa a eee ee ee 300 WARRANTY PS 301 HRADEMAR Ke 04 porras a peda sa boa ia ia ed ew da 302 CONTENTS 11 12 RELEVANT MANUALS User s manuals for the applicable modules Manual name lt manual number gt MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Startup lt JY997D58201 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware lt JY997D55301 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware lt JY997D61401 gt MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Application lt JY997D55401 gt This manual MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design lt JY997D55701 gt MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks lt JY997D55801 gt MELSEC iQ F
83. executed so measurement cannot be performed normally If timer is not executed each scan You cannot skip a timer coil OUT TO instruction with the CJ instruction etc while the timer s T1 for example coil is ON If a timer s coil is skipped the timer s current value is not updated so measurement cannot be performed normally If a timer T1 for example exists within a subroutine program be sure to execute the subroutine coil that includes the T1 coil only once per scan while that timer s coil is ON If not executed measurement cannot be performed normally The timer cannot be used in the initial execution type program fixed scan execution type program or event execution type program The timer can be used in standby type programs if the coil of timer OUT TU instruction is executed one time for one scan using a subroutine program The timer cannot be used in interrupt programs The timer can be used in subroutine programs or FB programs if the coil of timer OUT TO instruction is executed one time for one scan If setting value is 0 The contact is turned ON when the OUT TO instruction is executed If setting value is modified after time up The timer remains in time up status and does not operate even if the setting value is raised higher than the current value after time up 21 DEVICES 21 0 21 2 User Devices Routine timer setting The setting of the routine timer is made O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXS
84. input of counter e Disable e Enable Sets preset input logic when preset input is enabled e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Preset Value Sets preset value when preset input is enabled 2147483648 to 2147483647 Input Comparison Enable Sets whether to enable or disable input comparison when e Disable Disable preset input is enabled e Enable Control Switch Sets preset execution timing when preset input is enabled e Rising e Falling e Rising Falling Edge e Always During Input ON Enable Input Enable Set whether to enable or disable the enable input e Disable Disable e Enable Input Logic Set the enable input logic value e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Ring Length Enable Sets whether to enable or disable the ring length for ring e Disable Disable counters e Enable Ring Length Sets ring length when ring length setting is enabled 2 to 2147483648 Measurement Unit Time Not available for high speed counters normal mode aa Pulses No of per Rotation Poin tr Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset In addition operations different from the parameter settings are possible by transferring values to special relays and special registers while changing these values in the program For details concerning special relays and specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 137 Special relay list E Page 148 Special registers list S
85. instructions driven at the same time 1811H 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 1 High speed Counter Function 59 Multi point output high speed comparison table comparison number This device stores the number of the table currently being compared in the multi point output high speed comparison tables ECorresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SD5000 MDescription This device stores the number of the table currently being compared in the multi point output high speed comparison tables If 0 the multi point output high speed comparison tables have stopped Point e When rewriting the comparison value or output data for the multi point output high speed comparison tables the table numbers from the table numbers that follow after the next table number of the table being compared can be rewritten e The table number being compared and the next table number after that can be rewritten but they will not be compared e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN 1 60 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Special relays special registers capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction The table below shows the devices that can read and write the latest value with the HCMOV instruction from special relays and special registers related to th
86. is not finished Detect and avoid such occurrences by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time from the start of auto tuning 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 7 Auto Tuning 9 8 Examples of Program System configuration example An example of the system configuration when the PID control function is used is shown below System configuration ov av xtox14 X10 Auto tuning command X11 PID control command Resistance temperature sensor converter M2RS 44 R UL 24V DC power supply Temperature chamber Electric heater Resistance temperature sensor Pt100 sensor Operation of the electric heater MDuring PID control D502x1 ms lt ON duration gt OFF ON ON ON ON ON 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms lt cycle gt MDuring auto tuning Po U M 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms Program examples Program example Description Reference Program example 1 This is an example of the sample program for PID control Page 74 Program example 2 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning limit cycle method Page 76 Program example 3 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning step response method Page 78 Program example 4 This is an example of the sample program for auto tuning limit cycle method PID Page 80 control Program example 5 This is an example of t
87. is small If the input filter value is too large the input response is bad Setting range 0 to 99 Because the input filter a acts on the target value SV all of the proportional operation integral operation and differential operation are affected Actual measured value PV Pulse input by noise Time Time Measured value PV processed Input amplitude by input filter of e Input amplitude processed l by input filter Time Time 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 4 9 6 Details of Parameters 6 Proportional gain s3 3 During the proportional operation the output MV increases in proportion to the deviation difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV This deviation is called proportional gain Kp and expressed in the following relational expression Output MV Proportional gain KP x Deviation EV The reciprocal of the proportional gain KP is called proportional band As the proportional gain KP is larger as shown in the example below the motion to let the measured value PV be nearer to the target value SV becomes stronger Setting range 1 to 32767 Ex Proportional operation P operation in backward operation heating Temperature a Target value SV gt Measured value PV 2 Remaining deviation KP2 KP1 Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Time e Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Time Proportional operation P operation in forward operat
88. is triggered by interrupt occurred by the interrupt pointer 1 are the same as those for general interrupt programs Page 31 Operation when an interrupt is generated 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 1 4 Execution Type of Program 9 26 MBit data ON TRUE When it is the turn of the corresponding program to be executed the program is executed if the specified bit data is ON This eliminates the need for creating a program for monitoring triggers in a separate program 3rd scan 4th scan O Y50 is the ON interval STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan 2nd scan Execution order Scan execution type program A Scan execution type program B Event execution type program C Executed when Y50 turns ON END processing 1 The program is executed if Y50 is ON when it is the turn of event execution type program C to be executed Applicable devices are as follows Item Description Bit specification in word device D SD W SW R VIGO 1 Indexed devices cannot be specified MElapsed time The program is executed once when it is the turn of the corresponding program to be executed first after the CPU module is run and the specified time has elapsed For second execution onwards the time is re calculated from the start of the previous event execution type program When it is the turn of the corresponding program to be executed first after specified time has elapsed program execution is repeated Output Y currently used in the correspondin
89. link scan time Maximum link scan time Number of communication error at master station Number of communication error at slave station No 1 Number of communication error at slave station No 2 Number of communication error at slave station No 3 Number of communication error at slave station No 4 Number of communication error at slave station No 5 Number of communication error at slave station No 6 Number of communication error at slave station No 7 Code of communication error at master station APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List Description This register stores the year data This register stores the day of week data This register stores the constant scan duration This register stores the ON state number 1 This register stores the ON state number 2 This register stores the ON state number 3 This register stores the ON state number 4 This register stores the ON state number 5 This register stores the ON state number 6 This register stores the ON state number 7 This register stores the ON state number 8 This register stores the lowest active annunciator This register stores the serial communication error code ch1 A This register stores the error code number of operation error This register stores the high speed ring counter count value units 0 1 ms This register stores the PLSY instruction output pulse number gt gt 2 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W
90. location information and system configuration information Time information System configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information Error location information Error location information APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code Diagnostic timing At power on at RESET at STOP gt RUN state At power on at RESET at STOP gt RUN state At power on at RESET Always Always At power on at RESET At instruction execution Always Always At interrupt occurrence At instruction execution At power on at RESET at instruction execution At instruction execution At power on at RESET 217 Error code 2823H Device specification error 2840H File name specification error 3000H Boot function execution error 3001H Boot function execution error 3003H Boot function execution error 3004H Boot function execution error 3005H Boot function execution error 3048H Online change error 3049H Online change error 304AH Online change error 304BH Online change error 3050H System bus error 3056H System bus error APPENDIX 278 Error details and cause Action Detailed information Appendix 3 Error Code e Verify that the specified module has buffer memory e Check the buffer memory range of the specified module e Verify that the size specified from the specified buffer memory number is
91. match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification r
92. memory card to the transfer destination memory judged automatically by the CPU module when the power is turned ON or is reset Device label access service processing setting Sets the number of execution times of the device label access Page 107 service processing executed by END processing with parameter RAS function Self diagnostics function Self diagnoses the CPU module to see whether an error exist or not Page 109 Batch clears all the continuation errors being detected Security function Protects resources stored in PCs and resources in the units in the Page 113 system of the FX5 from illegal access by a third party such as theft GX Works3 Operating alteration accidental operation and unauthorized execution Manual Built in Performs high speed counter pulse width measurement input Page 114 input interruption timer interruption high speed counter interruption etc output by using the input of the CPU module Built in positioning function Executes positioning operation of up to 4 axes by using the MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s transistor output of the CPU module Manual Positioning Control PWM output function Executes a PWM output by using the transistor output of the CPU Page 193 module Built in Analog input function Two analog inputs and one analog output are built in the FX5U CPU Page 201 analog Analog output function module so that voltage input voltage output can be performed MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s function Manual Analog
93. mode Page 23 Fixed scan execution mode When Execution Count Takes Priority is enabled the interrupt program corresponding to the memorized interrupt causes will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes When Precede Fixed Scan is enabled the second and later occurrences will not be memorized The second and following interruption causes which occur while an interruption is executed po 128 129 operate according to the setting of the fixed scan 131 te execution mode 128 When Execution Count gt x e When Precede Fixed Takes Priority is set E Scan is set Main routine program The second interruption is not executed 131 interrupt program 129 interrupt program After the interruption being executed is completed 129 which has higher 128 interrupt program priority is executed interruption is executed The second interruption is executed The priority is the same 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 5 Program Type iif the same interrupt cause occurs while the interrupt program is being executed e For I0 to 123 and 150 to 1177 The interrupt cause that occured is memorized and the interrupt program corresponding to the cause will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes Even if the same interrupt cause occurs multiple times it will be memorized only once iO The second and following interrupt causes which occur while an int
94. mode rotational speed measurement mode with parameters mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 19 1 High speed Counter Function 53 e Power ON Reset STOP PAUSE gt RUN High speed counter rotational speed These devices store the measurement results of rotational speed measurement mode ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD4509 SD4508 SD4719 SD4539 SD4569 SD4599 SD4629 SD4659 SD4689 SD4538 SD4568 SD4598 SD4628 SD4658 SD4688 SD4718 MDescription These devices store the measurement results of rotational soeed measurement mode e These devices also store the rotational speed when in pulse density measurement mode e These devices do not operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The rotational speed is updated at each measurement unit time when set to rotational soeed measurement mode with parameters mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP PAUSE gt RUN High speed counter preset control switch These devices set the preset input operation of the high speed counters ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD4720 SD4540 SD4570 SD4600 SD4630 SD4660 SD4690 MDescription SD4510 These devices set the timing to execute preset input The t
95. module 1 The CARD READY LED will blink gt light up Precautions The precaution regarding SD memory card forced stop is described below e When a forced stop operation is carried out by SD memory card disable switch and forced stop operation by SM606 operation carried out earlier becomes valid and the operation that is carried out later becomes invalid For example after the forced stop by SD memory card disable switch when SM606 is turned ON OFF without removing the SD memory card the disable status of the SD memory card can be released After the forced stop by SD memory card disable switch when SD memory card is removed and then SM606 is turned ON SM606 operation is ignored 15 2 Boot Operation At the time of power OFF ON or reset of the CPU module a file which is stored on the SD memory card is transferred to the memory of the transfer destination which the CPU module judged automatically Boot operation procedure The selectable files for boot operation are listed below 1 Carry out the boot file settings 2 Load SD memory card 3 Write the boot file settings and boot file to the SD memory card 4 Turn OFF gt ON the power or reset the CPU module Specifiable file types The procedure of boot operation is explained below e Parameter files system parameters CPU parameters module parameters module extension parameters e Remote password e Global labels global label setting files initial label values e Program f
96. ms or us 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function 197 Period The period of PWM output is stored ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 SD5305 SD5304 SD5321 SD5320 SD5337 SD5336 SD5353 SD5352 Update timing The timing to reflect the device in operation is as follows e When the HCMOV instruction is executed values updated immediately e When the PWM instruction is executed e END processing mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Poin tr e The pulse width and cycle can be changed even while pulses are being output e The pulse width and cycle are stored in the unit specified by the parameter ms or us Number of output pulses current value monitor The current value of the number of output pulses of PWM output is stored Corresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 SD5307 SD5306 SD5323 SD5322 SD5339 SD5338 SD5355 SD5354 Update timing The timing to reflect the device in operation is as follows e When the HCMOV instruction is executed values updated immediately e When the PWM instruction is executed e END processing mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt 0N e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Point e If the number of output pulses is set to 0 output without any limitation the
97. of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verifi
98. other purposes 21 3 System Devices System devices are devices for the system Assignment capacity are fixed and cannot be changed by the user Special relay SM The PLC contains internal relays with fixed specifications so it cannot be used in the program like a conventional internal relay lt can however be turned ON OFF to control the CPU module as needed Page 224 Special Relay List Special register SD The PLC contains internal register with fixed specifications so it cannot be used in the program like a conventional internal register Data however can be written to control the CPU module as needed Page 240 Special Register List 21 DEVICES 21 3 System Devices 215 21 4 Module Access Device Device that allows you to directly access the buffer memory of intelligent function modules connected to the CPU module from the CPU module Specification method Specified by U module number of intelligent function modules buffer memory address Example U5 G11 Processing speed Processing speed of reading writing by module access device is slightly faster than using FROM TO instruction Example MOV U2 G11 DO When reading the buffer memory of a module access device and executing another process by 1 instruction the processing speed would be approximately the total of processing speed of FROM TO instruction and processing speed of instruction Example U2 G11 DO D10 Poin tr If reading writing data of t
99. phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4580 High speed counter count switching CH1 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4581 High speed counter count switching CH2 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting i R W SM4582 High speed counter count switching CH3 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting input S W ON Down counting APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 227 228 No Rw SM4583 High speed counter count switching CH4 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4584 High speed counter count switching CH5 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4585 High speed counter count switching CH6 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4586 High speed counter count switching CH7 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4587 High speed counter count switching CH8 1 phase 1 OFF Up counting R W input S W ON Down counting SM4596 High speed counter preset input logic CH1 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4597 High speed counter preset input logic CH2 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4598 High speed counter preset input logic CH3 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4599 High speed counter preset input logic CH4 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4600 High speed counter preset input logic CH5 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4601 High speed cou
100. positioning axis 2 R W SD5559 Built in positioning bias speed High order axis 2 SD5560 Built in positioning acceleration time axis 2 This register stores the acceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 2 SD5561 Built in positioning deceleration time axis 2 This register stores the deceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 2 SD5566 Built in positioning zero return speed Low order axis 2 This register stores the zero return speed of built in positioning R W SD5567 Built in positioning zero return speed High order axis 2 axis 2 SD5568 Built in positioning creep speed Low order axis 2 This register stores the creep speed of built in positioning axis R W 2 SD5569 Built in positioning creep speed High order axis 2 SD5570 Built in positioning zero point address Low order axis 2 This register stores the zero point address of built in positioning R W SD5571 Built in positioning zero point address High order axis 2 se SD5572 Built in positioning number of zero point signal for zero This register stores the number of zero point signal for zero return R W return axis 2 of built in positioning axis 2 SD5573 Built in positioning zero return dwell time axis 2 This register stores the zero return dwell time of built in R W positioning axis 2 SD5580 Built in positioning current address user unit Low order This register stores the current address user unit of
101. program is used Modify the program so that no operand whose use is disabled for modules subsequent to the bus conversion module is used Modify the program so that no instruction whose use is disabled by the interrupt routine program is used Verify that the parameter setting of the channel specified by instructions using communication functions or built in I O is correct Detailed information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Diagnostic timing At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution Error code 3611H 3612H 3613H 3614H 3621H 3622H 3623H 3624H 3631H 3632H 3633H CH1 pulse width period setting error CH2 pulse width period setting error CH3 pulse width period setting error CH4 pulse width period sett
102. ring length is not set lower limit value 2147483648 upper limit value 2147483647 When the ring length is set lower limit value 0 upper limit value ring length 1 Poin tr e To rewrite the current value use the HCMOV instruction and transfer the desired value However this is the upper limit when set to a value that exceeds the upper limit value and this is the lower limit value when set to a value that is less than the lower limit value e If the current value falls outside the ring length range when the ring length is set the upper and lower limit values of the ring length are ignored and the current value is used e The current value is retained even when the power is OFF Update timing The current value of the high speed counter is updated in END processing or when the HCMOV instruction is executed Further when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid the value is updated also when UDCNTF instruction is executed mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Cleared by the DHCMOV instruction e When the RST LCT instruction executes ON only when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid and the applicable LC device is used e Power ON reset RUN gt STOP only when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid and the applicable LC device is used High speed counter maximum value These devices store the maximum values of the high speed counters C
103. speed Low order CH3 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH3 R W SD4569 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH3 SD4570 High speed counter preset control switch CH3 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH3 248 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD4572 SD4573 SD4574 SD4575 SD4576 SD4577 SD4578 SD4579 SD4590 SD4591 SD4592 SD4593 SD4594 SD4595 SD4596 SD4597 SD4598 SD4599 SD4600 SD4602 SD4603 SD4604 SD4605 SD4606 SD4607 SD4608 SD4609 SD4620 SD4621 SD4622 SD4623 SD4624 SD4625 SD4626 SD4627 SD4628 SD4629 SD4630 SD4632 SD4633 SD4634 SD4635 SD4636 SD4637 High speed counter preset value Low order CH3 High speed counter preset value High order CH3 High speed counter ring length Low order CH3 High speed counter ring length High order CH3 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order CH3 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH3 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low order CH3 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH3 High speed counter current value Low order CH4 High speed counter current value High order CH4 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH4 High speed counter maximum value High order CH4 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH4 High speed counter minimu
104. the event of a power interruption 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 3 1 Memory Configuration 37 e M The following files are stored in SD memory card O N Program Program file FB files 1 Mbytes 16 Up to 15 for user D 00 Restored information Restored information files 1 Mbytes Parameters Parameter files common to system 1 Mbytes CPU parameter file Module parameter file Memory card parameter Remote password Global label setting file Module extension parameter for protocol setting 2 Initial device value file Comments Device comment file 2 Mbytes 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 38 3 1 Memory Configuration 3 2 Files The CPU module files are explained below File type and storage destination memory File types and their storage destination memory are explained below O Can be stored Xx Cannot be stored Arbitrary PRG Arbitrary PFB CPU PRM SYSTEM PRM Program FB files CPU parameters System parameters UNIT PRM MEMCARD PRM Device comments E Arbitrary DCM Module parameters Memory card parameter Global label settings GLBLINF IFG UEX3FF01 PPR UEX3FF00 PPR 2 CallTreeInfo CAB Sourcelnfo CAB Module extension parameter for protocol setting Restored information Device initial values og Arbitrary DID PS 1 For serial communications file 2 For Ethernet file Executable file operations File operations that can be executed on each file a
105. the high speed counter maximum value R W SD4683 High speed counter maximum value High order CH7 CH7 SD4684 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W SD4685 High speed counter minimum value High order CH7 CH7 SD4686 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH7 R W SD4687 High speed counter pulse density High order CH7 SD4688 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH7 R W SD4689 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH7 SD4690 High speed counter preset control switch CH7 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH7 SD4692 High speed counter preset value Low order CH7 SD4693 High speed counter preset value High order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH7 R W SD4694 High speed counter ring length Low order CH7 SD4695 High speed counter ring length High order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH7 R W SD4696 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W CH7 time CH7 SD4697 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH7 SD4698 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low This registe
106. the time of the current operation after the CPU module is powered OFF and ON or reset the latch data is recovered only in the overlapping part of the latch ranges e When latch range and the number of devices are changed in the parameter all latch labels are cleared to 0 e When the CPU parameter program file FB file and global label setting file are changed all latch labels are cleared to 0 e Special relays and special registers are not cleared even by performing CPU memory operation or special relay clearing 102 14 LATCH FUNCTION 14 5 Precautions 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION The following explains the functions that use SD memory card 15 1 SD Memory Card Forced Stop SD memory card can be disabled without turning power ON gt 0FF even when a function that uses SD memory card is being executed Methods of SD memory card forced stop The methods of SD memory card forced stop are as described below Operation by SD memory card disable switch 1 Press the SD memory card disable switch for 1 second or longer 2 The CARD READY LED will flash on gt turn off 1 3 Remove the SD card 1 If there is a function accessing the SD memory card the CARD READY LED will flash off after the access of that function is complete Therefore the time from flash on to flash off will be different depending on the function Operation by special relay 1 Turn ON SM606 SD memory card forcibly disable command SM606 SD memory card O
107. to L Page 132 High speed comparison table e For multiple point output high speed comparison tables refer to L gt Page 134 Multiple point output high speed comparison tables e For input response time refer to K Page 191 General purpose Input Functions FX3 compatible high speed counter FX3 compatible high speed counter setting method is explained below 1 Set the method of specifying the high speed counter to long counter setting O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed Counter gt Detail Setting gt Other Window Item GH Specification method for high speed counter Lone Counter Specification Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Specification method for high speed Set up whether or not to use FX3 compatibility assignment for Normal Normal counter high speed counter e Long Counter Specification e When using FX5 high speed counter choose normal e When using FX3 compatible high speed counter choose long counter specification 2 Set up the FX3 compatible high speed counter The counter number and function that can be specified are different from CH to CH Page 167 Assignment for FX3 compatible high speed counters TZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed Counter gt Detail
108. us when ON and 150 us when OFF Minput response time setting units The following table lists the units 1 point unit 8 point unit that can be set for the input response time of each CPU module FX5U 64MO 1 point unit 1 point unit 1 point unit 1 point unit FX5U 80MO 1 point unit 1 point unit 1 point unit 1 point unit 8 points units When 1 point unit is set for the input response time using GX Works3 X41 to X47 operate with the input response time set to X40 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 91 19 6 General purpose Input Functions General purpose input function parameters This section explains the general purpose input parameters Set the input response time parameters in GX Works3 Parameter setting This section explains how to set the input response time parameters Set the input response time O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt Input Response Time Setting bi Specify the inputresponse time from Xi to X7 ooo rc FAI lims Hl 1Ume He lims d 10me Aa lims AD lims Hb lima T lims ATV Specify the input response time from X10 to X17 Response Type Mormal 10 lms 211 ALA sda mld HAO 216 i7 5 Response Type Select the input response time between 1 point unit and 8 e High Speed point unit Normal High Speed Unit of 1 point Normal Unit of 8 points XO to X377 Set the input response time No Setting 10ms e 10micro s us e 50micro s us
109. verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15
110. which is executed at a specified time interval Different from the normal interrupt program this type of program does not require interrupt pointer 1 and IRET instruction to be written pointer is assigned by parameter Execution is performed by program file basis You can use 4 files of fixed scan execution type programs at the maximum Fixed scan interval END processing Condition y Scan execution type program Condition established Fixed scan execution type program Point To execute a fixed scan execution type program the El instruction must be used to enable interrupts 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 21 1 4 Execution Type of Program 22 Make the following settings for fixed scan execution type program in CPU parameter e Interrupt pointer setting Interrupt from internal timer 128 to 131 e Fixed scan interval setting Interrupt pointer setting The interrupt pointer Interrupt from internal timer 128 to 131 assigned to a fixed scan execution type program is set up XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Program Setting gt Program Setting gt Detailed Setting gt Detailed Setting Information 1 Open program setting screen 2 Set type as fixed scan 3 Specify interrupt pointer Order Detailed Setting Information a MATH Scan MAIN ee merom SO caver ge Treo ee 2 a 4 A Interrupt Pointer Set the interrupt pointer which is assigned to f
111. width measurement mode can be set The table below shows the measurement modes for pulse width measurements Mode Description 1 time measurement mode Measures the pulse width and period only once from the start of the measurement Always measurement mode Constantly measures the pulse width and period P oint The measurement mode can be changed during pulse measurements by using a special relay Page 177 List of special relays special registers Signal delay time measurement In a user program the delay time between signals can be calculated from the rising or falling ring counters of 2 inputs Page 183 Examples of program Pulse measurement function execution procedure The pulse measurement function execution procedure is shown below 1 Check the pulse measurement specifications Check the specifications such as the measurement frequency of pulse measurements Page 174 Pulse width measurement specifications 2 Connect the CPU module to the external device For details on wiring to external devices refer to the following manual L IMELSEC Q F FX5U User s Manual Hardware L IMELSEC Q F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware 3 Setthe parameters Configure the parameters such as the pulse measurement channel settings Page 176 Pulse width measurement parameters 4 Create the program Create the program for using pulse measurements 5 Run the program 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width M
112. within the buffer memory range e The program file specified does not exist e An error was found in the boot file e Formatting failed during booting e A mismatch between the file password 32 of the boot source file and that of the boot destination file was detected during booting e The capacity of the boot destination data memory becomes insufficient due to booting e A mismatch between the security information of the boot source file and that of the boot destination file was detected during booting e An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN e An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN e An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN e An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN e Communication with the module failed due to power discontinuity or the like e A timeout occurred during communication with a connected module when an instruction was executed e Review the program or check the contents of the operands used in applied instructions e Verify that the specified buffer memory exists in the counterpart equipment e Rewrite the project e Replace the boot file in the SD memory card with the correct file and turn the PLC power ON again e Reset the CPU module and then execute the boot function again If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representa
113. 0 0 0 aaa aaaea ee ee eee 188 CONTENTS 10 FX3 compatible pulse catch function execution procedure 2 0 ea eee 189 FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters 189 Operation of FX3 compatible pulse catch function 0 20 0 0 ce eee eee 190 Cautions when using the FX3 compatible pulse catch function 0 0 0 0 ccc ee 190 19 6 General purpose Input Functions 0 0 00 cc ees 191 Outline of general purpose input functions 0 20 00 ee eee ee ees 191 Specifications of general purpose inputs 191 General purpose input function parameters ee ee ee eee 192 tl PAFIN rra ad eae eas hea ee ee ae a ee SIE ad dE A E a 193 Outline o PWM OUUU sc oe 2854 exude oe bea r eas ts Soe Eee ee tn ee 193 PWM output specifications recorra aod neko EA wae Re ed ee eee heed we de eee 193 PWM output function execution procedure 6 eee eee eens 194 PWM output parameters ee ee ee ee eee eee eee eens 195 List of Special relays special registers 1 ne eee eee ees 196 Details of special relays special registers 1 0 ee eee eee ene 196 Cautions when using the PWM function 0 2 0 0 00 ee eee eee ees 199 Examples of progra seess e cet ea ee eee ok ee Ee ee a oe ee a eee ee eee 199 CHAPTER 20 BUILT IN ANALOG FUNCTION 201 20 1 Function OUGING jo ccticcrcdeewenite trae tenet e aw hee eee ed eae ad 201 20 2 Analog Input Output Specifications nananana cc es 201 Analog input spe
114. 2H 4127H 4135H 4139H 413AH 413BH 413EH 4171H 4181H 4183H 419EH 41C5H 41C8H Online registration error e Request data error e The search target data cannot be detected File related error The specified drive memory or file does not exist File related error e The specified drive memory or file does not exist File related error e File password 32 mismatch File related error File related error e The size of the specified file has exceeded that of the existing file File related error The specified file has exceeded the already existing file size File related error CPU module built in Ethernet port error CPU module built in Ethernet port error CPU module built in Ethernet port error CPU module built in Ethernet port error File related error File related error e The online debug function is being executed with another engineering tool e The remote request cannot be executed The date time data of the engineering tool personal computer is out of range e The same file was simultaneously accessed from different engineering tools File related error e Operation is disabled for the specified drive memory e The port for communication use is in remote password locked status e Transmission to the receiving modules is unsuccessful e Communication with receiving modules was interrupted e Connection to the module was unsuccessful or interrupted
115. 3642H Axis 2 command speed error 3643H Axis 3 command speed error 3644H Axis 4 command speed error 3651H Axis 1 error stop deceleration stop 3652H Axis 2 error stop deceleration stop 3653H Axis 3 error stop deceleration stop 3654H Axis 4 error stop deceleration stop 3661H Axis 1 error stop immediately stop 3662H Axis 2 error stop immediately stop APPENDIX 284 Appendix 3 Error Code Error details and cause e The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the positioning address was converted The total transfer distance before and after the interrupt of the DVIT instruction or 1 speed positioning with interruption exceeded 7FFFFFFFH Pulses of 7FFFFFFFH or greater are needed to specify an absolute address The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the command speed was converted The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the command speed was converted The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the command speed was converted The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the command speed was converted When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC decelerated and stopped the pulse output due to the limit of the moving direction or writing during RUN The PLSY instruction stops pulse output immediately at both limits When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC decelerated and stopped the pulse output due to t
116. 4 RELEVANT MANUALS 2 se Gace pesones Cop tae ee came tar Been eae en ete des peas esas 12 TERMS lt p eke oe hoe eee Se eee on bene eee eee pees reese vase e es bes ee eee n aaa 12 PART 1 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 16 1 1 Scan ContiquratioNi cierra Gurwen keen AR a ee eee eee eee he ea dl cee 16 Initial processing and initialization processing in RUN mode 0 000 cee ees 16 OA 175 iio sere ou bore eee eee bees e Chose E eed oe Bees ee aS eed aes secede Hees 17 Program operations uaaa sue Sade Beng soe dee we eben So Gedse ride da ica dea 17 END Processing wncace uct nected oe hace oe ee eee E owen eee Se me kee es nee eae E 17 1 2 Salt TIME asia ew ore ere darn a eee ws ara ele a dh ee at ele a dw ee 18 Initial scan time 2 6 contada Sere oo eee eae ees oe aoe ee bene meow cee e 18 1 3 Program Execution SEQUENCO o cc nen cccatae rendida e RRR ad eee ned 19 1 4 Execution Type of Program 0 cc es 20 initial execution type Program 244220064405 naar ets C4 Ae aoe ke E ades Mek gad eee oad eee ws 20 Scan execution type program 1 eee ee ees 21 Fixed scan execution type program 2 eee ee ee eee ees 21 Event execution type program 1 2 ee tee eee ee nent nen ee nes 25 stand by Ype pogra as asp i vacua bee ee be Ree oe 8 Sees oe Ree eee Se ne eee Ce eee eee 28 1 5 Program IDO coins dana sates Coe heer sees side rs dees oe ees eee 29 Subroutine program lt lt 2 06 ce weed em
117. 47483647 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON 2147483648 to 2147483647 2 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 Default R W 2147483648 R W 2147483647 R W R W R W Parameter set value R W Parameter set value Parameter set value Parameter set value Parameter set value R W High speed counter current value CH6 High speed counter maximum value CH6 High speed counter minimum value CH6 High speed counter pulse density CH6 High speed counter rotational speed CH6 High speed counter preset control switch CH6 High speed counter preset value CH6 High speed counter ring length CH6 High speed counter measurement unit time CH6 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH6 High speed counter current value CH7 High speed counter maximum value CH7 High speed counter minimum value CH7 High speed counter pulse density CH7 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 0 Rising edge 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON 2147483648 to 2147483647 2 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 1 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 MS i 2147483648 R W 2147483647 R W Parameter set value Pa
118. 5 High speed counter ring length High order CH5 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order CH5 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH5 Deron o This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH3 R W This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH3 R W R W This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit time CH3 This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W rotation CH3 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH4 R W This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W CH4 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W CH4 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH4 R W This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH4 R W This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH4 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH4 R W This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH4 R W This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W time CH4 This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W rotation CH4 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH5 R W This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W CH5 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W
119. 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of rec
120. 5 SD4726 High speed counter measurement unit time CH8 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4727 SD4728 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH8 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4729 A O O A Special registers shared by all channels The following list shows the special registers shared by all high speed counter channels R W Read or Write R Read only SD4982 0 When there is no error R W 1811H Over the number of instructions driven at the same time Multi point output high speed comparison table comparison O to 128 number High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction error occurrence error code SD5000 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 4 19 1 High speed Counter Function O Special register details This section describes details about the special registers used with the high speed counters High speed counter current value These devices store the current values of the high speed counters ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4501 SD4531 SD4561 SD4591 SD4621 SD4651 SD4681 SD4711 SD4500 SD4530 SD4560 SD4590 SD4620 SD4650 SD4680 SD4710 MDescription These devices stores the current values of the high speed counters These are signed 32 bit ring counters Upper limit value 1 changes to gt lower limit value lower limit value 1 changes to gt upper limit value When the
121. 5 Module 3 error information SD4156 Module 4 status information SD4157 Module 4 error information SD4158 Module 5 status information SD4159 Module 5 error information SD4160 Module 6 status information SD4161 Module 6 error information SD4162 Module 7 status information SD4163 Module 7 error information SD4164 Module 8 status information SD4165 Module 8 error information SD4166 Module 9 status information SD4167 Module 9 error information SD4168 Module 10 status information SD4169 Module 10 error information SD4170 Module 11 status information SD4171 Module 11 error information SD4172 Module 12 status information SD4173 Module 12 error information SD4174 Module 13 status information SD4175 Module 13 error information SD4176 Module 14 status information SD4177 Module 14 error information SD4178 Module 15 status information SD4179 Module 15 error information SD4180 Module 16 status information SD4181 Module 16 error information FX high speed input and output The special registers for FX high speed input and output are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD4500 High speed counter current value Low order CH 1 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH1 R W V D D B B B B B B B B AD B AA AD A A D D A A D AD AA D AA D DID SD4501 High speed counter current value High order CH 1 SD4502 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH1 This register stores the high spee
122. 518 Built in positioning bias speed Low order axis 1 This register stores the bias speed of built in positioning axis 1 R W SD5519 Built in positioning bias speed High order axis 1 SD5520 Built in positioning acceleration time axis 1 This register stores the acceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 1 SD5521 Built in positioning deceleration time axis 1 This register stores the deceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 1 SD5526 Built in positioning zero return speed Low order axis 1 This register stores the zero return speed of built in positioning R W SD5527 Built in positioning zero return speed High order axis 1 axis 1 SD5528 Built in positioning creep speed Low order axis 1 This register stores the creep speed of built in positioning axis R W SD5529 Built in positioning creep speed High order axis 1 1 SD5530 Built in positioning zero point address Low order axis 1 This register stores the zero point address of built in positioning R W SD5531 Built in positioning zero point address High order axis 1 axian SD5532 Built in positioning number of zero point signal for zero This register stores the number of zero point signal for zero return R W return of built in positioning axis 1 SD5533 Built in positioning zero return dwell time axis 1 This register stores the zero return dwell time of built in R W positioning axis 1 SD5540 Built in positioning cur
123. 622 SD8623 SD8624 SD8625 SD8626 SD8631 SD8632 SD8633 SD8634 SD8635 SD8636 SD8641 SD8642 SD8643 SD8644 SD8645 SD8646 SD8651 SD8652 SD8653 SD8654 SD8655 SD8656 SD8740 SD8741 SD8742 SD8750 SD8751 SD8752 SD8760 SD8761 SD8762 SD8770 SD8771 SD8772 SD8800 SD8810 SD8820 SD8830 This register stores the send sum ch2 This register stores the send sum ch4 Receive sum received result ch3 This register stores the receive sum received result ch3 Send sum ch3 This register stores the send sum ch3 Header 1 and 2 ch1 Feasa Fr teste ease an Z G Terminator 1 and 2 ch2 This register stores the terminator 1 and 2 ch2 Terminator 3 and 4 ch2 This register stores the terminator 3 and 4 ch2 Timeout time ch3 This register stores the timeout time ch3 This register stores the header 1 and 2 ch4 This register stores the terminator 1 and 2 ch4 Tominstor3and4 eh4 i i 8 bit processing mode ch3 This register stores the 8 bit processing mode ch3 i i Terminator 3 and 4 ch4 This register stores the header 1 and 2 ch1 PREPRE P Z E NO NS No R Z A Z NO Z Z AZ ZZZ Z Il O This register stores the terminator 3 and 4 ch4 Station number setting ch1 This register stores the station number setting ch1 R W Message frame and form ch1 This register stores the message frame and form ch1 R Timeout time ch1 Th
124. 7 MAIN uss Event Bit ON Do Not Clear 3 Click Detailed Setting Information 2 Event Execution Type Detailed Setting window 4 Setthe trigger type to execute the event execution type program E Trigger Type ON of Bit Data TRUE E E see Interruption Qecurrence E ON of Bit Data TRUE a Glear Output and Current Value of Timer Do Mot Clear E Passing Time be Unit za L Clear Output and Current Value of Timer Do Not Clear Displayed Interruption Occurrence Sets the interrupt pointer used as the trigger I0 to 123 150 to 1177 ON of Bit Data TRUE Sets the device used as the trigger gt Page 26 Bit data ON TRUE Passing Time Sets the elapsed time e When ms is selected 1 to 65535 ms in 1 ms units e When s is selected 1 to 65535 s in 1 s units Point When Clear Output and Current Value of Timer is enabled together with ON of Bit Data TRUE or Passing Time the current values of the output Y and timer T of this program can be cleared at the first execution turn of this program that comes after the trigger turns OFF 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 1 4 Execution Type of Program Stand by type program This program is executed only when there is an execution request Saving programs in library Subroutine programs or interrupt programs are saved as standby type programs so that they can be used when controlled separately from the main routine program Multiple subroutin
125. 7 to 32768 to 0 is repeated SD414 2n second clock setting e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 R W e Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 SD415 2nms second clock setting e Stores value n of 2n ms clock Default is 30 R W e Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 SD420 Scan counter e This register is incremented by 1 each scan after the CPU module is set to RUN Not incremented for each scan of an initial execution type program e A counting cycle from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 is repeated The special registers for scan information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD500 Execution program number Program number of program currently being executed is stored SD518 Initial scan time ms This register stores the initial scan time ms SD519 Initial scan time us This register stores the initial scan time us SD520 Current scan time ms This register stores the current scan time ms SD521 Current scan time us This register stores the current scan time us SD522 Minimum scan time ms This register stores the minimum scan time ms SD523 Minimum scan time us This register stores the minimum scan time us SD524 Maximum scan time ms This register stores the maximum scan time ms SD525 Maximum scan time us This register stores the maximum scan time us SD526 END processing time ms This register stores the END processing time ms SD527 END processing time us This regis
126. Address Clear Signal Output Enable Disable Clear Signal Output Device No OPR Dwell Time Near point Dog Signal Device No Near point Dog Signal Logic Zero Signal Device No Zero Signal Logic Zero Signal OPR Zero Signal Counts Zero Signal Count Start Time MPWM Basic Settings Use Not Use Pulse Width Cycle Unit 296 APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List Basic Settings A D Conversion Enable Disable Setting Function A D Conversion Enable Disable Setting A D Conversion Method Average Processing Specify Time Average Counts Average Moving Average Application Settings Warning Output Function Process Alarm Warning Setting Process Alarm Upper Upper Limit Value Process Alarm Upper Lower Limit Value Process Alarm Lower Upper Limit Value Process Alarm Lower Lower Limit Value Over Scale Detection Enable Disable Scaling Setting Scaling Enable Disable Scaling Upper Limit Value Scaling Lower Limit Value Shift Function Shift Amount Digital Clip Setting Digital Clip Enable Disable Basic Settings D A Conversion Enable Disable Setting Function D A Conversion Enable Disable Setting D A Output Enable Disable Setting D A Output Enable Disable Setting Application Settings Warning Output Function Warning Output Setting Warning Upper Limit Value Warning Lower Limit Value Scaling Setting Scaling Enable Disable Scaling Upper Limit Value Scaling Lower Limit Value Analog Output HOLD
127. An FB program larger than the internal e Reduce the number of steps in the FB memory capacity was written program e No program setting is found in the e Specify the program to execute in the parameters parameters The parameter set value is out of range e To use this parameter a new version of the Parameter CPU module is required Replace the CPU information module or perform version upgrade e Duplicate pointers are programmed e Modify the program to not use duplicate Error location pointers in a program information e Duplicate interrupt pointers are e Modify the program to not use duplicate Error location programmed interrupt pointers in a program information If the index modification setting of the PLC parameter is changed write the parameter and program file to the CPU module at the same time Program execution error Program execution error Program execution error Program execution error Program execution error Program execution error Pointer setting error Interrupt pointer setting error Diagnostic timing At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence at module access At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at
128. CH5 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH5 R W This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH5 R W This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH5 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH5 R W This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH5 R W This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W time CH5 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 249 SD4638 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W order CH5 rotation CH5 SD4639 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH5 SD4650 High speed counter current value Low order CH6 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH6 R W SD4651 High speed counter current value High order CH6 SD4652 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH6 This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W CH6 SD4653 High speed counter maximum value High order CH6 SD4654 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH6 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W SD4655 High speed counter minimum value High order CH6 CH6 SD4656 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH6 SD4657 High speed counter pulse density High order CH6 This register store
129. CLEAR Setting HOLD CLEAR Setting HOLD Setting Value Basic Settings Extended Board NN Communication Protocol Type Memory card parameters Boot Setting Boot Setting Clear the CPU built in memory before boot Boot File Setting APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List 297 INDEX A Annunciator FP o o oo ooooooooo 206 NOME orar sea 17 Index register setting 217 B Index registers Z LZ o ooooooo o 217 Initial device value o o oooooo oo 97 Boot operation oooooo oo 104 Initial execution type program 20 Built in analog o o o ooo oooooo 201 Initial scan time o o o oooooooooooo 18 INPULDO 263 mia ia seais balas 205 C Internal relay M ooo o oooooooo 206 b eee Interrupt Cause uaaa aaa aa 220 Character string constant 221 Interrupt pointer I ooooooooo momo 219 Clock function 000 ee eee eee 46 Interrupt priority anann nananana 220 Constan vsa08SoGh05ununboe eeivenceee 221 Interrupt progra picota ek oe ean e A 30 Constant scan o o ooooooooooooo 84 Counter C E sssrds asrasa i Damani uaaa 212 L CPU parameter nnna aaua 291 E A 222 D E 2 dnd ede Here oe Gee bee oe oe A 99 AAA Lalo lisa idea ar eae wae oe a 99 Data MEMOTFY 0 es 37 Latch 2 aa a eae ap ie es Ge ee es a 99 Data register D onanan cece eee eee 215 Latch CIO AN i ce
130. CO instruction ABS instruction ADPRW instruction IVCK instruction IVDR instruction IVRD instruction IVWR instruction IVBWR instruction IVMC instruction S CPRTCL instruction SP CPRTCL instruction RS2 instruction SP SOCOPEN instruction SP SOCCLOSE instruction SP SOCSND instruction SP SOCRCV instruction SP ECPRTCL instruction RBFM instruction WBFM instruction The cautions at the time of repeatedly performing online change When online change is performed repeatedly RUN writing may not be able to be carried out due to insufficient memory in the CPU module Please set the CPU module to STOP and write the program The operation when a pulse type instruction is included in the range of an online ladder block change The operation when a pulse related instruction is included in the range of an online ladder block change is as follows Pulse type instruction Description Rising instruction PLS and OP When a rising instruction exists within the range to be changed the rising instruction will not be executed if the instructions execution condition OFF to ON is fulfilled at completion of online program change Falling instruction PLF and OF When a falling instruction exists within the range to be changed the falling instruction will not be executed even if the instructions execution condition ON to OFF is fulfilled at completion of online program change HRising instruction When a rising instruction exists within the range to
131. D10060 This register stores the subnet mask SD10064 This register stores the default gateway IP address R R R R R R R hi SD10270 Remote password lock status connection No 1 to 8 b0 Connection No 1 b1 Connection No 2 b2 Connection No 3 b3 Connection No 4 b4 Connection No 5 b5 Connection No 6 b6 Connection No 7 b7 Connection No 8 0 Unlock status remote password setting none 1 Lock status APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 263 SD10271 Remote password lock status system port b2 MELSOFT application communication port TCP b3 MELSOFT direct connection 0 Unlock status remote password setting none 1 Lock status SD10320 Connection 1 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 1 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10321 Connection 2 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 2 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10322 Connection 3 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 3 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10323 Connection 4 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 4 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10324 Connection 5 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 5 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10325 Connection 6 continuous unlock failure number of times This r
132. D4697 SD4727 SD4516 SD4546 SD4576 SD4606 SD4636 SD4666 SD4696 SD4726 MDescription These devices set the time to measure pulse density rotational speed in 1 ms units when high speed counters are operating in pulse density measurement mode Point e If the value is modified while the high speed counter is operating the rewritten value is reflected after the measurement before the value was modified is finished e If the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid these devices operate only when the SPD instruction operates The value in the operand of the SPD instruction is written mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN Precautions If the set value for the measurement unit time is set to less than the lower limit value or more than the upper limit value the measurement unit time operates at the lower limit value or the upper limit value However the set value is stored as is 158 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function High speed counter number of pulses per rotation These devices set the number of pulses per rotation for rotational speed measurement mode mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4729 SD4519 SD4549 SD4579 SD4609 SD4639 SD4669 SD4699 SD4518 SD4548 SD4578 SD4608 SD4638 SD4668 SD4698 SD4728 MDescription These devices set the number o
133. Description Setting range Default General Interrupt Pulse Set the function to be used e General purpose Input General purpose Catch Setting Set to Interrupt Rising or Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch e Interrupt Rising Input e Interrupt Falling e Interrupt Rising Falling e Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch Poin tr Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset Operation of FX3 compatible pulse catch function Operation of the FX3 compatible pulse catch function is explained below Operation of FX3 compatible pulse catch function When the status of the input X0 to X7 changes OFF ON after execution of the El instruction a special relay SM8170 to SM8177 is immediately set to ON by interrupt processing Pulse catch operates even when an input interrupt is also set in duplicate with other functions Note however that the pulse catch must be set with parameters Examples of program When the status of the XO changes OFF gt ON after execution of the El instruction SM8170 is immediately set to ON by interrupt processing To capture input again turn X2 ON to reset SM8170 X0 is assumed to be set with parameters It can be simultaneously used in a program Reset input Operation diagram An operation diagram of the above program example is shown below El AH Input pulse width XO input SM8170 X2 reset Cautions when using the FX3 compatible puls
134. Device Setting gt Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting gt Latch Label Latch Type 14 4 Clearing of Data of the Latch Range The data of the latch range can be cleared by the following ways Method of latch clearing By using engineering tools LA GX Works3 Operating Manual WZ Online gt CPU memory operation The range cleared can be selected by performing CPU memory operation e Clear the devices outside the latch range e Clear the devices outside the latch range and the devices within the range of latch 1 e Clear the devices outside the latch range the devices within the range of latch 1 and the devices within the range of latch 2 Method of clearing by program mClearing by program Execute an RST command to a latched device or clear by sending KO in MOV FMOV instructions EClearing by special relay SM8031 or SM8032 e SM8031 Clear the devices outside the latch range e SM8032 Clear the range of latch 1 and the range of latch 2 14 LATCH FUNCTION 1 4 14 4 Clearing of Data of the Latch Range 0 14 5 Precautions The precaution to be taken when using a latch function is described below e When latch range and device no of points are changed in the parameter the latching for devices other than link register W and latch label will be the same as the latch settings before the change Also if the latch range setting parameter at the time of previous operation is different from that at
135. ENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List BHigh Speed Counter Basic Settings Use Do Not Use Counter Use Not Use Operation Mode Operation Mode Pulse Input Mode Pulse Input Mode Preset Input Preset Input Enable Disable Input Logic Preset Value Input Comparison Enable Disable Control Switch Enable Input Enable Input Enable Disable Input logic Ring Length Setting Ring Length Enable Disable Ring Length Measurement Unit Time Pulse No of per Rotation Multi point Output High Speed Compare e Bee Occupied input X Explanation CH1 to 8 Other Specification method for high speed counter MWPulse Width Measurement Basic Settings Use Not Use APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List 295 Positioning Basic Settings Basic Parameters 1 Pulse Output Mode Output Device PULSE CW Output Device SIGN CCW Rotation Direction Setting Unit Setting Pulse No of per Rotation Movement Amount per Rotation Position Data Magnification Basic Parameters 2 Interpolation Speed Specified Method Max Speed Bias Speed Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Detailed Setting Parameter External Start Signal Enable Disable External Start Signal Device No External Start Signal Logic Interrupt Input Signal 1 Enable Disable Interrupt Input Signal 1 Mode Interrupt Input Signal 1 Device No Interrupt Input Signal 1 Logic Interrupt Input Signal 2 Logic OPR Parameters OPR Enable Disable OPR Direction Starting Point
136. Hz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5 KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge 2 5KHz count 1 phase 1 count S W 1 phase 1 count S W 1 count S W E 200 KHz mass E 10K wezen _ 10K Co o phase 2 count 1 edge Oe KHz count 2 phase 2 count 2 edge 5KHz count 2 phase 2 count 4 edge A 2 5KHz count A A phase input B B phase input P External preset input E External enable input 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function High speed counter parameters High speed counter parameters are explained below High speed counter parameters are set by GX Works3 Outline of parameters High speed counter settings high speed comparison table multiple point high speed comparison table setting and input response time are set by parameters The primary items that can be set by parameters are as follows e Basic settings e High speed comparison table setting e Multiple point output high speed table setting e Input response time setting Parameter setting High speed counter parameter setting method is explained below For parameter setting of each operation refer to the following e For high speed counters normal mode refer to L Page 124 High speed counter normal mode For high speed counter pulse density measurement mode refer to K Page 126 High speed counter pulse density measurement mode For high speed counter rotational speed measurement mode refer to L gt
137. IOEN instruction to stop the high speed counter started by UDCNTF instructions On the other hand the instruction started by the HIOEN instruction can be stopped by executing ON OFF of UDCNTF instructions Use caution when the HIOEN instruction and UDCNTF instructions are used together e Do not drive the same LC device number at the same time The operation of each element of the current value of a started counter and the LC evice Shown below is the operations of the SD device the current value of the LC device and each element of the LC device when the counting is started with UDCNTF instructions or is started with the HIOEN instruction while the FX3 compatible function is valid The current value of the SD device each element of the LC device The start with UDCNTF The start with HIOEN instruction instruction The current value of the SD device The current value of the LC device O O x The counter contact point of the LC device x O The reset coil of the LC device O Operate x Not operate Poin tr e When a count is started by HIOEN instruction although LC device changes neither a counting coil nor the counter contact operates Moreover when operation is started by HIOEN instruction and LCO corresponding to CH is reset during the RST instruction ON operation is stopped and calculation is resumed in OFF of the RST instruction Assignment for FX3 compatible high speed counters The high speed counter number that ca
138. Input ladder external device Program Output Y Outputs program control results to external signal lamps digital indicators contactors solenoids etc Signal lamp O CPU Module PERS Output Y Digital display Contactor 21 DEVICES 21 2 User Devices 205 Internal relay M Device intended to be used as an auxiliary relay inside the CPU module All internal relays are turned OFF by the following operation e CPU module power OFF gt 0N e Reset e Latch clear Latch relay L Auxiliary relay that can latch backup by battery in the CPU module Computation results ON OFF information are latched even when performing the following operations e CPU module power OFF gt ON e Reset Link relay B Device intended to be used as a CPU side device when refreshing bit data between CPU module and network module Refreshing network module that uses link relay B Sends receives data mutually between network module link relays LB and link relay B in the CPU module Set refresh range by parameters of the network module Link relays not used for refresh can be used for other purposes Annunciator F Internal relay used for program for detecting equipment errors faults created by the user When the annunciator F is turned ON SM62 Annunciator F Detection turns ON and the number of annunciator devices that are ON and their numbers are stored from SD62 Annunciator F Detection No to SD79
139. MLong counter LC Uses 2 words as 1 point The counting range is from 0 to 4294967295 Count processing Count processing is as follows when counter s coil is executed WWhen the OUT CU instruction OUT LCU instruction is executed The counter s coil is turned ON OFF the current value is updated count value 1 and contact ON OFF processing is executed Current value update count value 1 Current value is updated count value 1 when counter coil input rises OFF gt 0N Current value is not updated when coil input is OFF ON or turned ON OFF Ladder example XO K10 CO Current value update timing END OUT CO END OUT CO END OUT CO Program ON me OFF ON CO coil OFF y V Current value update Current value update 21 DEVICES 212 21 2 User Devices Counter reset Current value of counters is not cleared even if its coil input is turned OFF To clear reset the current value of the counter and turn the contact OFF use the RST CO instruction RST LCO instruction The counter value is cleared and the contact is turned OFF as soon as the RST CU instruction is executed Ladder example XO RST CO Counter reset timing END RST CO END RST CO END RST CO Program di OFF 0 Execution RST CO X j instruction OFF i t f Count value cleared Count value cleared the contact turned OFF the contact turned OFF ON Reset image OFF Precautions when performing cou
140. Measurement Mode e 1 Time Measurement Mode Poin tr The items specified in the parameters are stored in special devices when the CPU module is set from STOP to RUN 1 76 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function List of special relays special registers The list of special relays special registers used in pulse width measurement is shown below R W Read or write Note however that only writing is allowed for the HCMOV instruction R Read only Special relays Description wea R W special registers SM5020 The measurement in progress measurement stopped status of OFF R status flag pulse width measurement on the target channel can be checked SM5021 CH2 pulse width measurement by these flags OFF Measurement stopped ON Measurement in progress SM5022 CH3 pulse width measurement status flag SM5036 These flags turn ON at the end of the 1st period measurement on OFF R SM5037 the target channel They remain ON during measurement in the always measurement mode SM5052 These flags turn ON at the end of the 1st pulse width OFF R SM5053 measurement on the target channel They remain ON during measurement in the always measurement mode SM5068 The measurement mode of the target channel can be checked by R W SM5069 these lags e change the measurement mode during operation use this special relay SM5070 OFF Always measurement mode SM507 1 ON 1 time measurement mode 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 77 19 3 Puls
141. Mode E Preset Input Preset Input Enabler Disable Input logic Preset Walue Input Comparison Enabler Disable Control Switch Enable Input Enable Input Enable Disable Input logic Ring Length Setting Ring Length Enabler Disable Ring Length Measurement Unt Time Measurement Unit Time Pulse No of per Rotation Pulse Ho of per Rotation Displayed items Item Use Not Use Operation Mode Pulse Input Mode Preset Input Enable Disable Input Logic 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Set operation mode Set pulse input mode Enable Set operation mode Normal Mode Set pulse input mode 1 Phase 1 Input SAW Up Down Switch Set present Disable Positive Logic i Disable Rising oet enable input Disable Positive Logic Setring length setting Disable Set measure ment unt time Set the pulse No of per rotation 1000 Disable Mormal Mode 1 Phase 1 Input SAW Up Down Switch Disable Positive Logic l Disable Rising Disable Positive Logic Disable 1000 Set whether use counter or not Disable Disable Enable e Normal Mode e Pulse Density Assumption Mode e Rotation Speed Measurement Mode e 1 Phase 1 Input S W Up Down i Switch e 1 Phase 1 Input H W Up Down Switch e 1 Phase 2 Input e 2 Phase 1 Multiple e 2 Phase 2 Multiple e 2 Phase 4 Multiple e Internal Clock 1MHz Set whether to enable or disable the preset
142. N forcibly disable command OFF SM607 SD memory card ON forcibly disable status flag OFF 2 Check if CARD READY LED has turned off or SM607 SD memory card forcibly disable status flag has turned ON 3 Remove the SD card Operation of function accessing SD memory card The following table shows the operation when the main function is executed while SD memory card is being accessed and when SD memory card is accessed after SD memory card is disabled Boot operation After completing execution function SD memory card turns to disabled status CPU module error occurs 2 e Access to the label device comment in the SD memory card e Device label initialization operation at STOP gt RUN Access to the SD memory card by engineering Error handling occurs e Error handling occurs Error handling occurs e Error handling occurs tool SLMP function e CPU module e CPU module continuation error continuation error occurs occurs 1 Set whether an error due to accessing the SD memory card after SD memory card forced stop will be detected or not 2 Operation is same as when the SD memory card is not attached 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 4 03 15 1 SD Memory Card Forced Stop Releasing the SD memory card forced stop status After the SD memory card has turned to disable status release the SD memory card forced stop status by the operation shown below 1 Load SD card again 2 Turn OFF gt 0N the power or reset the CPU
143. Normal transfer capable special relay is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only x x x x x x x x x 4 72 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function LC device O High speed transfer capable special relay is immediately updated A Normal transfer capable special relay is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only LC35 High speed counter current value CH1 oc io Ja x LC50 High speed counter current value CH4 po a a x Precautions when using FX3 compatible high speed counters Shown below are the precautions for using the FX3 compatible high speed counter For any other precautions see the precautions for each function e When the FX3 compatible function is valid it is possible to specify the LC device in s1 of the HSCS instruction HSCR instruction and s of the HSZ instruction If an LC device that is not used as high speed counter is specified an error occurs and the HSCS instruction the HSCR instruction and the HSZ instruction do not operate e Set up the table with the CH number of the counter if the table number of the high speed comparison table the multi point output high speed comparison table needs to be specified To clear the current value of the LC device use the DHCMOV instruction or the RST instruction to clear it e Use the latch setting to use LC35 to LC55 with the high speed counter of the FX3 co
144. ON SD4512 High speed counter preset value CH1 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4513 SD4514 High speed counter ring length CH 1 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4515 SD4516 High speed counter measurement unit time CH1 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4517 SD4518 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH1 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value R W SD4519 SD4520 to SD4529 Not used A SD4530 High speed counter current value CH2 2147483648 to 2147483647 R W SD4532 High speed counter maximum value CH2 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 R W SD4534 High speed counter minimum value CH2 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647 R W SD4536 High speed counter pulse density CH2 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4538 High speed counter rotational speed CH2 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4540 High speed counter preset control switch CH2 0 Rising edge Parameter set value R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON SD4542 High speed counter preset value CH2 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4543 SD4544 High speed counter ring length CH2 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4545 SD4546 High speed counter measurement unit time CH2 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4547 148 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function SD4548 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH2 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value R W
145. ON Pulse output decelerates stop Built in positioning forward rotation limit axis 1 OFF Forward rotation limit OFF ON Forward rotation limit ON Built in positioning forward rotation limit axis 2 OFF Forward rotation limit OFF ON Forward rotation limit ON Built in positioning forward rotation limit axis 3 OFF Forward rotation limit OFF ON Forward rotation limit ON Built in positioning forward rotation limit axis 4 OFF Forward rotation limit OFF R W ON Forward rotation limit ON Built in positioning reverse rotation limit axis 1 OFF Reverse rotation limit OFF R W ON Reverse rotation limit ON Built in positioning reverse rotation limit axis 2 OFF Reverse rotation limit OFF R W ON Reverse rotation limit ON Built in positioning reverse rotation limit axis 3 OFF Reverse rotation limit OFF R W ON Reverse rotation limit ON Built in positioning reverse rotation limit axis 4 OFF Reverse rotation limit OFF R W ON Reverse rotation limit ON Built in positioning rotational direction axis 1 OFF Forward rotation Current address increases R W ON Reverse rotation Current address increases Built in positioning rotational direction axis 2 OFF Forward rotation Current address increases R W ON Reverse rotation Current address increases Built in positioning rotational direction axis 3 OFF Forward rotation Current address increases R W ON Reverse rotation Current address increases Built in positioning rotation
146. Ooo o Output pulse E Point e When positive logic is set PWM output begins from output ON e Pulse output is stopped at the specified number of pulses e Pulse output stops in the output Y status of before PWM output was started 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function 193 When negative logic is set The relationship between the period and pulse width when the output pulse logic at start of pulse output is set to negative logic is shown below The pulse width is called the OFF width PWM output start W command input Cycle OFF width UNE Output pulse Point e When negative logic is set PWM output begins when the output pulse turns OFF e Pulse output is stopped at the specified number of pulses e Pulse output stops in the output Y status of before PWM output was started PWM driving method PWM output is driven by either of the following methods MDriven by HIOEN instruction The logical settings like output destination cycle pulse width output pulse logic etc are set in parameters and the HIOEN instruction is used to execute pulse output For parameters refer to L Page 195 PWM output parameters For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Driven by PWM instruction The PWM instruction is used to execute pulse output For the PWM instruction refer to LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Sta
147. Page 129 High speed counter rotational speed measurement mode For high speed comparison table refer to K Page 132 High speed comparison table For multiple point output high speed comparison tables refer to L Page 134 Multiple point output high speed comparison tables For input response time refer to KL Page 191 General purpose Input Functions Poin tr Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset In addition operations different from the parameter settings are possible by transferring values to special relays and special registers while changing these values in the program For details concerning special relays and specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 137 Special relay list E Page 148 Special registers list 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 12 19 1 High speed Counter Function 3 124 High speed counter normal mode Normal mode for high speed counters is explained below Use normal mode if you want to use as an ordinary high speed counter Set operation mode to normal mode by high speed counter parameter setting Sets detailed settings for channel used O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed Counter gt Detail Setting gt Basic Settings Window ltem E User Do Not Use Caster Use Not Use Operation Mode Operation Mode Pulse Input Mode Pulse Input
148. Serial Communication LAMELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication COOOH to CFFFH LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Detailed information Upon detection of error through self diagnostics function the detailed information of the error cause is stored all together The following detailed information is added to each error code up to two types of information are stored for each error code The types differ depending on error code Detailed information 1 to 2 of the latest error code s can be checked with special register SD Detailed information Description Detailed information 1 Error location information Information on the location in a program Drive File information Information on drive names and file names Parameter information The information for the parameter such as parameter storage location and parameter type is indicated System configuration information The information for the system configuration such as I O No is indicated Frequency information This section describes the information for frequency such as the write frequency into memory Time information The information for the time is indicated Detailed information 2 Drive File information Information on drive names and file names Annunciator information Information about annunciators Parameter information The information for the parameter such as parameter storage location and parameter type is indicated System configurati
149. Setting from Module Operating procedure Interrupt Settings window 1 Set Multiple Interrupt to Enable on the Interrupt Setting Settings window and click Detailed Setting Multiple Interrupt Enable a Interrupt Priority Detailed Setting Detailed Setting window 2 Change the priority of each interrupt pointer Priority 10 2 co PD PD Fh PD PD PD PD Fh Mh PR Ph Fh Rh Mh Ph 115 Displayed items Multiple Interrupt Sets whether or not to enable multiple interrupt Disable e Enable Interrupt Priority Detailed Setting Sets the priority of the interrupt pointers 10 to 131 2 1 The lower the numerical value the higher the interrupt priority Disabling enabling interrupts with a specified or lower priority Interrupts with a priority equal or lower than that specified by the DI or El instruction can be disabled or enabled even when multiple interrupts are present For details refer to LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Poin tr Disabled interrupt priorities and the current interrupt priority can be checked in SD758 Interrupt disabling for each priority setting value and SD757 Current interrupt priority respectively 8 INTERRUPT FUNCTION 8 1 Multiple Interrupt Function 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 1 Outline of Function PID control is performed by PID control instruction The PID instruction requires the system to calculate the
150. Specification fl 3 Dizable Set Direct Specification fl 4 Digable Set Direct Specification fl Displayed items Counter CH Set the counter CH of coincidence output target Disable CH1 to CH8 Disable S Comparison Type Set comparison type e Set et e Reset e Self Reset e Band Area Comparison Output Destination Device Sets output destination device for output comparison Bit device Y M Interrupt pointer 116 to 123 results of comparison value 1 and comparison value 2 Comparison Value 1 Sets the specification method of comparison value 1 e Direct Specification Direct Specification Method e Indirect Specification Specificati on Comparison Value 1 Direct Sets value comparison value 1 to be compared with 2147483648 lt Comparison value 1 lt 2147483647 0 current value of high speed counter When direct specification is selected Comparison Value 1 Indirect Sets device comparison value 1 to be compared with Word device D R current value of high speed counter When indirect specification is selected Comparison Value 2 If band comparison is set to comparison type sets the e Direct Specification Specification Method specification method of comparison value 2 e Indirect Specification Comparison Value 2 Direct If band comparison is set to comparison type sets value Comparison value 1 lt Comparison value Comparison value 2 to be compared with current value 2 lt 2147483647 of high speed counter W
151. TOP status by operations like remote STOP and then execute remote RESET WState after completion of the reset process When the reset process is completed on a CPU module on which remote RESET was executed the CPU module will change to an operation status set by the RUN STOP RESET switch Setting the RUN STOP RESET switch to the STOP position will change the status to STOP and setting the switch to the RUN position will change the status to RUN Point e Note that if a remote RESET is executed when the CPU module has stopped due to an error the CPU module will change to an operation status set by the RUN STOP RESET switch by reset process completion e If status of CPU module does not change even after executing remote RESET by engineering tool check the remote reset settings in the CPU parameter If it is not set even after completion of the remote process of engineering tool reset process of the CPU module will not be carried out MWhen an error occurs due to noise When there an error due to noise exercise caution as there is a possibility that PLC cannot be reset by remote RESET When reset by remote RESET is not possible either execute reset by RUN STOP RESET switch or once again start up the power of CPU module 11 REMOTE OPERATION 11 3 Remote RESET 11 4 Relationship Between Remote Operation and CPU Module I onship between remote operation and RUN STOP status of the CPU module The following table show
152. TROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters 59 60 e Relationship between the forward backward operation and the output MV measured value PV and target value SV The relationship is as follows Output value MV Target value SV Forward operation Backward operation Measured value PV larm setting for input variation and output variation Ifb1 and b2 in s3 1 are turned ON the input variation and the output variation can be checked The check is executed by following the values of s3 20 to s3 23 These parameters can be set in s3 24 For details on operation of alarm output refer to K Page 67 Alarm output s3 24 e Input variation If the input variation alarm is used turn ON b1 in s3 1 and specify the input variation alarm set value Operation setting s3 1 b1 Input variation alarm ON Used OFF Not used Input variation alarm set value s3 20 Input variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 s3 21 Input variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 e Output variation If the output variation alarm is used turn ON b1 in s3 1 and specify the output variation alarm set value When this function is used make sure to turn OFF b5 of s3 1 Operation setting s3 1 b2 Output variation alarm ON Used OFF Not used s3 1 b5 Output value upper lower limit setting Make sure to set itto OFF Output variation alarm set value s3 22 Output varia
153. This process is included in the initial scan time Initial scan time This refers to the initial scan time when the CPU module is in the RUN mode How to check the initial scan time The initial scan time can be checked by the following information e Value stored in SD518 initial scan time ms SD519 initial scan time us e Program list monitor LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Monitoring the initial scan time The initial scan time is monitored by the initial scan time execution monitor time 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION Minitial scan time execution monitor time precautions e Set an initial execution monitor time longer then the execution time of the initial scan time An error occurs when the initial scan time exceeds the set initial execution monitor time e The measurement error margin of the initial scan execution monitor time is 10 ms For example if the initial execution monitor time t is set to 100 ms an error occurs in the initial scan time in the range 100 ms lt t lt 110 ms range 1 8 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 2 Scan Time 1 3 Program Execution Sequence When the CPU module enters the RUN status the programs are executed successively according to the execution type of the programs and execution order setting STOP PAUSE RUN Does an initial execution type program exist Exists Does not exist Standby type Initial execution program type program Scan execution type progra
154. UCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Memory Device Setting gt Device Label Memory Area Setting z E DevicesLabel Memory Area Detailed Setting l ven Device high speed Setting Detailed Setting se Device Standard Setting Detailed Setting vee Latch type setting of the latch relay L Latch 1 l z Latch Label Latch Type Latch 1 l sen Latch area of the latch label standard Latch rea To uze or not to use the routine timer of timer iT Start device No of routine timer of timer iT To use or not to use the Not use routine timer of timer T Whether the routine timer is used is set Not use e Use The initial device of the routine timer is set 0 to 1023 Start device No of routine timer of timer T 21 DEVICES 21 2 User Devices 211 Counter C LC Device that counts number of rises of input conditions in the program Counters are addition type counters they count up when the count value matches the setting value and the contact is turned ON For details on the FX3 compatible high speed counter refer to L gt Page 165 FX3 compatible high speed counter function Counter type There is counter C that maintains the counter value in 16 bits and the long counter LC that maintains the counter value in 32 bits Counter C and long counter LC are separate devices You can set number of device points for each Counter C Uses 1 word as 1 point The counting range is from 0 to 32767
155. abel outside latch range bit device OFF word device 0 O Setting of device Indicates an instance of power OFF ON or setting to RUN status without a reset after modifying parameters or program in STOP status 16 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 1 Scan Configuration I O refresh Execute l O refresh before starting program operations e Input ON OFF data input from input module intelligent function module to CPU module e Output ON OFF data input from CPU module to output module intelligent function module Point When executing constant scan I O refresh is executed after the constant scan waiting time ends Program operations Step 0 of each program up to the END FEND instruction is executed according to program settings This program is called the main routine Main routine programs can be divided into subroutines Page 29 Subroutine program END processing END processing involves the following processes e Refreshing of network modules e Refreshing of intelligent function modules e Instruction termination processing e Device label access service processing e Resetting of the watchdog timer e Self diagnostic processing e Setting of values to special relays special registers set timing when END processing is executed 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 4 1 1 Scan Configuration l 1 2 Scan Time The CPU module repeats the following processing The scan time is the sum total of each process and execution time 4
156. able special register is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only SD4982 High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction error occurrence error code Multi point output high speed comparison table comparison number SD5000 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 162 19 1 High speed Counter Function Precautions when using high speed counters This section describes the precautions when using high speed counters Common precautions when using high speed counter instructions and parameters This section describes the common precautions when using high speed comparison tables and multi point output comparison tables with the high speed counter instructions DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions or parameters For the individual precautions on high speed counter instructions refer to LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks MWHigh speed counter devices The current values for high speed counters are checked with special registers for each channel To start or stop counting of the high speed counters use the HIOEN instruction or the SPD instruction e High speed counter start stop conditions Counting e HIOEN instruction e HIOEN instruction e SPD instruction SPD instruction Comparison processing e HIOEN instruction e HIOEN instruction e DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions 2 1 Can be stopped when counting was started wi
157. able below shows the operations of the setting values 0 Executes the preset on the rising edge 1 Executes the preset on the falling edge 2 Executes the preset on both edges 3 Constantly executes the preset when ON Other than above Operates as the rising edge Executes the preset on the rising edge 1 When the preset control switch is set to 3 Constant when ON the preset input comparison cannot be used even if the parameter of the preset input comparison special relay is enabled e While the high speed counter is operating the value is not reflected even if modified It operates in the status when the high speed counter starts e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN 154 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function EDescription of operation This section describes the operations when the preset input logic and the preset control switch are combined The preset value is set to 0 e Operation when preset input logic positive logic preset control switch rising edge The preset is executed when the preset input changes OFF gt 0N Preset input q E Count input of JU UU UU UU UU UU UU U U L Current value O O NO00d0o Y OW 0 e Operation when preset input logic positive logic preset control switch falling edge The prese
158. after interruption becomes allowed is specified However if execution condition is satisfied while interruption is set to be disabled because of a DI instruction or the like this is out of the scope of the fixed scan execution mode Poin tr Interrupts disabled refers to the following e A program having an interrupt priority higher than or the same as the corresponding program is currently being executed e The corresponding program is currently being executed e Program execution is currently at a part in which interrupts are disabled by the system 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 1 4 Execution Type of Program 3 24 Operation in the fixed scan execution mode This section describes the operation which can be performed in the fixed scan execution mode e Execution Count Takes Priority The program is executed for all the pending number of executions so that it can be executed the same number of times as execution condition was satisfied Execution condition satisfied Cycle interval of TEISYU 6 times Number of executions 6 times TEISYU Fixed scan execution type program l 1 Section where interruptions gt All di ecutions are executed and the are disabled pending executi xecu number of executions of the fixed scan is guaranteed In the chart three executions are made immediately after interruption becomes allowed 1 e Precede Fixed Scan When the waiting for execution one execution is made when inter
159. al direction axis 4 OFF Forward rotation Current address increases R W ON Reverse rotation Current address increases Built in positioning zero return direction axis 1 OFF Zero return start Reverse rotation direction R W ON Zero return start Forward rotation direction Built in positioning zero return direction axis 2 OFF Zero return start Reverse rotation direction R W ON Zero return start Forward rotation direction Built in positioning zero return direction axis 3 OFF Zero return start Reverse rotation direction R W ON Zero return start Forward rotation direction Built in positioning zero return direction axis 4 OFF Zero return start Reverse rotation direction R W ON Zero return start Forward rotation direction Built in positioning clear signal function axis 1 OFF Clear signal disabled R W ON Clear signal enabled Built in positioning clear signal function axis 2 OFF Clear signal disabled R W ON Clear signal enabled Built in positioning clear signal function axis 3 OFF Clear signal disabled R W ON Clear signal enabled Built in positioning clear signal function axis 4 OFF Clear signal disabled R W ON Clear signal enabled Built in positioning zero point signal count start axis 1 OFF Near point DOG backward end R W ON Near point DOG forward end Built in positioning zero point signal count start axis 2 OFF Near point DOG backward end R W ON Near point DOG forward end Built in positioni
160. alculation is performed when input data is a special value an error occurs If O occurs during calculation it is treated as 0 the calculation result does not become 0 1 Special values are 0 denormalized numbers non numbers 00 Programming expressions Real numbers can be specified by the following expressions e Normal expression Specify a numeric value as it is Example E10 2345 in the case of 10 2345 e Scientific notation Specify a numeric value in the format numeric value x10n Example E1 234 3 in the case of 1234 3 represents 10 Character string constant Device that specifies character string Shift JIS code character strings can be used Character strings end with NULL character OOH Specify by character string 21 DEVICES 21 10 Constant 221 22 LABELS Label is identifier character string that specifies a character string in I O data or internal processing When a label is used in programming a program can be created without being conscious about the device No 1 1 Label and device can be used in mixed manner Point FP For details on label refer to the following LAMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design 222 22 LABELS MEMO 22 LABELS 223 APPENDIA Appendix 1 Special Relay List agnostic information The special relays for diagnostic information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SMO Latest self diagnostics error in
161. alues External load resistance is set to 2 KQ when shipped from the factory Thus output voltage will increase somewhat if the resistance is set higher than 2 kQ When the resistance is 1 MQ output voltage increases by a maximum 2 3 Digit refers to digital values 20 BUILT IN ANALOG FUNCTION 20 1 Function Outline 201 List of analog input functions Function to enable disable A D conversion A D conversion Sampling processing method Count average Time average Moving average Function to detect over scale Scaling function Shift function Digital clipping function Function to hold minimum and maximum values Warning output function Function to enable or disable A D conversion per channel The conversion process time can be reduced by disabling conversion for unused channels Method of converting each analog input at END processing to generate the equivalent digital output Method of averaging the count of A D conversion values and outputting these average values as the digital signal Method of averaging the time of A D conversion values and outputting these average values as the digital signal Method of averaging the analog input for a specified count measured at every END process and outputting these average values as the digital signal Function to detect analog input values that are over a specified range Function that converts user defined maximum and minimum digital values in accordance wit
162. am 3 RET END Pointer Point Subroutine programs can also be managed as separate programs by turning them into standby type programs Page 28 Stand by type program e Pointers need not be programmed starting with the smallest number Precautions The precautions when using subroutine programs are explained below e Do not use timers T ST Note however that timers can be used when a timer coil OUT TO instruction is always executed only once in one scan e An error occurs when program execution returns to the call source program and the program is terminated without using the RET instruction e An error occurs when there is no pointer P or pointer type global label in FB or FUN 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 2 1 5 Program Type 9 Interrupt program This is the program from interrupt pointer 1 up to the IRET instruction El H Y 10 Main routine program HAY 11 Indicates the end of the main routine program FEND 10 HAY 12 I0 interrupt program IRET 129 V13 129 interrupt program IRET END Interrupt pointer When an interrupt is generated the interrupt program corresponding to that interrupt pointer number is executed Note however that interrupt enabled status must be set with the El instruction before executing the interrupt program Interrupt Interrupt occurs for l0 occurs for 129 Execution Y Execution Execution Main routine program IO interrupt program Exec
163. ant scan time error IP address setting error IP address writing clear request simultaneous detection Online change error Online change error Module configuration error Module configuration error Module configuration error Module configuration error Module configuration error e Low battery voltage was detected An error was also detected in a battery latched backed device An annunciator that was turned ON by the SET F instruction or OUT F instruction was detected The channel specified by instructions using communication functions or built in I O is already used by other instructions The number of times that applied instructions are used in the program exceeded the specified limit The scan time exceeded the constant scan setting value Values such as the IP address setting SD8492 to SD8497 are outside the set range Write request and clear request M8492 and SM8495 turned from OFF to ON simultaneously An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN An error was detected when writing was executed during RUN The number of I O points specified in the I O assignment setting of the parameters is different from that of the module connected The module position specified in the I O assignment setting of the parameters is different from that of the module connected No parameters available for the module connected exist The module specified in the I O as
164. ar request R W ON Clear request APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List SM6098 CH2 A D alarm flag OFF No alarm R W ON Alarm SM6099 CH2 A D error flag OFF No error R W ON Error SM6180 D A conversion enable disable setting OFF D A conversion enable R W ON D A conversion disable SM6181 D A output enable disable OFF Output enable R W ON Output disable SM6188 Scaling enable disable setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6191 Warning output upper limit value flag OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6192 Warning output lower limit value flag OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6193 Warning output setting OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM6217 D A alarm clear request OFF No clear request R W ON Clear request SM6218 D A alarm flag OFF No alarm R ON Alarm SM6219 D A error flag OFF No error R ON Error X compatible area The special relays of FX compatible area are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SM8000 RUN monitor NO contact OFF STOP R ON RUN SM8001 RUN monitor NC contact OFF RUN R ON STOP SM8002 Initial pulse NO contact OFF SM8002 turns off except during 1 scan at the time of RUN R ON SM8002 turns on during 1 scan at the time of RUN SM8003 Initial pulse NC contact OFF SM8003 turns on during 1 scan at the time of RUN R ON SM8003 turns off except during 1 scan at the time of RUN SM8004 Error occurrence OFF No error R ON Error SM8005 Battery voltage low OFF Battery normal R ON Battery voltage low
165. arameter for Protocol Settine FX5UCPU Ethernet UEXSFFO0 5 Module Extended Parameter for Protocol Settine FX5UCPU Serial UEXSFFO1 6 Remote Password 00000001 7 Global Label GLBLINF 8 Program File MAIN 9 Program File 10 FB FUN File 11 Device Comment COMMENT 12 Device Initial Value Clear the CPU built in Do Not Clear memory before boot Sets whether or not to clear the CPU built in memory upon file transfer Do Not Clear from the SD memory card e Clear Sets the files used for boot operation from the SD memory card O Boot File Setting 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 4 0 15 2 Boot Operation 5 aximum nu er of boot files that can be specified It is the same as the number of files that can be stored in transfer destination memory when security functions are enabled This section describes the operation when security functions are enabled MWhen a security key is set When a security key is set to the boot target program file and the security of the program file does not match with that of the CPU module a boot error occurs Also when no security key is written to the CPU module a boot error occurs as well Not written F Not execute boot error When a file password 32 is set If a file password 32 is set on both the source boot file and destination file the file can be transferred only when the passwords match Furthermore the file transfer does not work if a file password 32 is set o
166. arameters are consistent with the connections Frequency information Error location information and annunciator information Error location information Error location information Time information configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information Appendix 3 At write At END instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET APPENDIX Error Code 275 Error code 1FE5H Module configuration error 1FE6H Module configuration error 1FE7H Module configuration error 2003H Module configuration error 2008H Module configuration error 2042H CPU module configuration error 20E0H Invalid module detection 2120H Memory card error 2121H Memory card error 2180H Invalid file 21A0H File specification error 2220H 2221H 2222H 2241H Parameter error module 2300H Security key authentication error APPENDIX 276 Error details and cause Action Detailed information The I O numbers of the reserved module Paramete
167. ata ch1 MODBUS R communication error code ch1 This register stores the receive data points ch1 MODBUS R communication error details ch1 This register stores the communication parameter display ch1 R MODBUS communication format display ch1 This register stores the MODBUS communication current retry R times ch1 This register stores the ch1 receive sum received data R This register stores the ch1 receive sum calculated result R This register stores the send sum ch1 R APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 259 260 No SD8419 SD8422 SD8423 SD8425 SD8428 SD8434 SD8435 SD8436 SD8438 SD8439 SD8492 SD8493 SD8494 SD8495 SD8496 SD8497 SD8498 SD8499 Operation mode ch1 RS2 amount of remaining data ch2 MODBUS communication error code ch2 RS2 receive data points ch2 MODBUS communication error details ch2 RS2 receive sum calculated result ch2 MODBUS communication retry times ch2 RS2 receive sum received data ch2 RS2 receive sum calculated result ch2 RS2 send sum ch2 Serial communication error code ch2 Operation mode ch2 IP address setting Low order IP address setting High order Subnet mask setting Low order Subnet mask setting High order Default gateway IP address setting Low order Default gateway IP address setting High order IP address storage area write error code IP address storage area clear error code Serial
168. ate is as follows e High speed counter driven by the HIOEN instruction e High speed counter stopped by the HIOEN instruction e SPD instruction ON execution e Power ON reset STOP PAUSE e UDCNTEF instruction is executed ON when the FX3 compatible high speed e UDCNTFE instruction is executed OFF when the FX3 compatible high counter function is valid speed counter function is valid inter pulse density rotational speed being measured Device for monitoring operation of the high speed counter when using pulse density rotational soeed measurement mode mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4516 SM4523 SM4517 SM4518 SM4519 SM4520 SM4521 SM4522 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Pulse density rotational speed measurement mode operating Pulse density rotational soeed measurement mode stopped or not being used Updates measurement results by measuring unit time If the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid these devices operate only when the SPD instruction operates Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Pulse density rotational speed measurement mode is set in parameter and e Pulse density rotational speed measurement mode is set in parameter and pulse density rotational speed measurement is driven by the HIOEN pulse density rotational soeed measurement is stopped by the HIOEN
169. ate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning Detailed information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Diagnostic timing At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instr
170. ation has failed e When using serial communication check with the external device manufacturer for support conditions e When using serial communication check the CPU module model name selected in the engineering tool e When using Ethernet communication shift the communication start timing CPU module e Since the CPU module is running the request contents e Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status operation error cannot be executed CPU module e Since the CPU module is not in a STOP status the request Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status operation error contents cannot be executed File related error e The specified drive memory does not exist or there is an error e Check the specified drive memory status e Back up data in the CPU module and then initialize the memory File related error e The file with the specified file name or file No does not e Check the specified file name and file No exist File related error The specified file is processing the request from another engineering tool e Forcibly execute the request Or execute the request again after the processing being performed ends File related error e The specified range is larger than the file size e Check the specified range and access within that range File related error Device specification error Device specification error Intelligent function module specification error Intelligent function m
171. ation result receive packet No 7 SD10889 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 8 SD10890 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 9 SD10891 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 10 SD10892 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 11 SD10893 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 12 SD10894 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 13 SD10895 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 14 SD10896 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 15 SD10897 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 16 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List CI Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 7 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 7 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 8 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch veri
172. attern Link Device Bit Device Link Device Word Device SM SD Setting Latch Setting Host Station No Total Number of Local Station Refresh Range Timeout Retry Count Setting Monitoring Time FX3 Series Compatibility SM SD for Compatible 1 0 Settings Input Function General Interrupt Pulse catch General Interrupt Pulse catch High Speed Counter High Speed Counter Pulse Width Measurement Pulse Width Measurement Output Function Positioning Positioning PWM PWM Input Check Input Response Time Input Response Time Input Interrupt Rising Falling Rising Falling Pulse Catch Pulse Catch High Speed Counter CH1 to 8 Pulse Width Measurement CH1 to 4 Positioning External Start Signal Positive Logic Axis 1 to 4 External Start Signal Negative Logic Axis 1 to 4 Interrupt Input Signal 1 High Speed Axis 1 to 4 Interrupt Input Signal 1 Standard Positive Logic Axis 1 to 4 Interrupt Input Signal 1 Standard Negative Logic Axis 1 to 4 Near point Dog Signal Axis 1 to 4 Zero Signal Positive Logic Axis 1 to 4 Zero Signal Negative Logic Axis 1 to 4 Interrupt Input Signal 2 Axis 1 to 4 Output Confirmation Positioning Pulse Output PULSE Axis 1 to 4 Pulse Output SIGN Axis 1 to 4 Pulse Output CW Axis 1 to 4 Pulse Output CCW Axis 1 to 4 Clear Signal Axis 1 to 4 PWM CH1 to 4 General Interrupt Pulse catch General Interrupt Pulse Catch XO to X17 General Interrupt Pulse Catch Setting 294 APP
173. be changed the rising instruction will not be executed if the execution condition OFF to ON is fulfilled at completion of online program change Online change completion XO 1 The rising instruction will not be executed even if the execution condition is 7 1F 4PLs mo H OFF to ON END O AEND O A END 0 Status of X0 X0 OFF OFF ho MO OFF E ON ON 0N mo OFF gt 0N 7 ONLINE CHANGE 4 7 1 Online Ladder Block Change 5 Falling instruction When a falling instruction exists within the range to be changed the falling instruction will not be executed even if the execution condition ON to OFF is fulfilled at completion of online program change Online change completion XO L PLF MO H END 0 AENDO A END 0 Status of XO PEPE ca 1 XO OFF_ _ amp 5 OFF gt OFF ON pe OFF gt esse X0 MO orr St 7 ONLINE CHANGE 52 7 1 Online Ladder Block Change 1 The falling instruction will not be executed even if the execution condition is OFF to OFF 2 If online program change and transition of ON to OFF occur simultaneously the falling instruction will not be executed O INTERRUPT FUNCTION This chapter describes the interrupt function 8 1 Multiple Interrupt Function When an interrupt occurs while an interrupt program triggered by another cause is running stops the program if its priority is lower than that of the new interrupt and runs the higher priori
174. before PWM is output Not necessary when YO is already OFF PWM output from CH1 starts by the rising edge interrupt of XO Interrupt program is permitted The number of pulses to be output is set YO is reset before PWM is output Not necessary when YO is already OFF PWM output from CH1 starts by the rising edge interrupt of XO 20 BUILT IN ANALOG FUNCTION The analog I O terminal functions built into the FX5U CPU module are explained below 20 1 Function Outline There are two lines of analog voltage input and one line of analog voltage output built into the FX5U CPU module Functions must be configured using parameters to use the built in analog circuits The values resulting from A D conversion by the FX5U CPU module are automatically written in special registers for each channel By setting values into the special registers in the FX5U CPU module the signal after D A conversion is automatically output For details on the function refer to the following manual LTIMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Analog Control 20 2 Analog Input Output Specifications Analog input output specification is shown below Analog input specifications Item No of analog input points Analog input Voltage Digital output Input characteristics max resolution Digital output value Max resolution 9 Precision Ambient temperature 25 Precision for the max digital output value Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Conversion
175. bel latch label area capacity MWhen device area setting using by label latch label is standard area Label Area Capacity Latch Label Area Capacity Device standard Area Capacity lt 48 K Word 1 K word unit MWhen device area setting using by label latch label is high speed area Label Area Capacity Latch Label Area Capacity Device high speed Area Capacity lt 12 K Word 1 K word unit MWhen FB is used In using FB it consumes the margin area for a label addition in addition to the label defined for FB The following capacities are consumed per FB instance Label area 48 words Latch area 16 words 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 93 12 2 The Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area 12 3 Device Label Memory Area Setting The capacity of each data area allocated within the device label memory can be changed TZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Memory Device Setting gt Device Label Memory Area Setting Operating procedure Device Label Memory Area Setting window 1 In Option Battery Setting select whether or not to use tem TALL a option battery gt Devico Label Momay Arca Setting NOAA Option Battery Setting Not Mounted 5 i i ij E E OR 2 In Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting set Device Area Device high speed Area Capacity 12 K Word Device standard rea Capacity 35 K Word Label Area Label Latch Label Use Device Area Se
176. ble shift R W ON Table shift start SM5581 Built in positioning table shift instructions axis 2 OFF No table shift R W ON Table shift start SM5582 Built in positioning table shift instructions axis 3 OFF No table shift R W ON Table shift start SM5583 Built in positioning table shift instructions axis 4 OFF No table shift R W ON Table shift start SM5596 Built in positioning remaining distance operation enabled OFF Remaining distance operation disabled R W axis 1 ON Remaining distance operation enabled SM5597 Built in positioning remaining distance operation enabled OFF Remaining distance operation disabled R W axis 2 ON Remaining distance operation enabled SM5598 Built in positioning remaining distance operation enabled OFF Remaining distance operation disabled R W axis 3 ON Remaining distance operation enabled SM5599 Built in positioning remaining distance operation enabled OFF Remaining distance operation disabled R W axis 4 ON Remaining distance operation enabled SM5612 Built in positioning remaining distance operation start OFF Remaining distance operation standby R W axis 1 ON Remaining distance operation start SM5613 Built in positioning remaining distance operation start OFF Remaining distance operation standby R W axis 2 ON Remaining distance operation start SM5614 Built in positioning remaining distance operation start OFF Remaining distance operation standby R W axis 3 ON Remaining distance operatio
177. by continuous control even if power of the CPU is turned OFF or there is a power failure that exceeds the allowable momentary power interruption all data can be maintained and control can be continued 14 1 Types of Latch There are two types of latches latch 1 and latch 2 Latch clear range can be set by selecting latch 1 or latch 2 For latch clearing refer to L gt Page 101 Clearing of Data of the Latch Range 14 2 Device label that can be Latched The devices and labels that can be latched are described below The devices that can be latched The devices that can be latched are described below Device Applicable latch type Internal relay M Latch 1 or Latch 2 Latch relay L Latch 2 only Link relay B Latch 1 or Latch 2 Annunciator F Latch 1 or Latch 2 Step relay S Latch 1 only Timer T Accumulation timer ST Latch 1 or Latch 2 Counter C Long counter LC Latch 1 or Latch 2 Data register D Latch 1 or Latch 2 Link register W Latch 1 or Latch 2 File register R Latch 1 or Latch 2 4 Link register W and file register R can be latched only when an optional battery is used Labels that can be latched The labels that can be latched are described below Global label RETAIN Basic data type array structure Local label of the program block VAR Local label of the Function Block VAR VAR_INPUT VAR_OUTPUT VAR_PUBLIC 4 Only sub routine type FB can be used
178. can Ath scan 5th scan 160 interrupt occurs a p E Execution order Scan execution type program A Scan execution type program B Event execution type program C Executed when Y50 turns ON Event execution type program D Executed when 160 interrupt occurs Event execution type program E Executed when 10 ms elapses END processing 1 Measurement of elapsed time is 10 ms or more because it is determined depending on the scan time Trigger type Triggers for event execution type programs are explained below Page 27 Trigger setting Generation of interrupt by interrupt pointer I The program is executed once immediately when a specified interrupt cause is generated An interrupt pointer label can be appended by adding the FEND instruction to a different program and the program description partitioned by the IRET instruction can be turned into an exclusive program STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan Gl 160 interrupt occurs Execution order Scan execution type program A __ Scan execution type program B END processing Event execution type program C Executed when 160 interrupt occurs 1 Event execution type program C is executed immediately when the specified event is generated e Specifiable interrupt pointer 1 Specifiable interrupt pointers are 10 to 115 116 to 123 and 150 to 1177 Point FP Execution conditions for the event execution type program which
179. cation results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 269 270 No SD10838 Connection No 5 protocol execution count SD10839 Connection No 5 protocol cancellation specification SD10840 Connection No 6 protocol execution status SD10842 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 1 SD10843 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 2 SD10844 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 3 SD10845 Connection No 6 received data verification result receive packet No 4
180. ce Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by failure of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected s
181. ce numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM5061 SM5059 SM5060 SM5058 Update timing After the measurement mode is changed devices are updated by the next END instruction When the HCMOV instruction is executed devices are updated immediately mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt 0N e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e When the measurement mode is changed by the HCMOV instruction 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 79 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function Ring counter values can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5021 SD5020 SD5041 SD5040 SD5061 SD5060 SD5081 SD5080 Update timing Devices are updated by the END instruction When the HCMOV instruction is executed devices are updated immediately mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt 0N e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e When 0 is written by the HCMOV instruction ing edge ring counter value The ring counter value when the falling edge is detected is stored Ring counter values can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5023 SD5022 SD5043 SD5042 SD5063 SD5062 SD5083 SD5082 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page
182. cessing Setting File Setting Memory Device Setting RAS Setting Program Setting Title Setting Comment Setting RUN Contact Setting Remote Reset Setting Clock Related Setting Fixed Scan Interval Setting Fixed Scan Execution Mode Setting Interrupt Priority Setting from Module Device Label Access Service Processing Setting Initial Value Setting Device Label Memory Area Setting Index Register Setting Pointer Setting Scan Time Monitoring Time WDT Setting Constant Scan Setting Error Detections Setting CPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detected LED Display Setting Program Setting FB FUN File Setting Title Comment RUN Contact Operation Remote Reset Time Zone Comment Interrupt Setting from Internal Timer Fixed Scan Execution Mode Multiple Interrupt Interrupt Priority Index Register Save Restoration Specifying Method Setting of Device Initial Value Use Or Not Target Memory Global Device Initial Value File Name Option Battery Setting Device Label Memory Area Capacity Setting Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting Points Setting Total Points Initial Scan After 2nd Scan Constant Scan Battery Error Module Verify Error Instruction Execution Error Memory Card Error Module Verify Error System Configuration Error ERROR LED BATTERY LED Program Setting FB FUN File Setting APPENDIX Appendix 4 Parameter List 291 Module parameters
183. cials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 137 Special relay list E Page 148 Special registers list Rotational speed measurement mode start stop The rotational speed measurement mode cannot measure by setting the parameter alone The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop measurement For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Rotational speed Rotational speed is stored in the special register for each channel For details concerning specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 148 Special registers list 4 30 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Precautions Count direction switch during measurement The rotational speed measurement mode calculates rotational speed based on current value difference of high speed counters in the measuring unit time You should therefore note that the input number of pulses may differ from the measurement value when count direction of a high speed counter is switched within the same measuring unit time Operation when counting in the minus direction Rotational speed can also be measured when pulses are input in the direction whereby current value of high speed counter is reduced Operation at overflow of high speed counter current value Rotational soeed measurement can continue even when current value of high speed counter overflows during measurement
184. cifications 0644455444405 60 4e a oh eew eos bed eG eb eeee ew new bade ada Bx 201 Analog output specifications resol oe usher ae ee eee ee eed ae he oo oe eee eee a See eee 201 List of analog input functiONS eee eee eens 202 List of analog output functions iii bone ek ee Hoe he ES Cee eee deena eee ee ae Coated d 202 PART 3 DEVICES LABELS CHAPTER 21 DEVICES 204 Zit LIS ol Devices 64404205255 chs co et dere donee et booth ios daa ae eee 204 Pie USEFDOVICOS ordre AAA EA aaa ae da 205 111 AA ea a eae eee eaten eee ee eee se bone An ee pee ace 205 OUNOUC sepais ee Cerda ea be o Ree ROR bene ese eee eo cada db 205 IMemal Relay Whee 4a tents sonara oe ee cria Soe S Ae Be sd Ge A BAe ads 206 Eesti i 23 decease e eee oye cre bos ere Gegh sees sere segs sees fete sot eeseserued eee 206 A A 206 e OLF AU Pr eee oan e esse eradte ses ERE ee 206 Link special relay SB 2 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eee eee eee teen nee eens 208 Step relay S ices 26s eae ewe etde enw od ee eR eee wo oe Pewee eRe Se hee Se eee ee ww we 208 Men WON 2220022 hace pe eet oe pee es cae RRR on bee Eee hohe ee oa ded 209 COUN A A ed aes o a hee Sees Se ew oe hee eee eee eee 212 Data regisler D potasio dea a ee eae en ee Reed ie 215 PIA Aito iS WY hy cet ee owen os 88s coat oe eer eee tee ee eee ee hed oe ee eee eed eens ee 215 Link special register SW 215 21 3 System DEVICES y deis a Gu Cee eee bee ee oes aes ee ee ee a hs eee 215
185. ck change When an online change of ladder block if the power is turned OFF or a reset is made the process does not end normally Such operation is made execute rewriting to the PLC When deleting OUT instruction which is on When deleting an OUT instruction coil which is not necessary for control be sure to check that the OUT instruction is off before deleting it If the OUT instruction is deleted without turning it off in advance the output will be retained Program file not registered in program setting A program file which is not registered in parameter setting cannot be written Initializing the last execution if the ladder at online ladder block change has an FB call e If a subroutine type FB is called in a FB definition the execution information of the previous time in the FB definition of the subroutine type FB is not initialized e If a macro type FB is called in the FB definition of a subroutine type the execution information of the previous time in the part equivalent to the macro type FB is not initialized either 7 ONLINE CHANGE 7 1 Online Ladder Block Change Instructions not compatible with online ladder block change Do not execute online change to ladder block including the following instruction DSZR instruction DVIT instruction TBL instruction DRVTBL instruction PLSV instruction DRVI instruction DRVA instruction DRVMUL instruction PLSY instruction PWM instruction SPD instruction HIOEN instruction UDCNTF L
186. cluding annunciator ON OFF No error R ON Error SM1 Latest self diagnostics error not including annunciator OFF No self diagnosis errors R On ON Self diagnosis error SM50 Error reset OFF gt ON Error reset request R W ON OFF Error reset completion OFF Normal ON Battery low OFF Normal ON Battery low OFF No AC DC down detection ON AC DC down is detected OFF Normal ON Operation error OFF Normal ON Error OFF Not detected ON Detected OFF Not used ON In use OFF Not used ON In use A SM51 Battery low latch SM52 Battery low A SM53 AC DC DOWN A SM56 Instruction execution fault A SM61 I O module verify error SM62 Annunciator A A SM80 Detailed information 1 Flag in use A SM112 Detailed information 2 Flag in use A System information The special relays for system information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SM203 STOP contact OFF Other than STOP state ON STOP state OFF Other than PAUSE state ON PAUSE state OFF gt 0N Set Request R W ON OFF Set completed OFF No error ON Error OFF Ignored R W ON Read request A SM204 PAUSE contact A SM210 Clock data set request SM211 Clock data set error A SM213 Clock data read request System clock The special relay about system clock is shown below R Read only R W Read Write Always ON 224 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List SM401 Always OFF R ON OFFA
187. command request again when Ethernet connection 1 is in process the 2nd request is not executed in this scan and will be carried over to the next scan Setting method The device label access service processing can be configured as follows Tj Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Service Processing Setting gt Device Label Access Service Processing Setting Window Item Setting E Bevice Label Access Service Processing Seg ccoo E Specitying Method Mo Setting Counts 1 Times Displayed items Specifying Method Set the method of device label access service processing e Set Processing Counts No Setting e No Setting Counts Set the number of executions of device label access service 1 to 10 Time 1 time Unit processing Precautions If Set Processing Counts is selected and many service process frequencies are set when multiple requests are received at the same time scan time may be prolonged to a large extent so please exercise caution 1 08 16 DEVICE LABEL ACCESS SERVICE PROCESSING SETTING 1 7 RAS FUNCTIONS 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function Checks if a problem exists with the CPU module Self diagnostics timing If an error occurs when the CPU module is powered on or while it is in the RUN STOP state the CPU module detects and displays it and stops operation However depending on the error occurrence status or the instruction to execute the CPU module may not be able t
188. converted to units of 1 us and is stored in D11 and D10 Interrupt Return 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 83 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function 19 4 Pulse Catch Function This section explains the pulse catch function Outline of pulse catch function The CPU module has a built in pulse catch function which enables pulse signals that are incompletely sampled in regular input processing to be caught Inputs XO to X17 on the CPU module can be used on up to eight channels To use the pulse catch function pulse catch setting and the input response time must be set with parameters An FX3 compatible pulse catch function is also mounted on the CPU module For details of functions refer to L Page 188 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function Poin tr The pulse catch function and FX3 compatible pulse catch function can be used simultaneously Specifications of pulse catch function The specifications of the pulse catch function are explained below Performance specifications Pulse catches can be used on inputs XO to X17 input response time Input response times are shown below FX5U 32MO FX5UC 32MO FX5U 64MO FX5U 80MO Input response time XO to X5 XO to X7 5 us X6 to X17 X10 to X17 100 us MDetectable pulse width Pulse widths that satisfy the following condition can be detected Pulse input ON width gt input response time Poin tr Pulses cannot be detected normally if the above condition is not satisfied Set the input res
189. counter pulse density measurement mode The pulse density measurement mode for high speed counters is explained below When in pulse density measurement mode pulse is counted from count input of the high speed counter and the number of pulses for a specified amount of time is automatically counted Set operation mode to pulse density measurement mode by high speed counter parameter setting Sets detailed settings for channel used O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed counter gt Detail Setting gt Basic Settings Window ltem CHI GH2 Use Do Not Use Counter bet whether use counter or not Use Not Use Enable Disable Operation Mode set operation mode TEE TE Pulse Density Assumption Mode eee B IS ESE a Le Pulse Input Mode l Phase 1 Input SAW Up Down Switch M Phase 1 Input 57 Up Down Switch E Preset Input bet present Preset Input Enable Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Preset Value Ul i hput Comparison Enable Disable Disable Disable Control Switch Rising Rising Enable Input Set enable input Enable Input Enables Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Ring Length Setting set ring length setting Ring Length Enable Disable Disable Disable Ring Length Measurement Unt Time Set measure ment unit time Measurement Unit Time 1000 E Pulse No of per Rotation
190. counter ring length setting CH1 Valid Invalid Parameter R W High speed counter ring length setting CH2 setting values High speed counter ring length setting CH3 High speed counter ring length setting CH4 R W A list of special relays for high speed counter shared by all channels is provided below R W Read or Write R Read only SM4980 SM4982 SM5000 SM5001 High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction Operating Stopped OFF R operation High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction error occurrence Multi point output high speed comparison table operation Operating Stopped Multi point output high speed comparison table completion Complete Not complete CR 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 139 Special relay details Details concerning special relays used for high speed counters are explained below ter operating Device for monitoring operation status of each channel of the high speed counter ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4500 SM4507 SM4501 SM4502 SM4503 SM4504 SM4505 SM4506 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows High speed counter operating High speed counter stopped These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device upd
191. ction is set to OFF Program example X010 CO is reset while X010 turns ON Timing chart The current value does not change even if pulses are input because the CO reset instruction is valid Current value of CO RST CO CO remains reset ss CO is set to ON ES CO is set to OFF because the contact turns ON because the contact turns OFF e When the counter is set as a latch device the current value of a counter output contact operation and the reset image are latched e If the ZRST instruction is used the RST image of a counter is reset 21 DEVICES 214 21 2 User Devices Data register D Device capable of storing numerical data Link register W Device intended to be used as a CPU side device when refreshing word data between CPU module and network module Refreshing network module that uses link register W Sends receives data mutually between link registers LW in network module and link register W in the CPU module Set refresh range by parameters of the network module Link registers not used for refresh can be used for other purposes Link special register SW Word data such as communication and error detection status information of network modules is output to link special relays within the network Link special registers SW are devices intended to be used as a refresh destination for link special registers within the network Link special registers not used for refresh can be used for
192. ctive when scan process is given precedence 16 DEVICE LABEL ACCESS SERVICE PROCESSING SETTING 107 1 Shows the maximum a scan time is extended by the service process 2 Shows the extent of fluctuation of scan time or the degree of scattering by the service process 3 Shows the time between receiving a service process request from the peripheral equipment to returning a response 4 Shows the extent of fluctuation of time until returning the response or the degree of scattering due to the contents of service process request from the peripheral equipment 5 Shows if device splitting will occur MDevice label access service processing setting No Setting Since all service processes can be executed normally for every scan time steady communication is possible even on a system that uses multiple peripheral equipment Poin tr Wait for request process will not be executed when there is no request data MDevice label access service processing setting Set Processing Counts Because a frequency of service process executed in 1 scan time can be set the scan time is stabilized even on a system that uses multiple peripheral equipment Operation during STOP PAUSE Regardless of the service process settings during STOP PAUSE execute all requests in scan 1 However a request from the identical port will be processed only 1 time in 1 scan For example after serial communication CH1 process even if serial communication CH1 receives a new
193. d Capacity for latch type labels Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area Poin tr High speed area Area which can be accessed at high speed Latch is always held by nonvolatile memory Standard area Area which can be held when option battery is used In addition about a latched type label when a latch area is set as a standard latch area latch type label is held by nonvolatile memory 94 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 12 3 Device Label Memory Area Setting 12 4 Device Setting The number of points of each user device can be changed XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Memory Device Setting gt Device Label Memory Area Setting gt Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting gt Device high speed Setting Device standard Setting Window Device high speed Setting details window Device Item Symbol E TT i P TE lt B Taal fon E er lt o _ ERP Internal Relay hl 7680 Dto 7674 petting No Setting Link Relay E 256 IS No Setting Mo Setting Special Link Rela SB 256 ta FF nnunciatar F 125 Soe Mo Setting Mo Setting Step Relay E 4096 Oto 4095 setting Timer T 512 II Mo Setting No Setting Retentive Timer ST 16 IS setting No Setting Counter E 256 to 255 Setting Mo Setting Lone Counter LG fd Oto hs setting Mo Settine Data Reglster O 2000 Atoa 7999 petting Mo Setting Latch Relay L 7680 Oto 7679 Total Device 11 1 Word GK Word Total Word Device 10 2K W
194. d counter for which the multi point output high speed comparison table is operating is stopped when SM8034 is turned ON and multi point output comparison processing is also stopped High speed counters and multi point output high speed comparison tables cannot be operated by turning OFF SM8034 and need to be restarted by the HIOEN instruction The normal high speed counter function continues to perform counting without being influenced by SM8034 164 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function FX3 compatible high speed counter function is explained below FX3 compatible high speed counter function overview The FX3 compatible high speed counter can assign the input terminals compatible with FX3 and use the device equivalent to C235 to C255 of FX3 as LC35 to LC55 high speed counter If the FX3 compatible high speed counter is used it is necessary to use the parameter to set the FX3 compatible high speed counter to be valid This section describes the device LC35 to LC55 of the FX3 compatible high speed counter as an LC device Point The FX3 compatible high speed counter is convenient if it is used when a replacement is made from FX3 or for a similar occasion If a high speed counter is newly used use the high speed counter function of FX5 L Page 114 High speed Counter Function How to start stop the high speed counter using the LC device The method of starting sto
195. d counter maximum value R W SD4503 High speed counter maximum value High order CH1 CH1 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 247 No SD4504 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH 1 Descinon O This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W CH1 SD4505 High speed counter minimum value High order CH 1 SD4506 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH 1 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH1 R W SD4507 High speed counter pulse density High order CH 1 SD4508 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH1 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH1 R W SD4509 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH 1 SD4510 High speed counter preset control switch CH 1 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH1 SD4512 High speed counter preset value Low order CH 1 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH1 R W D4513 High speed counter preset value High order CH1 D4514 High speed counter ring length Low order CH1 This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH1 R W SD4515 High speed counter ring length High order CH1 SD4516 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W CH1 time CH1 SD4517 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH1 SD4518
196. d to obtain three constants in the PID control proportional gain KP integral time Tl and differential time TD In this method by giving stepped output from 0 to 100 to the control system three constants in the PID control are obtained from the operation characteristics maximum ramp R and dead time L and the input value variation The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75 or from 0 to 50 How to obtain three constants in PID control Reference Operation characteristics and three constants Only dis control P e Output value wade operation RL MV PI control PI operation 0 9 Output value 33L RL mv 100 PID control PID operation 20L 50L Ta Output value RL MV x100 WOperation characteristics 100 Output value MV Output value MV 0 Time Input value variation Maximum ramp R Time s Dead time L 1 s Parameters set in step response method The parameters specified in the step response method are shown below Operation setting ACT s3 3 bO operation direction Proportional gain KP s3 3 Integral time TI s3 4 Differential time TD s3 6 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 7 Auto Tuning 71 72 Auto tuning procedure 1 Transferring the output value for auto tuning to the output value d Set the output value for auto tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0 5 to 1 for the output equipment 2 Setting the parameter s3 tar
197. d when the interrupt factor with the same interrupt priority is generated 22 21 DEVICES 0 21 9 Interrupt Pointer 1 21 10 Constant This section explains constants Decimal constant K Device that specifies decimal data for the program Specified by KO Example K1234 The specification range is determined by type of argument data of instruction using a decimal constant Argument data type of instruction Specification range of decimal constants 32 bits K 2147483648 to K2147483647 Hexadecimal constant H Device that specifies hexadecimal data for the program Specified by HO Example H1234 When specifying BCD data specify each digit of hexadecimal number in O to 9 The specification range is determined by type of argument data of instruction using a hexadecimal constant If data size is 16 bits HO to HFFFF if 32 bits HO to HFFFFFFFF Real constant E Device that specifies real numbers for the program Specified by EO Example E1 234 Setting range of real numbers The setting range of real numbers is explained below 21 lt Device lt 212 0 21WP lt Device lt 2128 E 3 40282347 38 to E 1 17549435 38 0 E1 17549435 38 to E3 40282347 38 Operation during calculation Operation at overflow and underflow Operation is as follows if overflow or underflow occurs during calculation e Overflow Error occurs e Underflow Becomes 0 without error occurring Operation when special value is input If c
198. data verification result receive packet No 9 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 10 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 11 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 12 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 13 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 14 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 15 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 16 Wome Bespin LM Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 2 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 2 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 3 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the
199. details 3D4111 Erorcode 2 details e Module position Low order 8 bit OH Built in high speed I O SD4112 Error code 3 details 41H Built in serial communication SD4113 Error code 4 details 42H Built in analog SD4114 Error code 5 details 60H Expansion board 71 to 76H Expansion adapter SOAS ATOT COCE N dealg e Function No Higher order 8 bit SD4116 Error code 7 details 0 System Sequence operation SD4117 Error code 8 details hi PUNEN aa 2 Built in D A SD4118 Error code 9 details 10 Built in positioning PWM SD4119 Error code 10 details 20 Built in high speed counter Pulse width measurement SD4120 Error code 11 details SD4121 Error code 12 details SD4122 Error code 13 details SD4123 Error code 14 details 246 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD4124 Error code 15 details SD4125 Error code 16 details Descinon o This register stores the self diagnosis error code details e Module position Low order 8 bit OH Built in high speed I O 41H Built in serial communication 42H Built in analog 60H Expansion board 71 to 76H Expansion adapter e Function No Higher order 8 bit 0 System Sequence operation 1 Built in A D 2 Built in D A 10 Built in positioning PWM 20 Built in high speed counter Pulse width measurement SD4150 Module 1 status information SD4151 Module 1 error information SD4152 Module 2 status information SD4153 Module 2 error information SD4154 Module 3 status information SD415
200. dy DSR flag ch2 OFF DSR not detected ON DSR detected SM8428 MODBUS retry ch2 OFF No retry ON Retry SM8429 RS2 Time out check flag ch2 MODBUS Timeout ch2 ON when timeout occurs R SM8438 Serial communication error 2 ch2 OFF No error R ON Error SM8492 IP address storage area write request If OFF to ON the IP address setting stored in SD8492 to SD8497 R W will be written in the IP address storage area SM8493 IP address storage area write completed e It turns on if the write to the IP address storage area is completed Moreover it turns on also at the time of the write in failure e Turns OFF when IP address storage area write request SM8492 turns from ON to OFF SM8494 IP address storage area write error e Turns ON when writing to IP address storage area is failed e Turns ON if there is a problem in contents of IP address storage area when PLC power supply is turned from OFF to ON e Turns OFF when IP address storage area write request SM8492 turns from ON to OFF SM8495 IP address storage area clear request Contents of IP address storage area are cleared when this device R W turns from OFF to ON SM8496 IP address storage area clear completed e It turns on if the clear to the IP address storage area is completed Moreover it turns on also at the time of the clear in failure e Turns OFF when IP address storage area clear request SM8495 turns from ON to OFF SM8497 IP address storage area clear
201. e High speed counter dedicated instructions The high speed counter starts and stops counting using the HIOEN instruction for the high speed counter LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 114 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Other high speed counter instructions In addition to the dedicated instructions there are instructions such as DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ hereafter referred to as high speed comparison instruction for high speed counters For details refer to the following LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks High speed counter function execution procedure The high speed counter function execution procedure is as follows 1 Check the specifications of the high speed counter Check specifications such as maximum frequency and type of high speed counter Page 115 High speed counter specifications 2 Connect the CPU module to the external device For details on wiring to external devices refer to the following manual L IMELSEC Q F FX5U User s Manual Hardware L IMELSEC Q F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware 3 Setthe parameters Set parameters such as channel CH of the high speed counter Page 123 High speed counter parameters 4 Create the program Create program for using the high speed counter 5 Run the program High speed counter specificati
202. e 2147483648 to 2147483647 These are signed 32 bit ring counters Ring length setting is however in the range of 0 to 2147483647 1 1 8 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Assignment for high speed counters Input assignment for high speed counters Assignment for input devices of high speed counters is set by parameters Assignment is determined according to functions set for each channels by parameter When using internal clock assignment is same as 1 phase 1 count S W and phase A is not used Input assignment of high speed counters is as follows 19 fmm at tt tt ee messi A 18 fo ol ee Y E d tehesozeont A BO Ple sz 8 72 Li Pe OLLA H2 thsss teount sa fa Je fe tease tout la fe ppt op ajo pp e le TC A Ll Pel 7 CA OE O IA O O A O IA A 0 a pas poe ION OA 300 CO OSO AA ae zwezo a es O E E 0 E Ha tohase touts a Ple tphase t coumt AA tt A ea po Yo po Pp fe tehase2count ja feo de e HE MIO AIDA A IN OA A O RO A A A A A PA EG E CHS phase tout ja je le these t count A TE these 2count TTT Tt 2ehasezcount TTT A je fro fe GHE phase counte la e je phase teou S T fa fe feo je A A fa fe fe fe 2 phase 2 count En OS O O O A A CI E EEE a
203. e pulse is counted from count input of the high speed counter and the rotational speed for a specified amount of time is automatically calculated Set operation mode to rotational speed measurement mode by high speed counter parameter setting Sets detailed settings for channel used TZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt High Speed Counter gt Detail Setting gt Basic Setting Window ltem CH He E Use Do Not Use Counter Set whether use counter or not Use Not Use Enable Disable Operation Mode set operation mode Operatic Mode Rolaton Speed Measurement Mode Normal Made E Pulse Input Mode Set pulse input mode Pulse Input Mode 1 Phase 1 Input 5AM Up Down Switch 1Phase 1 Input SAA Opr Down Switch E Preset Input oet present Preset Input Enable Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Preset Value i ll Input Comparison Enabler Disable Disable Disable Control Switch Rising Rising E Enable Input set enable input Enable Input Enabler Disable Disable Disable Input logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Ring Length Setting Set ring length setting Ring Length Enable Disable Disable Disable Ring Length E Measurement Unt Time pet measurement unt time Measurement Unit Time 1000 Pulse Hoof per Rotation Set the pulse No of per rotation Pulse Mo of per Rotation 1000 1000 Displayed items Use Not Use Set whethe
204. e Width Measurement Function SD5087 SD5086 CH4 pulse width maximum value The maximum value of the pulse width is stored 00000000H R W SD5089 SD5088 CH4 pulse width minimum value The minimum value of the pulse width is stored FFFFFFFFH SD5091 SD5090 CH4 period latest value The latest value of the period is stored 00000000H SD5093 SD5092 CH4 period maximum value The maximum value of the period is stored 00000000H R W R W R W SD5095 SD5094 CH4 period minimum value The minimum value of the period is stored FFFFFFFFH R W Details of special relays special registers Details of special relays special registers used in pulse width measurement are explained below dth measurement status flag MCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM5020 SM5021 SM5022 SM5023 Update timing This device turns ON when the HIOEN instruction is executed It turns OFF at the END instruction when the measurement mode is the 1 time measurement mode EClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt ON e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e RUN gt STOP PAUSE e When measurement is stopped by the HIOEN instruction D JS IN LAS CUG ON WCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM5036 SM5037 SM5038 SM5039 Update timing Devices are updated by the END instruction mClear timing Th
205. e catch function e The FX3 compatible pulse catch function operates only when Interrupt Rising or Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch is set with parameters e To capture input again the special relay that is set must be reset by the program Accordingly new input cannot be captured until the special relay that is set is reset e The special relays for FX3 compatible pulse catch are cleared at STOP gt RUN and a reset e The FX3 compatible pulse catch function is executed regardless of the operations of the special relays for disabling interrupts 1 90 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 5 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function 19 6 General purpose Input Functions The FX5 PLC general purpose inputs are explained below Outline of general purpose input functions For general purpose inputs of the FX5 PLC the input response time can be set by parameters Specifications of general purpose inputs Pe rme nce specifications Input response times can be set to general purpose inputs Winput response time setting Input response times that can be set are shown below The default value is 10 ms XO to X377 10 us 50 us 0 1 ms 0 4 ms 0 6 ms 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 20 ms 70 ms The value obtained by adding on the value of the hardware filter is the actual input response time HHardware filter value The delay times of the hardware filter on the CPU module is shown below The hardware filter value of I O modules is 50
206. e ee ee 58 9 6 Details of Parameters 0 ce es 59 Sample S Gece opi bocce s Gheeeaneee den bien ati ken nes sesos e ace 59 Operation setting SI A cc 59 Input filter constant SI AZ eee eee eee eens 61 Proportional gain S3 S ks aaa sekaa ne bodes ewe vende da a bodes dus 62 Mtega MIEN SO id 42504 ot bee ks OER eee Aa eek ee ee aoe ood Be ee ee eee 63 Differential Galn s3 E seerere sees eu es coos beet oe sees Bede sabe ease 64 Differential time SIA ee eee nent eee eee eens 65 Alarm OUIDUL S3 F24 5 casio rra neta 650R S045 405555549 RARA 67 9 7 Auto NNG yaaa Recess tine A AAA dara 68 Limit Cycle Method 2 1 puras ran a deta e a a a rd re a la aaa ea 68 SED Response Metho ersa nsadi deters ra erea Ae rara dd EEE 71 9 8 Examples of PrograM o o occc es 73 System configuration example 0 0 ee eee eee ee een e teen neeee 73 Program Example ls howe ae ace eres ee SO eee es oben nea 74 Program Example 2a sues ce anna sito ros cores da ooo A 76 Program example 324242 44 04 cen ios a add ales a aaa ica o ii 78 Program example A o eG eae ae eee ee apes PAE ees eames es 80 Program example O seserinis riita biedni Soe ds ea a Sed 48 rs eh ae el aes es cee wees 82 CONTENTS CHAPTER 10 CONSTANT SCAN 84 10 1 ConstanEscal SettndS e cescimra rt IAEA 84 CHAPTER 11 REMOTE OPERATION 86 TED Remote RUNISTOP cepa da cae O A a O renta poa dia de 86 Applications of remote RUN STOP 1 0 ee eee ee ee eee n
207. e high speed counters When special relays and special registers are specified for s and d of instructions other than the HCMOV instruction the operation is the same as one compatible with the MOV instruction for individual channels O High speed transfer capable special relay is immediately updated A Normal transfer capable special relay is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only SM4500 to High speed counter operating x x SM4507 SM4516 to High speed counter pulse density rotational speed being measured A x x SM4523 SM4532 to High speed counter overflow A SM4539 SM4548 to High speed counter underflow A SM4555 SM4564 to High speed counter 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input count x x SM4571 direction monitor SM4580 to High speed counter 1 phase 1 input S W count direction switch A SM4587 SM4596 to High speed counter preset input logic A SM4603 SM4612 to High speed counter preset input comparison A A SM4619 SM4628 to High speed counter enable input logic A A SM4635 SM4644 to High speed counter ring length setting A A SM4651 red by all channels O High speed transfer capable special relay is immediately updated A Normal transfer capable special relay is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only SM4980 High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction x x operation SM4982 High speed comparison table high speed compare in
208. e maximum This timer counts when the OUT TO instruction the ANS instruction or the END instruction is executed To use a routine timer it is necessary to set the parameter Page 211 Routine timer setting 21 DEVICES 21 2 User Devices 209 Current value and measurement range of timer MW Timer The current value range is O to 32767 Timer processing method The timer s coil is turned ON OFF the current value is updated and the contact is turned ON OFF when timer s coil OUT TO instruction is executed The difference between a timer and a routine timer Described below is the difference between a timer and a routine timer Resolution 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms 100 ms The timing of counting count up When the OUT TO instruction or the ANS instruction is e When the OUT T instruction or the ANS instruction is executed executed e If the OUT T instruction or the ANS instruction is not executed the counting starts when the END instruction is executed The timing of time up the operation at When the OUT TC instruction or the ANS instruction is e When the OUT T instruction or the ANS instruction is the output contact executed executed e When the END instruction is executed Device Precautions when using timers Precautions when using timers are as follows Do not specify the same timer coil OUT TO instruction more than once per scan If you do the current value of the timer is updated when each respective timer coil is
209. e programs and interrupt programs can be created in one standby type program Scan execution type program Scan execution type program r Main routine Main routine program program P100 Subroutine i program Stand by type program n EA es P100 Subroutine pega program Io Interrupt program How to execute Execute standby type programs as follows e Create sub routine programs and interrupt programs in the standby type program which is called up by a pointer etc or when an interrupt is generated 28 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 4 Execution Type of Program 1 5 Program Type Programs that use pointers P or interrupt pointers I are explained below Subroutine program This is the program from pointer P up to the RET instruction Subroutine programs are executed only when they are called by the CALL instruction Pointer type labels also can be used instead of pointers P The applications of subroutine programs are as follows e By grouping programs that are executed multiple times in one scan into a single subroutine program the number of steps in the entire program can be reduced e A program that is executed only under certain conditions can be saved as a subroutine program which shortens the scan time proportionately Main routine program FEND H Y 10 Subroutine program 1 RET P8 y 11 RET Subroutine program 2 P1 yY 12 Subroutine progr
210. e the battery at high temperatures or expose to direct sunlight Do not expose to water bring near fire or touch liquid leakage or other contents directly Incorrect handling of the battery may cause excessive heat bursting ignition liquid leakage or deformation and lead to injury fire or failures and malfunction of facilities and other equipment PRECAUTIONS IN OPERATION CAUTION O Construct an interlock circuit in the program to ensure safe operation for the whole system when executing control for data change of the PLC in operation Read the manual thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls for program change parameter change forced output and operation status change to the PLC in operation Otherwise the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur by erroneous operations INTRODUCTION This manual contains text diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader in the correct installation safe use and operation of the FX5 Programmable Controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the module Always forward it to the end user Regarding use of this product e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power
211. e timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt 0N e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e When measurement is started by the HIOEN instruction When the HCMOV instruction is used the latest value can be read 4 78 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function This flag is a device for monitoring the measurement in progress measurement stopped status of pulse width measurement This flag turns ON at the end of the 1st period measurement During measurement in the always measurement mode it stays Falling edge flag This flag turns ON at the end of the 1st pulse width measurement During measurement in the always measurement mode it stays ON mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows H2 SM5055 SM5053 SM5054 SM5052 Update timing Devices are updated by the END instruction mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power OFF gt 0N e Reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e When measurement is started by the HIOEN instruction When the HCMOV instruction is used the latest value can be read Measurement mode The measurement mode can be checked The measurement mode can also be changed during operation by turning special relays ON OFF OFF Always measurement mode ON 1 time measurement mode The measurement mode can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction mCorresponding devices The devi
212. e verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Ele
213. ears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative System At power on configuration at RESET information System At power on configuration at RESET information System At power on configuration at RESET information At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET at RESET At power on
214. easurement Function 175 Pulse width measurement parameters This section explains the parameters for pulse width measurement Set the parameters for pulse width measurement in GX Works3 Outline of parameters Parameters for pulse width measurement are input allocation logical switch neasurement modes and input response time Parameter setting The following explains how to set the parameters for pulse width measurement For input response time refer to K Page 191 General purpose Input Functions XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt Pulse Width Measurement gt Detail Setting Window Item Use Pulse Width Measurement EOT nee pulse width measurement or not Use Not Use Disable Disable Disable Input Signal Set input z gnal Disable Input Signal kal kall kal 0 Logical Switch Set logical switch Logical Switch Positive Logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Positive Logic Measurement Mode Set measurement mode Measurement Mode Always Measurement Mode Always Measurement Mode Always Measurement Mode Always Measurement Mode Displayed items Use Pulse Width Set whether to use pulse width measurement or not e Disable Disable Measurement Enable Input Signal Set input signal XO to X7 Logical Switch Set logical switch e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Measurement Mode Set measurement mode e Always
215. eceive packet No 14 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 15 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 16 CI LM Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 6 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 6 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 7 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No
216. ection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 12 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 13 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 14 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 15 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 16 Wome Besepton LM Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 4 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 4 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 5 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results
217. ed Counter Function High speed counter function is explained below High speed counter function overview The high speed counter is a function that counts the number of high speed pulse inputs that cannot be counted by a conventional counter using the general purpose input terminal of the CPU module The high speed counter assigns input and function settings by parameters and operates using the HIOEN instruction Poin tr Parameter setting and the HIOEN instruction are always required to use the high speed counter High speed counter parameter setting High speed counter channels input allocation function and high speed counter comparison table etc are set by parameters Page 123 High speed counter parameters High speed counter operation mode The three high speed counter operation modes are as follows Operation mode is set by parameter lt Page 123 High speed counter parameters Normal mode Select normal mode if you want to use as an ordinary high speed counter Page 124 High speed counter normal mode MWPulse density measurement mode Select pulse density measurement mode if you want to count the number of pulses for a specified amount of time gt Page 126 High speed counter pulse density measurement mode Rotational speed measurement mode Select rotational speed measurement mode if you want to measure speed for a specified amount of time lt Page 129 High speed counter rotational speed measurement mod
218. ed OP e podria oe dd wera ak oe 47 6 2 Setting Time ZONE cansa a da ee a aes badd ow ae ale we ee OA 48 6 3 ie sai 64 cece t ee tathet ren A 49 Special relay used for system CIOCkK 0 0 cee eee eee eee 49 Special register used for system clock 1 0 ee eee eee eee 49 CHAPTER 7 ONLINE CHANGE 50 7 1 Online Ladder Block Change 0 cece eee eee ee nrnna 50 Editable COMPAS sade sGaeececuve bend eee sues peewee Bee na oeanad bane aus eked 50 Range changeable in a single SESSION 1 0 eee eee ees 50 Online ladder block change during the boot operation 0 0 ee ee eee 50 PICO UONE 242 cease y aegis yess ae hee eens dese See ee ee eee es See a ee eee see be eae e552 E A 50 CHAPTER 8 INTERRUPT FUNCTION 53 8 1 Multiple Interr pt Function 60 000 ne eats sce ead ea eed eae teed ira aa wae aries 53 Ei O A ee 53 CHAPTER 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 95 9 1 Outline Of FUNCHON occ ri a AAA AA AA deans A 55 9 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction 0 0 ee ee 55 Basic operation expression for PID control 0 0 anaana aaa aaaea 55 9 3 How to Use PID Instruction 0 0 cc ees 56 9 4 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning 2 000 cece es 57 When auto tuning is not executed parameter setting o oo eee ees 57 When auto tuning is executed 1 0 0 eee eee nent n eee e eens 57 9 5 P Me astas ob tered ee nw EE Ree ee Se Eee ee bee ee eee eres bee e
219. ee space Or the e Execute again after increasing the free space of the drive number of files in the directory of the specified drive memory memory has exceeded the maximum e Delete files in the drive memory and execute the function again 41D8H File related error e The specified file is being accessed e Execute again after a while 41DFH File related error e The specified drive memory is write protected e Execute again after canceling the write protect of the specified drive memory 41EBH File related error e The file name path is too long e Execute again after shortening the file name path 41FEH File related error e The SD memory card has not been inserted e Insert the SD memory card e The SD memory card is disabled e Remove the SD memory card and insert it again e The SD memory card is disabled by SM606 SD memory e Cancel the SD memory card forced disable instruction card forced disable instruction 4401H Security function e Read password authentication has failed when required e Set the correct read password and perform password error e The file password 32 format is incorrect authentication e Access the file with the correct method 4402H Security function e Write password authentication has failed when required e Set the correct write password and perform password error e The file password 32 format is incorrect authentication e Access the file with the correct method 4403H Security function Both passwords for read
220. eed counter preset value High order CH2 SD4544 High speed counter ring length Low order CH2 SD4545 High speed counter ring length High order CH2 This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH2 R W SD4546 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W CH2 time CH2 SD4547 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH2 SD4548 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W order CH2 rotation CH2 SD4549 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH2 SD4560 High speed counter current value Low order CH3 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH3 R W SD4561 High speed counter current value High order CH3 SD4562 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH3 This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W SD4563 High speed counter maximum value High order CH3 CH3 SD4564 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH3 This register stores the high speed counter minimum value R W SD4565 High speed counter minimum value High order CH3 C49 SD4566 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH3 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH3 R W SD4567 High speed counter pulse density High order CH3 SD4568 High speed counter rotation
221. eeded b1 b2 0 Output variation incremental is not exceeded 1 Output variation incremental is exceeded b3 0 Output variation decremental is not exceeded 1 Output variation decremental is exceeded s3 25 PV value threshold Set it according to measured value PV The setting below is required when the limit cycle method hysteresis width SHPV fluctuation is used when the operation setting ACT b6 is set to s3 26 Output value upper limit ULV Set maximum value ULV of output value MV ON s3 27 Output value lower limit LLV Set minimum value LLV of output value MV s3 28 Wait setting from end of tuning 50 to 32717 cycle to start of PID control KW 4 s3 20 to 24 become used only if b1 b2 or b5 are set to 1 to determine the action ACT s3 of 1 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 5 Parameter 9 6 Details of Parameters This chapter describes the details of parameters Sampling time s3 Set the cycle time ms for the PID operation Setting range 1 to 32767 ms e In PID control and auto tuning Limit cycle method Set the sampling time longer than the operation cycle of the PLC e In auto tuning Step response method Set the sampling time to 1000 ms 1 second or more Maximum error The maximum error of the sampling time TS is from one operation cycle 1 ms to one operation cycle e When the sampling time TS is a small value Fluctuation
222. egister stores the connection 6 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10326 Connection 7 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 7 continuous unlock failure R number of times SD10327 Connection 8 continuous unlock failure number of times This register stores the connection 8 continuous unlock failure number of times SD10338 MELSOFT communication port TCP IP continuous This register stores the MELSOFT communication port TCP IP unlock failure number of times continuous unlock failure number of times SD10340 MELSOFT direct connection continuous unlock failure This register stores the MELSOFT direct connection continuous number of times unlock failure number of times SD10680 Open completion signal 0 Connection No 1 R et Connection No 2 b2 Connection No 3 b3 Connection No 4 b4 Connection No 5 b5 Connection No 6 b6 Connection No 7 b7 Connection No 8 0 Close Open not completed 1 Open completed SD10681 Open request signal b0 Connection No 1 b1 Connection No 2 b2 Connection No 3 b3 Connection No 4 b4 Connection No 5 b5 Connection No 6 b6 Connection No 7 b7 Connection No 8 0 No open request 1 Open request exists SD10682 Socket communications receive status signal b0 Connection No 1 b1 Connection No 2 b2 Connection No 3 b3 Connection No 4 b4 Connection No 5 b5 Connection No 6 b6 Connection No 7 b7 Connection No 8 0 No data received 1 Data receivi
223. eive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 271 272 No SD10878 Connection No 7 protocol execution count SD10879 Connection No 7 protocol cancellation specification SD10880 Connection No 8 protocol execution status SD10882 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 1 SD10883 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 2 SD10884 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 3 SD10885 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 4 SD10886 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 5 SD10887 Connection No 8 received data verification result receive packet No 6 SD10888 Connection No 8 received data verific
224. elays and special registers while changing these values in the program For details concerning special relays and specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 137 Special relay list E Page 148 Special registers list Pulse density measurement mode start stop The pulse density measurement mode cannot measure by setting the parameter alone The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop measurement For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Pulse density Pulse density is stored in the special register for each channel For details concerning specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 148 Special registers list 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 12 19 1 High speed Counter Function 7 Precautions Count direction switch during measurement The pulse density measurement mode calculates pulse density based on difference in measuring unit time of the current value of high speed counters You should therefore note that the input number of pulses may differ from the measurement value when count direction of a high speed counter is switched within the same measuring unit time Ex When pulse density is measured 14 pulses are input within measuring unit time but the current value of the high speed counter remains 0 as shown in the following figure As a result pulse density is 0 for this measuring unit time Measuremen
225. en auto tuning is executed The proportional gain s3 3 integral time s3 4 and differential time s3 6 are important constants for executing the auto tuning function described later and for optimizing the PID control These constants can be set automatically For a detailed description of auto tuning refer to L Page 68 Auto Tuning 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 7 9 4 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning 9 58 9 5 Parameter Set item Description Setting range Remarks s3 Sampling time TS 1 to 32767 ms It cannot be shorter than operation cycle of the PLC s3 1 Operation setting ACT 0 Forward operation Operation direction 1 Backward operation 0 Input variation alarm is invalid 1 Input variation alarm is valid 0 Output variation alarm is invalid Do not set b2 and b5 to ON at the same time 1 Output variation alarm is valid ll Not used ma 0 Auto tuning is not executed 1 Auto tuning is executed 0 Upper and lower limits of output value are not Do not set b2 and b5 to ON at the same time valid 1 Upper and lower limits of output value are valid 0 Step response method Select auto tuning mode 1 Limit cycle method b7 to b15 Not used s3 2 Input filter constant a 0 to 99 When 0 is set input filter is not provided s3 3 Proportional gain KP 1 to 32767 4 Integral time TI 0 to 32767 x100 ms When 0 is set it is handled as oo no integ
226. er List 5 System configuration information b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b7b6b5b4b3b2b1b0 SD81 With or without specification 5085 Nemokno Module position Built in high speed I O Built in serial communication Built in analog Expansion board Expansion adapter Function No System Sequence operation Built in A D Built in D A Built in positioning PWM Head X No Head Y No Module position Function No Intelligent module No Free Network No Station No 0H 41H 42H 60H 71H to 76H 0 4 10 Built in high speed counter Pulse width measurement 20 Built in serial communication 30 Either XY head No or intelligent module No is set 6 Number of times information b15 b2b1b0 SD81 with or without specification b0 mn Number of times L set value H Number of times L actual 3D85 Measurement value H 7 Time information b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 SD91 With or without specification SD92 Time set value ms S SD93 Time set value us SD94 Time actual measurement value ms SD95 Time actual measurement value us b15 bO b15 Number of times set value Number of times actual measurement value Time set value ms Time set value us Time actual measurement value ms Time actual measurement value us e Detailed information 2 information category code is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO Not used fixed to O I
227. er current value Low order CH4 CH4 SD5355 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor High order CH4 SD5500 Built in positioning current address user unit Low order This register stores the current address user unit of built in axis 1 positioning axis 1 SD5501 Built in positioning current address user unit High order axis 1 SD5502 Built in positioning current address pulse unit Low This register stores the current address pulse unit of built in order axis 1 positioning axis 1 SD5503 Built in positioning current address pulse unit High order axis 1 SD5504 Built in positioning current speed user unit Low order This register stores the current speed of built in positioning axis axis 1 1 SD5505 Built in positioning current speed user unit High order axis 1 SD5506 Built in positioning execution table number axis 1 This register stores the execution table number of built in R positioning axis 1 SD5510 Built in positioning error code axis 1 This register stores the error code of built in positioning axis 1 R W SD5511 Built in positioning error table number axis 1 This register stores the error table number of built in positioning R W axis 1 SD5516 Built in positioning maximum speed Low order axis 1 This register stores the maximum speed of built in positioning R W axis 1 SD5517 Built in positioning maximum speed High order axis 1 SD5
228. erification result receive packet No 2 SD10804 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 3 SD10805 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 4 SD10806 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 5 SD10807 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 6 SD10808 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 7 SD10809 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 8 SD10810 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 9 SD10811 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 10 SD10812 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 11 SD10813 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 12 SD10814 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 13 SD10815 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 14 SD10816 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 15 SD10817 Connection No 4 received data verification result receive packet No 16 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List CI Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 3 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 3 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation requ
229. eriod is stored Poin tr e When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from rising edge to rising edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from falling edge to falling edge e The maximum value of the period can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction Corresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5033 SD5032 SD5053 SD5052 SD5073 SD5072 SD5093 SD5092 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value Period minimum value The minimum value of the period is stored Poin tr e When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from rising edge to rising edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from falling edge to falling edge e The minimum value of the period can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 SD5035 SD5034 SD5055 SD5054 SD5075 SD5074 SD5095 SD5094 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value Cautions when using the pulse width measurement function e When the HCMOV instruction is used the latest ring counter value pulse width cycle maximum value and minimum value can be obtained e The measurement mode can be changed using the special re
230. error R W ON Underflow SM4550 High speed counter underflow CH3 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4551 High speed counter underflow CH4 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4552 High speed counter underflow CH5 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4553 High speed counter underflow CH6 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4554 High speed counter underflow CH7 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4555 High speed counter underflow CH8 OFF No error R W ON Underflow R SM4564 High speed counter count direction monitor CH1 1 OFF Up counting phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4565 High speed counter count direction monitor CH2 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4566 High speed counter count direction monitor CH3 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4567 High speed counter count direction monitor CH4 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4568 High speed counter count direction monitor CH5 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4569 High speed counter count direction monitor CH6 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4570 High speed counter count direction monitor CH7 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input ON Down counting SM4571 High speed counter count direction monitor CH8 1 OFF Up counting R phase 2 input 2
231. error e Turns ON when clear to IP address storage area is failed e Turns OFF when IP address storage area clear request SM8495 turns from ON to OFF SM8498 IP address change function enable flag Turns ON when IP address is changed by IP address change R function Serial communication The special relays for serial communication are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SM8500 Serial communication error ch1 OFF No error R ON Error SM8510 Serial communication error ch2 OFF No error R ON Error SM8520 Serial communication error ch3 OFF No error R ON Error SM8530 Serial communication error ch4 OFF No error R ON Error SM8560 Data transfer delayed ch1 This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send R SM8561 Data transfer flag ch1 When this device is set to ON the PLC starts to send R SM8562 Receive completion flag ch1 This device turns ON when receiving is completed R SM8563 Carrier detection flag ch1 This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD DCD signal R SM8564 Data set ready flag ch1 This device turns ON in synchronization with the DR DSR signal R SM8565 Time out check flag ch1 This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the R next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time out time setting device SM8570 Data transfer delayed ch2 This device remains ON while the PLC is waiting to send R SM8571 Data transfer flag ch2 When
232. erruption executed are not saved 0 Main routine program 10 interrupt program After the interruption being executed is completed the first interrupt program is executed e For 128 to 131 The interrupt cause is memorized and the interrupt program corresponding to the cause will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes If the same interrupt factor occurs multiple times it will be memorized once but operation at the second and later occurrences depends on setting of the fixed scan execution mode Page 23 Fixed scan execution mode When Execution Count Takes Priority is enabled the interrupt program corresponding to the memorized interrupt cause will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes When Precede Fixed Scan is enabled the second and later occurrences will not be memorized The second and following interruption causes which occur while an interruption 131 131 01316 is executed operate according to the setting of the fixed scan execution mode Main routine program When Precede Fixed Scan is set When Execution Count x lt The second interruption Takes Priority is set is not executed 131 interrupt program The second interruption is executed n Y Time Setting the interrupt cycle Set the interrupt cycle of interrupts 128 to 131 using the internal timer of the interrupt pointer XXO Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Pa
233. es 86 Operation during remote RUN STOP 0 cc ee eee eee ee 86 Method of execution of remote RUN STOP 0 0 eee nee ene 86 11 2 Remote PAUSE scaner posos cipreses 88 Application of remote PAUSE o o ooocoocconno ee eee eens 88 Method of execution of remote PAUSE o o o oooooooor eee eee eee eee eens 88 TES REMOS RESET sosioseocriois eee cra os oe ere ues Ge eee oe are be ot eee eee ai 89 Application of remote RESET 0 0 0 ee ee eee eee eens 89 Enabling remote RESET 89 Method of execution of remote RESET 1 2 0 ee eee eee eens 90 11 4 Relationship Between Remote Operation and CPU Module 0 00 cee es 91 CHAPTER 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 92 12 1 Default Capacity of Each Area comer is A aw eb ed esha ewer eee eek ted ewes 92 12 2 The Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area 0 0c es 93 12 3 Device Label Memory Area Setting 00 cece nannan 94 124 Device SOUING sica a henge nia tod reheated ba beta oi Pee eae OM wee 95 Range of use of device points 1 eee eee eee ees 96 CHAPTER 13 INITIAL DEVICE VALUE SETTING 97 13 1 Setting Initial Device Values 0 cc ee 97 Setting initial device values anaana he needed eu Ges ed Gnd ee 6 be oooh Se cae eee es a 97 132 Applicable Devices sia aras is aaa dc id ONS eT Dee ew Ree a 98 CHAPTER 14 LATCH FUNCTION 99 141 byoes OF Latch ovina radar a aa RR ia e Linea beeen A aia ome eS 99 142 D
234. ese Mc ice ot 2354 syne oh eee ee es o a ee eee eee 215 Special register SD sce sa arras de eS Be ve tada di asii hg di at rls A E doo a eth e EA 215 21 4 Module Access DeVICO siii oran Ra ns Rohe eee ai 216 Specification method 216 Processing SPECO desterrar dues gee ies des id s Ad 216 21 9 Index Registers Z LZ2 erraustea na ERARA dea ee ee e aia 217 Types Of index regislers 4526sccs n edad be6ose4e0en oonh oases ee Shee h densest dada A 217 Index register SeuING viii isos rar ds cee ta eh be doe Cee aes deena ee ew cheeks 217 21 6 File Register R 0 ccc eee 218 217 A one Cid ewe each et era toed ode ee tae See a ddd ee es 218 ZAG POUNCE A acc eto ae a a Aa wth bas wa Sh re phe Ae ane Sea A 219 Global pointers 2er doboris ese E 62504 64600404 Boe oe he ee eure eed 219 Label assignment pointers 0 0 0 a 219 21 9 Interrupt Pomter l acrs cdta cenar eek ae eee Paes eee ed eee eee 219 Interrupt causes of the interrupt pointer numbers ccc ee eee eee 220 The priority for the interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors 0 0 0 0 0c eee 220 21 10 Constaiosresisrss ccna eee aio tattoo eones 221 Decimal Constant K ss saas roo wee beeen aer dd a eG dee a 221 Hexadecimal constant H eee eee ees 221 Res Res Ee 2 64604 54s nn 221 Character sing CONSIANG cata dass eee ede dun e ees oes ee nee eee eee ee 221 CHAPTER 22 LABELS 222 APPENDIX 224 Appendix 1 Special Relay List
235. est set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 4 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification resul
236. esult did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Wome Bespin LM Stores the protocol number of the registered protocol setting data R APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 265 266 No SD10758 Connection No 1 protocol execution count SD10759 Connection No 1 protocol cancel
237. et No 4 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 5 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 6 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 7 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 8 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 9 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 10 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 11 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 12 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 13 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 14 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 15 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 16 Whether protocol setting data is registered or not is stored Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 1 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not
238. evicellabelthatcan be Latched iiccey ct criar ana er tea Aa we eens Ra i 99 143 Latch SCHINGS pudre chat een tee ttethe Gis tered ee hehe eee PER en eee eee 100 ale Ses AAA 100 Seting latch On labels animada ghee SA ao eae i ee dia Bea betes ah ceeded ees 101 14 4 Clearing of Data of the Latch Range 0 ccc es 101 14 5 PY CAUliOnS 424 010 ontoc oles ce o d eee eed tewedane aes eeedan anaes 102 CHAPTER 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 103 15 1 SD Memory Card Forced Stop oc cciiccseccs seer weds hes eater eshte eden ee eee ee ewes 103 10 2 BOOT UpPerati n nas ieee oe aia ii ls hoe a eae ee eat 104 CHAPTER 16 DEVICE LABEL ACCESS SERVICE PROCESSING SETTING 107 CHAPTER 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 109 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function o ooooooo es 109 Self diagnostics timing ee eee ene e eee nee 109 Check method OPCION lt c2 lt ccceddedededeSceunnbdedes onSes oR reabre paa io 109 CPU Module Operation Upon Error Detection Setting 2 0 0 eee eee 110 o AA 112 CHAPTER 18 SECURITY FUNCTIONS 113 CHAPTER 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 114 19 1 High speed Counter Function 24 miocardio eee ws eta d wees 114 High speed counter function overview o 114 High speed counter function execution procedure 0 0 eee ee eens 115 High speed counter specifications 0 0 eee eee eee ene 115 Assignment for high speed Counters 119 High speed counter parameters 0 0 ee eee eee ee eens 123 High speed counter
239. f protocol executions in Connection No 1 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 1 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system Stores the status of the protocol being executed at connection No 2 0 Unexecuted 1 Waiting for transmission 2 Sending 3 Waiting for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where th
240. f pulses per rotation when a high speed counter operates in rotational speed measurement mode The rotational speed is measured with the set value Point e If the value is modified while the high speed counter is operating the rewritten value is reflected after the measurement before the value was modified is finished e These devices do not operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid WECliear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN Precautions If the set value for the number of pulses per rotation is set to less than the lower limit value or more than the upper limit value the number of pulses per rotation operates at the lower limit value or the upper limit value However the set value is stored as IS High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction error occurrence error code This device stores the high speed comparison table high speed comparison instruction error ECorresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SD4982 MDescription This device stores the error code when an error occurs in the high speed comparison table high speed comparison instruction Point These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid WECliear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset SM50 turned ON WError code Over the upper limit of the number of
241. f the parameters set to the proportional gain KP Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents of the parameters set to the integral time TI Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents of the parameters set to the derivative gain KD Operation error e A value outside the allowable range was Check the contents of the parameters set to the derivative time TD Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error e The sampling time is lower than the scan time e The variation of measured value is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value e The deviation is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value e The integral result is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value e The derivative value is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value due to the derivative gain KP e The derivative result is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value e The PID operation result is greater than the maximum value or lower than the minimum value e The output upper limit value is lower than the output lower limit value e The input variation alarm set value or output variation alarm set value is outside the allowable range The opera
242. f the service process is during the END process When every request statement from all connected peripheral equipment is executed in each END process depending on the number of request statements arriving during 1 scan the impact on scan time delay scattering may be big Therefore by setting the frequency number of ports of device label access service processing to be executed in 1 END processing and regulating the frequency of device label access service processing according to the system built ensuring balance between scan time and response time to the peripheral equipment can be achieved a Compatibility of service process setting The compatibility of service process setting is described below Serial communication MELSOFT connection MC protocol communication Keiko MODBUS communication slave N N Network MODBUS communication master Non protocol communication Inverter communication Predefined protocol support Ethernet communication MELSOFT connection QUO SLMP communication Socket communication Predefined protocol support O Compatible Not compatible Operation details of service process The operation details of service process are described below The following table shows the methods for service process with their respective features None Large Medium Fast High None Effective when service process is given precedence Set the frequency of service process Effe
243. fication result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mi
244. for FX5 4AD ADP and FX5 4DA ADP Generic term for Bus conversion module extension cable type and Bus conversion module extension connector type Different name for FX5 CNV BUS Different name for FX5 CNV BUSC Different name for FX3U 32BL Generic term for NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4GBSD L1MEM 2GBSD and L1MEM 4GBSD SD memory cards Abbreviation of Secure Digital Memory Card Device that stores data using flash memory Generic term for engineering tools and GOTs Generic term for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT1000 and GOT2000 series The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The product name of the software package SWnDND GXWS3 for the MELSEC programmable controllers The n represents a version Generic term for separate manuals Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Startup Generic term for MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware and MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Application Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Program Design Abbreviation of MELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Generic term for MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Serial Communication MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual MODBUS Communication MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual
245. fter filter PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter PVnf 2 Measured value in two cycles before after filter AMV Output variation MVn Operation quantity at this time Dn Differential term at this time Dn 1 Differential term in previous cycle TS Sampling cycle TD KD TD KP Proportional gain AMV KP EVn EVn 1 o EVn Dn EVn PVnf SV KD TD pes opvnt 1 Pvntepvnf 2 4 ee pp TS KD TD TS KD TD MVn 2AMV Backward operation ON AMV KP EVn EVn 1 EVn Dn EVn SV PVnf Dn 2PVnf 1 PVnf PVnf 2 Dn 1 TS KD TD TI Integral constant TD Differential constant KD Differential gain TS KD TD MVn ZAMV 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 1 Outline of Function 55 96 culating the measured value after the filter in sampling at this time The value PVnf is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value Measured value after filter PVnf PVn L PVnf 1 PVn PVn Measured value in sampling at this time L Filter coefficient PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter 9 3 Howto Use PID Instruction This instruction executes PID control which changes the output value according to the input variation For details on the PID instruction refer to the following manual LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks ENO PID EN s1 s2 s3 d settingdata Descriptio
246. g for data reception 4 Receiving 5 Execution completed Stores the verification results of receive packet No 1 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 2 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 3 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 4 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 5 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 6 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 7 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match
247. g program and the current values of timer T can be cleared at the next scan following execution of the corresponding program This will not be always executing an interrupt at a constant cycle but can be used when executing a specified program after a specified time has elapsed 2nd scan 3rd scan Ath scan STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan Execution order Scan execution type program A H IH Malas Event execution type program C Y Executed when 10 ms elapses Scan execution type program B H SE END processing j jua Measurement interval Specified time 10 ms has passed Specified time 10 ms has passed 1 When it is the turn of the first execution after the specified time has elapsed event execution type program C is executed Poin tr Output and timer current values are not cleared even when the program is set so that output and timer current values are cleared if the scan time is longer than the elapsed time set value 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 4 Execution Type of Program Trigger setting Use the event execution type detail setting O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FX5UCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Program Setting Click Detailed Setting on the Program Setting Setting E Program Setting L Program Setting Detailed Setting Detailed Setting window 2 Select the program name and set the execution type to Execute Event
248. get value SV etc that cannot be set in autotuning according to the system 3 Setting to ON b4 of s3 1 operation setting ACT to start auto tuning When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto tuning to the target value reaches 1 3 or more auto tuning is completed And bit 4 of s3 1 operation setting ACT is automatically set to OFF Poin tr Start auto tuning while the system is stable If the system is unstable when auto tuning is started auto tuning may not be executed normally Cautions on auto tuning setting Note that auto tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not followed e Difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV lf the difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV is less than 150 when autotuning is started auto tuning is not executed normally Accordingly if the difference is less than 150 set the target value for auto tuning Set the target value again when auto tuning is completed e Sampling time TS Make sure the sampling time is set for auto tuning to 1 second 1000 ms or more It is recommended that the sampling time is set to that it is considerably longer than the output change cycle Cautions on auto tuning execution Program countermeasures when the input value PV does not change When the input value PV does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input line auto tuning
249. gh speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH2 ON Measurement SM4518 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH3 ON Measurement SM4519 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH4 ON Measurement SM4520 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH5 ON Measurement 226 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List SM4521 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH6 ON Measurement SM4522 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH7 ON Measurement SM4523 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH8 ON Measurement SM4532 High speed counter overflow CH1 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4533 High speed counter overflow CH2 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4534 High speed counter overflow CH3 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4535 High speed counter overflow CH4 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4536 High speed counter overflow CH5 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4537 High speed counter overflow CH6 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4538 High speed counter overflow CH7 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4539 High speed counter overflow CH8 OFF No error R W ON Overflow SM4548 High speed counter underflow CH1 OFF No error R W ON Underflow SM4549 High speed counter underflow CH2 OFF No
250. gister LZ 2 Points Displayed items 21 DEVICES 21 5 Index Registers Z LZ 21 7 21 6 File Register R Device capable of storing numerical data 21 7 Nesting N Device for programming operating conditions by nesting using master control instructions MC MCR instruction Operation conditions are specified in ascending order NO to N14 from outside the nesting Designated in ascending No order A NO M15 B Executed when condition A is met N1 M16 JA c i 3 Executed when condition i A and B are met J Designated in Control Control Control N2 M17 a F descending No order range of range of range of nesting NO nesting N1 nesting N2 E Executed when condition A B and C are met e Executed when condition A and B are met 0 Executed when condition A is met O Executed regardless of conditions A B and C 4 Instruction for creating an efficient circuit switching program by switching common bus of the circuit 21 21 DEVICES 8 21 6 File Register R 21 8 Pointer P Device used by instructions such as jump instruction CJ instruction and subroutine program call instruction CALL instruction etc Types of pointers are as follows Pointer Description Global pointers Pointers that can be referred to from all programs Label assignment pointers Pointers used by assignment to labels Pointer numbers assigned to labels are automatically determined by engineering
251. gister stores the acceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 3 SD5601 Built in positioning deceleration time axis 3 This register stores the deceleration time of built in positioning R W axis 3 SD5606 Built in positioning zero return speed Low order axis 3 This register stores the zero return speed of built in positioning R W SD5607 Built in positioning zero return speed High order axis 3 axis 3 SD5608 Built in positioning creep speed Low order axis 3 This register stores the creep speed of built in positioning axis R W SD5609 Built in positioning creep speed High order axis 3 3 SD5610 Built in positioning zero point address Low order axis 3 This register stores the zero point address of built in positioning R W SD5611 Built in positioning zero point address High order axis 3 axis 3 SD5612 Built in positioning number of zero point signal for zero This register stores the number of zero point signal for zero return R W return axis 3 of built in positioning axis 3 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 255 256 No SD5613 SD5620 SD5621 SD5622 SD5623 SD5624 SD5625 SD5626 SD5630 SD5631 SD5636 SD5637 SD5638 SD5639 SD5640 SD5641 SD5646 SD5647 SD5648 SD5649 SD5650 SD5651 SD5652 SD5653 Built in analog The special registers for built in analog are shown below R Read only R W Read Write No SD6020 SD6021 SD6022 SD6023 SD6024
252. gt TD2 gt TD1 ages in output caused by disturbance TD2 PID operation k TD1 PID operation PI operation without differential operation ae lt x TD3 PID operation Time 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters Alarm output s3 24 If the input variation and the output variation specified with s3 20 to s3 23 are exceeded each bit of s3 24 turns ON as a warning output Alarm output s3 24 bO OFF Input variation incremental is not exceeded It is valid when operation setting ACT b1 of ON Input variation incremental is exceeded s3 1 is 1 s3 24 b1 OFF Input variation incremental is not exceeded ON Input variation incremental is exceeded s3 24 b2 OFF Output variation incremental is not exceeded It is valid when operation setting ACT b2 of ON Output variation incremental is exceeded s3 1 is 1 s3 24 b3 OFF Output variation incremental is not exceeded ON Output variation incremental is exceeded In the case of input variation Measured value PV Variation ES Time Sampling time TS Alarm output s3 24 bO ON s3 24 b1 ON In the case of output variation Output value MV Variation Time Sampling time TS Alarm output V ON s3 24 b2 ON s3 24 b3 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters 67 68 9 7 Auto Tuning This chapter
253. h a configured scale Function that adds a specified amount to the A D conversion value Fine adjustments during system startup can be easily performed Function that specifies the maximum A D conversion value as 4000 and the minimum value as 0 when voltage is input that exceeds the input range Function that holds the minimum and maximum digital operation values Function to output warning when digital operation values exceed the specified range List of analog output functions Function to enable disable D A conversion Function to enable or disable D A conversion When analog output is not used the conversion process time can be reduced by disabling conversion Function to enable disable D A output Scaling function Shift function Function to HOLD CLEAR the analog output Analog test when the CPU module has stopped Warning output function 202 20 BUILT IN ANALOG FUNCTION 20 2 Analog Input Output Specifications Specifies whether to output the D A conversion value or output an offset value HOLD setting value Function that converts user defined maximum and minimum digital values in accordance with a configured scale Function that adds a specified amount to the digital value Fine adjustments during system startup can be easily performed Sets the digital value before D A conversion to the previous value or clears the value 0 depending on the operation status of the CPU module RUN STOP and STOP error Out
254. h order CH8 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order CH8 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH8 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low order CH8 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH8 High speed comparison table high speed compare instruction error code Multi point output high speed comparison table comparison number Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement latest value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement latest value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement maximum value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement maximum value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement minimum value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement minimum value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value High order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value Low order CH1 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value High order CH1 Pulse wid
255. h speed Counter Function Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e When ON by the user e When OFF by the user e When set to enabled with parameters e When set to disabled with parameters e Cannot be modified while the high speed counter is operating Operates in the configured status when the high speed counter starts e When the current value of a high speed counter is rewritten with the DHCMOV instruction the comparison process is not executed e When the preset control switch is set to Constant when ON the preset input comparison is disabled unter enable input logic These devices are used for setting the enable input logic mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4628 SM4629 SM4630 SM4631 SM4632 SM4633 SM4634 SM4635 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows The enable input operates with negative logic The enable input operates with positive logic Enabled when the enable input is OFF Enabled when the enable input is ON t These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e When ON by the user e When OFF by the user e When set to negative logic with parameters e When set to positive logic with parameters Cannot be modified while the high speed counter is operating Operates in the co
256. h speed Counter Function 33 Other precautions There are common precautions when using high speed counters For details refer to L Page 163 Precautions when using high speed counters Multiple point output high speed comparison tables Multiple point output high speed comparison tables are explained below Use to set multiple point output high speed comparison tables for high speed counters Sets match output table comparison setting for high speed counters XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed 1 0 gt Input Function gt High Speed counter gt Detail Setting gt Multi point Output High Speed Compare Table Window Table Data Output Data HO Do Hot Use Device me GH Bit Output Points 1 y Enable Disable Device Comparison Value Output Device Output Data HEX Se os So mm a Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Dizable Disable Digable Disable T Disable EU E A O O arca Displayed items Item Table Data Counter CH Output Data Points Enable Disable Device Sets whether or not to use user device for table data e Do Not Use Device Do Not Use e Use Device Device Set Comparison Target CH CH1 to CH8 CH1 Sets the type of output data e Bit Output Bit Output e Word Output Sets the number of output data points e Bit Output 1 1 to 16 e Word Output 1 to 2 Sets whether to enable or di
257. hat is aborted by the interrupt Implement the following preventive measure e Set instructions that will result in inconsistencies if interrupted to interrupt disabled using the DI instruction e When using bit data ensure that the same bit data is not used by both the interrupt program and the program that is aborted by the interrupt Minterrupt precision is not improved If interrupt precision is not improved this might be remedied by implementing the following e Give higher priority to the interrupt that needs higher precision e Use an interrupt pointer with high interrupt priority order e Recheck the section of interruption disabled 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 5 Program Type 2 PROCESSING OF OPERATIONS ACCORDING TO CPU MODULE OPERATION STATUS The CPU module has three operation statuses as follows e RUN status e STOP status e Paused Processing of operations on the CPU module in each status is explained below Processing of operations in RUN status In the RUN mode operations in the sequence program are executed repeatedly in order step O gt END FEND instruction gt step 0 MHOutput when CPU module enters RUN mode Operation results are output after the sequence program is executed for the duration of one scan The device memory other than the output Y holds the state immediately before the RUN state However if device initial value is set up this initial value is set m Processing time until start of operation
258. he CPU module is in the STOP status In addition even if the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module is set to RUN position reset is possible when the CPU module has stopped due to occurrence of an error that can be detected by self diagnosis function Application of remote RESET When a CPU module is in an inaccessible place and an error has occurred CPU module can be reset by a remote operation Enabling remote RESET To remotely RESET remote RESET must be enabled TZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Operation Related Setting gt Remote Reset Setting Window Setting Remote Reset Disable Displayed items Remote Reset Set whether or not to enable remote RESET Disable Enable 11 REMOTE OPERATION 11 3 Remote RESET 89 90 Method of execution of remote RESET The following are the methods of execution of remote RESET Engineering tool method Refer to the following LAGX Works3 Operating Manual Method using external devices that use SLMP Refer to the following LTIMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP Point When executing remote RESET the settings that allow the remote reset of the CPU parameter must be written to CPU module beforehand In the case that they are not set remote RESET will not be possible Precautions MWRemote RESET in RUN status When the CPU module is in RUN status it cannot be reset by remote RESET Change the CPU module to S
259. he buffer memory using module access device at least 2 times in the program you can speed up processing time by reading writing at a single place in the program using a FROM TO instruction e Writing using multiple module access devices U1 HL Movp KO a U1 MOVP K10 G11 U1 MOVP K5 G12 UN MOVP K100 G13 e Writing at single place in program using TO instruction MOVP KO DO MOVP K10 D1 Stores data to a device such as data register D MOVP K5 D2 MOVP K100 D3 TO H1 K10 DO K4 Writes data once in the program 21 6 21 DEVICES 21 4 Module Access Device 21 5 Index Registers Z LZ Device used for indexing of devices Types of index registers There are 2 types the index register Z and long index register LZ Index register Z Used for 16 bit index modification SM402 MOV K100 zo M10 MOV WO Dozo Access DOZO D100 INC ZO Long index register LZ Used for 32 bit index modification SM402 DMOV K50000 LZO M10 MOV DO U1 GOLZO Access U1 GOLZO U1 G50000 DINC LZO Index register setting A total of 24 words can be used for index register Z and long index register LZ The number of points can be changed by parameter XXO Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Memory Device Setting gt Index Register Setting Window Item Setting O dadex fegrster Setime 2 Points Setting E Total Points 24 Points A Index Register 2 20 Points az Lone Index Re
260. he limit of the moving direction or writing during RUN The PLSY instruction stops pulse output immediately at both limits When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC decelerated and stopped the pulse output due to the limit of the moving direction or writing during RUN The PLSY instruction stops pulse output immediately at both limits When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC decelerated and stopped the pulse output due to the limit of the moving direction or writing during RUN The PLSY instruction stops pulse output immediately at both limits When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC stopped the pulse output immediately by the pulse stop command or detection of the all outputs disable flag When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC stopped the pulse output immediately by the pulse stop command or detection of the all outputs disable flag Action e Start the positioning within specifications e Start the positioning within specifications e Start the positioning within specifications e Start the positioning within specifications e Start the positioning within specifications e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Elimin
261. he lines such as cables hubs and routes connected to receiving modules Some line packets may be engaged Retry to communicate a little while later The receiving module may have no free space in receive area TCP window size is small Check whether the receiving module processes receive data or whether the CPU module does not send unnecessary data Check whether the settings of the subnet mask pattern and the default router IP address of the CPU module and the receiving modules are correct or whether the class of the IP address is correct Check the external device operation Check the status of the lines such as cables hubs and routes connected to receiving modules Error may be generated when connection is forcibly canceled during communication In that case there is no issue so clear the error Check the external device operation Check the status of the lines such as cables hubs and routes connected to receiving modules Retry to connect a little while later if the error occurred in communication Execute again after checking the file Execute again after checking the size of the specified file If the error recurs after re execution the file information data may be corrupted Back up data in the CPU module and then initialize the memory APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code 289 Error Error details and cause Action code 41DOH File related error The specified drive memory has no fr
262. he project e Write the correct security key to the CPU module System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information Drive file information Drive file information Drive file information Drive file information Parameter information Parameter information Drive file information Diagnostic timing At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET Always Always At power on at RESET at STOP gt RUN state At power on at RESET at STOP gt RUN state At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET at STOP gt RUN state Error code 2301H 2302H 2320H 2400H 2401H 2440H 2441H 2500H 2501H 2522H 2801H 2820H 2821H 2822H Security key authentication error Security key authentication error Remote password setting error Module verification error Module verification error Module major error Module major error WDT error The initial scan time exceeded the set e Recheck the set value of execution monitor Time value of execut
263. he sample program for auto tuning step response method PID Page 82 control 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 73 74 Program example 1 This is an example of the sample program for PID control Use device The content of the devices used for the program is as follows ES Target value SV 5000 50 0 C Measured value Pv s2 SD6022 According to input value 2 Operation setting 1 Backward operation CT O amis not provide Autotuning Autotuning Notused used 0 AT is not provided Upper and lower limits of s3 1 b5 D511 5 EJE used 1 Setting is provided output value Differential gain KD s3 5 D515 Not used 0 Differential gain is not provided Differential time TD D516 5000 500010 ms Input variation incremental alarm set value D530 Not used Input variation decremental alarm set value 3 21 D531 Notused used Not used Output variation incremental alarm set value s3 22 D532 E used 2000 2 second Output upper limit set value Output variation decremental alarm set value s3 23 D533 Not used 0 0 second Output lower limit set value Alarm output Input variation incremental is s3 24 bO D534 0 Not used Not used exceeded Input variation decremental s3 24 b1 D534 1 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation incremental s3 24 b2 D534 2 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation decremental s3 24 b3 D534 3 Not used Not used is exceeded PV value th
264. hen direct specification is selected Comparison Value 2 Indirect If band comparison is set to comparison type sets Word device D R device comparison value 2 to be compared with current value of high speed counter When indirect specification is selected Point FP e You can create an open table entry before table setting is complete e Table settings can be made in any order Be careful when the current value is changed by self reset at a table along the way as table processing starts with the first table then the following tables in order High speed comparison table operation Operation of each type of high speed comparison table operation is explained below Set to ON When comparison value 1 matches the current value of the set high speed counter the bit device specified as the output destination device is set If interrupt pointer has been specified for output destination device the interrupt program of the specified interrupt pointer is run simultaneously when it matches comparison value 1 Operation is the same as for the DHSCS instruction For information on the DHSCS instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 4 32 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function MReset When comparison value 1 matches the current value of the set high speed counter the bit device specified as the output destination device is reset Operatio
265. i Output in proportional operation Time 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters 63 Poin tr The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated As a result the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated Deviation Deviation EV Time Output MV Output of proportional operation integral operation y S output of integral operation E ni 2 Output of proportional operation Proportional gain KP x Deviation E Time Integral time TI Differential gain s3 5 The filter is applied to the output at the differential operation Setting range O to 100 Only the differential operation is affected by the differential gain KD e When the differential gain KD is small the output is immediately given with regard to changes in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc e When the differential gain KD is large the output is given after a long time with respect to changes in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc Point Set the differential gain KD to 0 and then adjust the operation using the input filter a If the output response is too close to the disturbance increase the differential gain KD 64 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters Differential time s3 6 Use the differential time TD to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value PV
266. ice specified in s3 Auto tuning In the step response method 2 25 points 25 devices are occupied from the head device specified in s3 d Output value PID control normal processing 1 point MV The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction After that the operation result is stored Auto tuning In the limit cycle The Upper Limit Value ULV or Lower Limit Value LLV value is automatically output during auto tuning The specified MV value is output when auto tuning is finished Auto tuning In the step response method The user sets the step output value before driving the instruction The MV value is not changed by PID instruction during auto tuning m Precautions for using the PID instruction For the precautions for using the PID instruction refer to the following manual LTIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 9 4 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning When auto tuning is not executed parameter setting It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters s3 to s3 6 using MOV instruction in advance etc before starting the PID operation when auto tuning is not executed If a device with a latch setting is specified the setting data is retained even after the power to the CPU module is turned OFF therefore the writing at the 2nd power ON is not required For details on parameters refer to K Page 58 Parameter Wh
267. igence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas servi
268. iles programs restored information e FB files FB restored information e Device comments e Initial device values 104 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 15 2 Boot Operation uring the boot setting Carry out the settings required for the boot operation O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Memory Card Parameter gt Boot Setting mQperating procedure Boot Setting window 1 Click Detailed Setting on the Boot File Setting E Baat Setting PA E E E AS ao Glear the GPU built in memory before boot Do Not Clear Boot File Setting lt Detailed Setting gt Boot File Setting window 2 Click the Type column The maximum number of boot Data Name files that can be specified is the same as the number of Wes gt files that can be stored in the storage memory Add Type window 3 Select type for the boot file Multiple selection possible System Parameter CPU Parameter C Module Parameter E Module Extended Parameter for Protocol Setting FXSUCPU Ethernet ofl FXBUCPU Serial E Global Label e Program File JO MAIN lt Manual Input gt GHOFB FUN File jell Manual Input gt F Device Comment ll COMMENT 2 1 Device Initial Value 7 lt Manual Input gt 4 Set the data name file name No Type Data Name 1 System Parameter SYSTEM 2 GPU Parameter GPU 3 Module Parameter UNIT 4 Module Extended P
269. ing Operation direction s3 1 bO D511 0 According to auto tuning Not used ACT result Input variation alarm s3 1 b1 D511 1 O Alarm is not provided Not used Output variation alarm s3 1 b2 D511 2 O Alarm is not provided Not used _Auto tuning _Auto tuning s3 1 b4 D511 4 1 AT is provided 1 AT is provided is provided Not used Upper and lower limits of s3 1 b5 D511 5 O Setting is not provided Not used output value Select auto tuning mode Select auto tuning mode mode s3 1 b6 D511 6 0 Step response method 0 Step response method response method Not used Input filter constant a s3 2 D512 0 Input filter is not Not used provided Proportional gain KP 1 s3 3 D513 According to auto tuning Not used result Integral time TI s3 4 D514 According to auto tuning Not used result Differential gain KD s3 5 D515 0 Differential gain is not Not used provided Differential time TD s3 6 D516 According to auto tuning Not used result Input variation incremental alarm set value s3 20 D530 Not used Input variation decremental alarm set value D531 Not used Output variation incremental alarm set value s3 22 D532 Not used Not used Output upper limit set value Output variation decremental alarm set value s3 23 D533 Not used Not used Output lower limit set value Alarm output Input variation incremental is s3 24 bO D534 0 Not used Not used exceeded Input variation
270. ing error Axis 1 limit detection error Axis 2 limit detection error Axis 3 limit detection error Axis 4 limit detection error Axis 1 positioning address error Axis 2 positioning address error Axis 3 positioning address error Error details and cause e The value of the special register to set the pulse width and cycle of the PWM instruction is abnormal The value of the special register to set the pulse width and cycle of the PWM instruction is abnormal The value of the special register to set the pulse width and cycle of the PWM instruction is abnormal The value of the special register to set the pulse width and cycle of the PWM instruction is abnormal Both the forward and reverse limits were detected at the time of zero return or the limit of the moving direction was detected after the near point dog was detected Both the forward and reverse limits were detected at the time of zero return or the limit of the moving direction was detected after the near point dog was detected Both the forward and reverse limits were detected at the time of zero return or the limit of the moving direction was detected after the near point dog was detected Both the forward and reverse limits were detected at the time of zero return or the limit of the moving direction was detected after the near point dog was detected The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the positioning address was converted The
271. ing and for writing do not match the Set correct passwords for both reading and writing and error previous passwords when trying to change authenticate or perform password authentication delete password 4408H Security function e File password 32 authentication has failed when required e Set the correct password and perform password error authentication again 440EH Security function e The security function was activated and password e Set a correct password and perform password error authentication cannot be performed authentication again after a certain period of time e Register cancel file password 32 was attempted on a file set It is necessary to delete the whole project to delete the file to permanent PLC lock set to permanent PLC lock 4412H Security function e The security key cannot be registered to the CPU module e Hardware failure of the CPU module Replace the CPU error due to failure of the internal memory where the security key module is registered Or the security key of the CPU module cannot be deleted 4416H Security function e Since the CPU module is in lock or unlock operation the e Request the processing after the lock or unlock operation error requested processing cannot be performed ends 4422H Security function The access target CPU module does not support the e Change the security key information version of the error security key information stored in the engineering tool engineering tool in accordance with the ver
272. ing clock output 4 Counted number of scans for timing clock output 5 Current address Low order axis 1 pulse units Current address High order axis 1 pulse units Current address Low order axis 2 pulse units Current address High order axis 2 pulse units Current address Low order axis 3 pulse units Current address High order axis 3 pulse units Current address Low order axis 4 pulse units Current address High order axis 4 pulse units 1 ms ring counter Low order 1 ms ring counter High order RS2 amount of remaining data ch1 MODBUS communication error code ch1 RS2 receive data points ch1 MODBUS communication error details ch1 RS2 communication parameter display ch1 MODBUS communication format display ch1 MODBUS communication retry times ch1 RS2 receive sum received data ch1 RS2 receive sum calculated result ch1 RS2 send sum ch1 Description R W This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 1 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 2 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 3 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 4 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 5 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 6 This register stores the code of communication error at s
273. ing with the CPU module by SLMP to read and write the data of the CPU module Describes the built in positioning function Describes the analog function System configuration parameter settings and online operations of GX Works3 Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms e O indicates a variable portion used to collectively call multiple models or versions Example FX5U 32MR ES FX5U 32MT ES gt FX5U 32MH0O ES e For details on the FX3 devices that can be connected with the FX5 refer to FX5 User s Manual Hardware Terms Devices FX5 FX3 FX5 CPU module FX5U CPU module FX5UC CPU module Extension module e FX5 extension module e FX3 extension module Extension module extension cable type Extension module extension connector type I O module Input module e Input module extension cable type Description Generic term for FX5U and FX5UC PLCs Generic term for FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3U and FX3UC PLCs Generic term for FX5U CPU module and FX5UC CPU module Generic term for FX5U 32MR ES FX5U 32MT ES FX5U 32MT ESS FX5U 64MR ES FX5U 64MT ES FX5U 64MT ESS FX5U 80MR ES FX5U 80MT ES and FX5U 80MT ESS Generic term for FX5UC 32MT D and FX5UC 32MT DSS Generic term for FX5 extension modules and FX3 function modules Generic term for I O modules FX5 extension power supply module and FX5 intelligent function module Generic term for FX3 extension power supply module and FX3 intelligent fu
274. ion SM8251 LC51 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8252 LC52 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8253 LC53 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8254 LC54 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8255 LC55 counting direction monitoring OFF Down count operation R ON Up count operation SM8304 Zero OFF Zero flag OFF R ON Zero flag ON SM8306 Carry OFF Carry flag OFF R ON Carry flag ON SM8329 Instruction execution error OFF Instruction execution normal R ON Instruction execution error complete SM8330 Timing clock output 1 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 1 SM8331 Timing clock output 2 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 2 SM8332 Timing clock output 3 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 3 SM8333 Timing clock output 4 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 4 SM8334 Timing clock output 5 DUTY instruction Timing clock output 5 SM8340 Axis 1 pulse output monitor OFF Stopped ON Pulse output SM8348 Axis 1 positioning instruction executing OFF Positioning instruction not executing R ON Positioning instruction executing SM8350 Axis 2 pulse output monitor OFF Stopped R ON Output SM8358 Axis 2 positioning instruction executing OFF Positioning instruction not executing R ON Positioning instruction executing SM8360 Axis 3 pulse output mon
275. ion cooling Temperature a Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Measured value PV e e ua Bami l O g I __ ee m Remaining deviation Target value SV Time Output value MV aa ES Proportional gain KP3 KP2 _KP1 KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Se ia Time 62 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters Integral time s3 4 During the integral operation the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes the proportional operation output This is called integral time and is expressed as TI As TI becomes smaller the integral operation becomes stronger Setting range 0 to 32767 x 100 ms 0 is handled as oo no integration Ex Pl operation in backward operation heating Temperature 7113 a En AR cen eee nee eee Measured value in PI operation i Measured value in proportional operation Integral time TI 0 lt TI3 lt TI2 lt TI1 Time Integral time TI TI3 O lt TI3 lt TI2 lt TI1 Output in Pl operation Output in proportional operation Time PI operation in forward operation cooling Temperature m Integral time TI A O lt TI3 lt TI2 lt T11 TI3 A Measured value in proportional operation Measured value in PI operation Time Output value MV Integral time TI O O lt TI3 lt TI2 lt TI1 T ZN Wro e a a Output in PI operation QS TA T
276. ion information and system configuration information Diagnostic timing At interrupt occurrence At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At instruction execution 3C00H 3C01H 3C02H 3C03H 3COFH 3C20H 3C22H 3C2FH 3E20H Hardware failure A hardware failure was detected Hardware failure A hardware failure was detected Hardware failure A hardware failure was detected Hardware failure A hardware failure was detected Hardware failure A hardware failure was detected Memory error A memory error was detected Memory error A memory error was detected Memory error A memory error was detected Program A program larger than the internal execution error memory capacity was written e Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error appears the hardware of the CPU module may be malfunctioning Consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative Reset the CPU module and perform RUN If the same error app
277. ion is compatible high speed counter function is valid the updating is made also valid the updating is made also when UDCNTFE instruction is executed ON when UDCNTF instruction is executed ON e Power ON reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN 1 phase 1 input S W internal clock count direction switch Device for switching counter direction when using 1 phase 1 input S W counter or internal clock mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4580 SM4581 SM4582 SM4583 SM4584 SM4585 SM4586 SM4587 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows High speed counter current value counted 1 when phase A input ON High speed counter current value counted 1 when phase A input ON e Setting is ignored for counter other than 1 phase 1 input S W internal clock e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows When ON by the user update by END processing e When OFF by the user update by END processing e Power ON reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Can also be modified while the high speed counter is operating 142 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function r preset input logic These devices are used for setting the preset input logic mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows
278. ion monitor time time or program information e Recheck the set value of execution monitor WDT error Invalid interrupt Module specification error Device specification error Device specification error Device specification error Error details and cause The program is locked by the security key but the security key is not written in the CPU module The security key written in the CPU module is corrupted A module supporting remote passwords is not connected to the module number specified in the remote password parameter The power of a module connected is OFF or a connection error has been detected A module was connected during operation The communication procedure with a module failed during initial processing The communication procedure with a module failed when an instruction was executed The scan time of the second and subsequent scans exceeded the set value of execution monitor time e An interrupt request was detected from a module that does not have an interrupt pointer specified in the parameters e Verify that the module with the specified module number exists e A device used as an instruction operand is outside the allowable device range There are duplicate devices used as an instruction operand A device or modification that cannot be used as an instruction operand is used e Write the security key to the CPU module e Rewrite the security key
279. is register stores the PWM pulse output number current value Low order CH 1 CH1 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor High order CH1 This register stores the PWM pulse output number CH2 This register stores the PWM pulse width CH2 This register stores the PWM cycle CH2 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor This register stores the PWM pulse output number current value Low order CH2 CH2 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor High order CH2 This register stores the PWM pulse output number CH3 This register stores the PWM pulse width CH3 This register stores the PWM cycle CH3 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor This register stores the PWM pulse output number current value Low order CH3 CH3 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor High order CH3 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 253 No SD5348 PWM pulse output number Low order CH4 SD5349 PWM pulse output number High order CH4 SD5350 PWM pulse width Low order CH4 SD5351 PWM pulse width High order CH4 SD5352 PWM cycle Low order CH4 SD5353 PWM cycle High order CH4 Descinon O This register stores the PWM pulse output number CH4 R W This register stores the PWM pulse width CH4 R W This register stores the PWM cycle CH4 R W SD5354 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor This register stores the PWM pulse output numb
280. is register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Year SD2 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Month SD3 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Day SD4 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Hour SD5 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Minute SD6 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Secona SD7 This register stores the latest self diagnosis error time Day Week SD10 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD11 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD12 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD13 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD14 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD15 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD16 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD17 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD18 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD19 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD20 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD21 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD22 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD23 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD24 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD25 This register stores the self diagnosis error code SD53 This register stores the number of times of momentar
281. is register stores the timeout time ch1 R Station number setting ch2 This register stores the station number setting ch2 Station number setting ch3 This register stores the station number setting ch3 R W R W Message frame and form ch3 This register stores the message frame and form ch3 R Timeout time ch3 This register stores the timeout time ch3 R Message frame and form ch2 This register stores the message frame and form ch2 R Station number setting ch4 This register stores the station number setting ch4 meone EI E R W This register stores the current retry value ch3 R Current retry value ch4 This register stores the current retry value ch4 R APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 261 262 SD8860 This register stores the communication format ch1 R number ch1 number ch2 number ch3 number ch4 SD8981 This register stores the response wait time cht register stores the response wait time This register stores the response wait time cht R station station No 1 station No 2 station No 3 station No 4 station No 5 station No 6 station No 7 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List SD9061 Code of communication error at master station This register stores the code of communication error at master R station SD9062 Code of communication error at slave station No 1 This register stores the code of communication error a
282. iting SM634 Data memory write count error detection flag OFF Overwrite count is less than 20 000 R ON Overwrite count is 20 000 or more ction related o The special relays related to instruction execution are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SM700 Carry flag OFF Carry OFF R ON Carry ON SM701 Output characters selection OFF NULL code output R W ON No change SM703 Sort order OFF Ascending order R W ON Descending order SM704 Block comparison OFF Non match found R ON All match SM709 DT TM instruction improper data detection OFF Improper data not detected R W ON Improper data detected al igh speed Input and output The special relays for FX high speed input and output are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SM4500 High speed counter operation CH1 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4501 High speed counter operation CH2 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4502 High speed counter operation CH3 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4503 High speed counter operation CH4 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4504 High speed counter operation CH5 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4505 High speed counter operation CH6 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4506 High speed counter operation CH7 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4507 High speed counter operation CH8 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM4516 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed OFF Stopped R measurement CH1 ON Measurement SM4517 Hi
283. itor OFF Stopped R ON Output SM8368 Axis 3 positioning instruction executing OFF Positioning instruction not executing R ON Positioning instruction executing SM8370 Axis 4 pulse output monitor OFF Stopped R ON Output SM8378 Axis 4 positioning instruction executing OFF Positioning instruction not executing R D B B U DW ON Positioning instruction executing SM8401 RS2 Send wait flag ch1 MODBUS request in process ON during send wait or MODBUS communication R ch1 SM8402 MODBUS communication error ch1 OFF No error R ON Error SM8403 MODBUS communication error latched ch1 OFF No error R ON Error latch SM8404 RS2 Carrier detection flag ch1 MODBUS communication ON when carrier detection or listen only mode R mode ch1 SM8405 RS2 Data set ready DSR flag ch1 OFF DSR not detected R ON DSR detected SM8408 MODBUS retry ch1 OFF Not retry R ON Retry SM8409 RS2 Time out check flag ch1 MODBUS Timeout ch1 ON when time out occurs R SM8421 RS2 Send wait flag ch2 MODBUS request in process ON during send wait or MODBUS communication R ch2 SM8422 MODBUS communication error ch2 OFF No error R ON Error 236 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List SM8423 MODBUS communication error latched ch2 OFF No error ON Error latch SM8424 RS2 Carrier detection flag ch2 MODBUS communication Carrier detection flag or listen only mode ON when operating mode ch2 SM8425 RS2 Data set rea
284. ixed scan execution type program Specified Time Intervals Fixed scan interval setting value is displayed Setup is performed on another screen Page 22 Fixed scan interval setting x d scan interval setting Sets the fixed scan interval setting of the fixed scan execution type program It is the same as setting for interrupt from internal timer O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Interrupt Settings gt Fixed Scan Interval Setting El Freed Scan Interval Sotine oF Interrupt Setting from Internal Timer ra mM 100 ms ein 40 me 180 20 ms He BI 10 ms Interrupt Setting from Internal 128 100 ms 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 4 Execution Type of Program Action when the execution condition is satisfied Performs the following action If the execution condition is satisfied before the interrupt is enabled by the El instruction The program enters the waiting status and is executed when the interrupt is enabled Note that if the execution condition for this fixed scan execution type program is satisfied more than once during the waiting status the program is executed only once when the interrupt is enabled MWhen there are two or more fixed scan execution type programs When the specified time intervals expire in the same timing the programs are executed in order according to the priority 131 gt 130 gt 129 gt 128 of the periodic interrupt pointer
285. ized Built in analog monitor CH1 SD6022 CH2 SD6062 PID instruction drive PID is executed The heater operation cycle is set to 2 sec Preset Heater output control Heater output 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program 83 10 ConsTANT SCAN Since the processing time differs as per the execution non execution of command used in the program the scan timer changes with every scan By setting the constant scan because a program can be repeatedly executed while keeping scan time at a specified amount of time even when the execution time of the program changes the I O refresh interval can be constant e When constant scan is set Settings value 10 ms Wait time END 0 Program y i 0 END 0 END 0 END processing 1 ms 7 ms 2 ms 11 ms 8 ms 1ms 2 ms 7 ms 1 ms lt gt gt lt gt 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms lt ze gt gt When constant scan time is not set END processing END o Program END 0 END 0 1 ng 7 ms 1 ng 8 ms 2 ns 7 ms 8 ms 9 ms 9 ms 10 1 Constant scan settings Sets the constant scan setting XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt RAS Setting gt Constant Scan Setting Window Constant Sean Seting poe oe os Constant Scan TE 0 2 to 2000 ms 0 1 ms units Sets the constant scan time Constant Scan 84 10 CONSTANT SCAN 10 1 Constant scan settings Conditions of setting time Set a val
286. lation specification SD10760 Connection No 2 protocol execution status SD10762 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 1 SD10763 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 2 SD10764 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 3 SD10765 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 4 SD10766 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 5 SD10767 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 6 SD10768 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 7 SD10769 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 8 SD10770 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 9 SD10771 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 10 SD10772 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 11 SD10773 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 12 SD10774 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 13 SD10775 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 14 SD10776 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 15 SD10777 Connection No 2 received data verification result receive packet No 16 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List CI Y O Stores the number o
287. lave R station No 7 This register stores the number of communication error at master R station This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 1 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 2 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 3 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 4 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 5 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 6 This register stores the number of communication error at slave R station No 7 This register stores the RND random number generation data This register stores the scan count for timing clock output 1 This register stores the scan count for timing clock output 2 This register stores the scan count for timing clock output 3 This register stores the scan count for timing clock output 4 This register stores the scan count for timing clock output 5 AE A MEE L AS E E Mo Ts AS E e R This register stores the current address axis 1 pulse units This register stores the current address axis 2 pulse units This register stores the current address axis 3 pulse units This register stores the current address axis 4 pulse units This register stores the 1 ms ring counter This register stores the amount of remaining d
288. lays Note however that the measurement mode cannot be changed during pulse width measurement To change the measurement mode stop pulse width measurement change the measurement mode and then resume measurement e Pulse measurement is possible only while in RUN status Pulse width measurement is stopped by RUN gt PAUSE and RUN gt STOP 4 82 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function Examples of program An example of a program using the pulse width measurement function is explained below This program assumes that parameters are set as follows Input signals X1 and X2 are assigned to CH1 X1 and CH2 X2 by parameters CH3 and CH4 need not be set Input logic switching Positive logic Positive logic Measurement mode Always measurement mode Always measurement mode Program An operation diagram and program are shown below Operation diagram ON CH1 X1 off ON CH2 X2 OFF This duration is measured Program Command Measurement of the CH1 and CH2 pulse width starts Interrupt pointer DHCMOV SD5020 po ko The latest rising edge value of CH1 is transferred to D1 and DO 1002 DHCMOV SD5040 The latest rising edge value of CH2 is transferred to D3 and D2 The value Ring counter value at the rising edge of the input signal o o2 oo oe from CH2 Ring counter value at the rising edge of the input signal from CH1 is stored in D9 and D8 or os 2 oso Signals are
289. le of backward operation During the tW period after the tuning cycle is finished the output value is held at the output Lower Limit Value LLV and then normal PID control is started The value tW can be obtained by the expression tW 50 KW 100 x t ton and the wait setting parameter KW can be set in the parameter s3 28 Setting range Kw 50 to 32717 When the abnormal range is specified tW is handled as 0 Output value MV Output upper limit value ULV Output lower limit value LLV l l lI i Time l l l l I I l l I I l l l l l l l l ror Input value i i i I l l I l I l lI l l I l I l lI l l l l l l lI l lI l l I l lI l lI l I l lI l l l I l I I l l l l l l I I l l l l l I l l lI i E ASNO A MN o Ea l SV SHPV 1 1 SV target value l SV SHPV Time s tO q1 TZ SHPV PV Input threshold hysteresis 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 7 Auto Tuning 69 70 Parameters set in limit cycle method The parameters specified in the limit cycle method are shown below Parameter Setting position Proportional gain KP s3 3 Integral time TI s3 4 Differential time TD s3 6 Auto tuning procedure 1 Set forward or backward operation Set the operation direction flag b0 in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 1 2 Select the auto tuning method limit cycle method Set the a
290. lue to the table e Observe the restrictions on table operation e Observe the restrictions on table operation e Observe the restrictions on table operation e Observe the restrictions on table operation Set the interval of table shifts to 10 ms or greater e Set the interval of table shifts to 10 ms or greater Set the interval of table shifts to 10 ms or greater Detailed information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Error location Diagnostic timing At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at interrupt occurre
291. m Fixed scan execution type program Event execution END processing type program Point FP When the execution type of the programs is the same the programs are executed in the order in which the execution order was set 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 9 1 3 Program Execution Sequence 20 1 4 Execution Type of Program Set the program execution conditions Initial execution type program This program type is executed only once when the CPU module changes from the STOP PAUSE to the RUN status This program type is used for programs that do not need to be executed from the next scan once they are executed like initial processing on an intelligent function module Control by one program When an initial execution type program is used Program A Processing performed Initial execution only once type program One program can be divided into initial execution type and scan execution type program Program B yP ype prog Processing performed Scan execution in every scan type program Also the execution time of initial execution type programs is the same as the initial scan time When multiple initial execution type programs are executed the execution time of the initial execution type programs becomes the time until execution of all initial execution type programs is completed STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan END processing 0 END Initial execution type program A _ h END E 0 END Initial executi
292. m X0 to X7 for each channel with parameter settings Measurement frequencies The table below shows the measurement frequencies FX5U 32MO FX5UC 32MO FX5U 64MO FX5U 80MO Measurement frequencies XO to X5 XO to X7 200 KHz X6 to X17 X10 to X17 10 KHz mMMeasurement precision The table below shows the measurement precision Item Description Possible measurement range 5 us Maximum measurable signal width 10735741ms823us Resolution 0 5 us Pulse measurements The pulse width and period are stored in special devices by the END instruction lt Page 177 List of special relays special registers Pulse width maximum value and minimum value The maximum value and minimum value of the pulse width from the start of measurements are stored in special devices E Page 177 List of special relays special registers Period maximum value and minimum value The maximum value and minimum value of the period from the start of measurements are stored in special devices E Page 177 List of special relays special registers 4 74 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function Switching positive logic negative logic The pulse input logic can be switched Positive logic or negative logic can be set for each channel with parameter settings Operation for positive logic Pulse input lt Pulse width Operation for negative logic AA i Pulssinput Pulse width Continuous measurement one time measurement mode The pulse
293. m value High order CH4 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH4 High speed counter pulse density High order CH4 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH4 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH4 High speed counter preset control switch CH4 High speed counter preset value Low order CH4 High speed counter preset value High order CH4 High speed counter ring length Low order CH4 High speed counter ring length High order CH4 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order CH4 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH4 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low order CH4 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH4 High speed counter current value Low order CH5 High speed counter current value High order CH5 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH5 High speed counter maximum value High order CH5 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH5 High speed counter minimum value High order CH5 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH5 High speed counter pulse density High order CH5 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH5 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH5 High speed counter preset control switch CH5 High speed counter preset value Low order CH5 High speed counter preset value High order CH5 High speed counter ring length Low order CH
294. me ROM write count error Battery error Annunciator ON Operation error Constant scan time error IP address setting error IP address writing clear request simultaneous detection Module configuration error Memory card error Module verification error Module major error Invalid interrupt Module specification error Device specification error File name specification error Nesting depth error Pointer execution error Operation error High speed comparison table maximum excess error Preset value range outside error Clear errors with the module diagnostics function of engineering tool LLIGX Works3 Operating Manual Using SM SD Clear errors by operating SM SD 1 Check SDO Latest self diagnostics error code to identify what errors are detected 2 Clear the cause of each of the currently detected continuation errors 3 Turn off and on SM50 error reset Precautions This section describes some precautions to take when using the error clear function e Since the function clears all of the currently detected continuation errors at once errors that should not yet be cleared may be cleared e Use the RST instruction to reset each annunciator individually 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function 18 SECURITY FUNCTIONS These functions prevent theft tampering wrongful operation illegal execution etc of a customer s assets saved on a personal computer or in modules in the FX5 system as a resul
295. ment No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 No SD10778 SD10779 SD10780 SD10782 SD10783 SD10784 SD10785 SD10786 SD10787 SD10788 SD10789 SD10790 SD10791 SD10792 SD10793 SD10794 SD10795 SD10796 SD10797 Connection No 2 protocol execution count Connection No 2 protocol cancellation specification Connection No 3 protocol execution status Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 1 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 2 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 3 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 4 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 5 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 6 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 7 Connection No 3 received data verification result receive packet No 8 Connection No 3 received
296. mpatible function e The reset coil of the LC device is cleared when the power is set from OFF to ON 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function 73 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function This section describes the pulse width measurement function Pulse width measurement function overview The CPU module has a built in pulse width measurement function and it is capable of measuring the pulse width period of a maximum of 4 channels The pulse width period measurement function stores the values of 0 5 us ring counters at the input signal rising edge and falling edge to special data registers This function also stores the difference in the counter values pulse width between the rising edge and the falling edge or stores the difference in the counter values cycle between the previous rising edge and the current rising edge to special data registers in units of 0 5 us For the pulse width measurement function input channel assignments logical switch and measurement mode settings are configured with parameters and measurements are started stopped using the HIOEN instruction Poin tr To use the pulse width measurement function parameter settings and the HIOEN instruction are always required Pulse width measurement specifications This section describes the pulse width measurement function specifications Pulse input signals Pulse width measurements can be used for a maximum of 4 channels Select fro
297. n Stores the number of protocol executions in connection No 8 0 Protocol not executed 1 to 65535 Number of executions Cancels the protocol executed in connection No 8 R W 0 No cancellation instruction 1 Cancellation request set by user 2 Cancellation completed set by system APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 273 Appendix 3 Error Code The CPU module stores error code in special register SD upon detection of an error using the self diagnostics function The error details and cause can be identified by checking the error code The error code can be checked in either of the following ways e Module diagnostics of engineering tool LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Startup e Special register SDO latest self diagnostics error code SD10 to SD25 self diagnostics error code Page 240 Special Register List This section describes errors that may occur in the CPU module and actions to be taken for the errors Error code system All error codes are given in hexadecimal format 4 digits 16 bit unsigned integer The following table lists the error detection type and the error code ranges Error detection type Range Description Detection by the self diagnostics function of each module 0001H to 3FFFH Error code specific to each module such as self diagnostics errors Detected during communication between CPU modules 4000H to 4FFFH CPU module error 7000H to 7FFFH LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual
298. n direction of the output during auto tuning e Because the set value fluctuated during auto tuning in the step response method auto tuning was not executed correctly e The output set value upper limit for auto e Verify that the target setting contents are Error location tuning is lower than the lower limit correct information e A value outside the allowable range was Verify that the target setting contents are Error location set to the PV threshold for auto tuning correct information Ensure that devices occupied by PID e Operation is not performed normally because devices occupied by the PID instruction were overwritten e The auto tuning time is longer than necessary The variation of the measured value is too small compared with the output value e The auto tuning time is longer than necessary e The auto tuning time is longer than necessary e An instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt routine program is used e Modules subsequent to the bus conversion module are using an operand that cannot be used e An instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt routine program is used e The channel specified by instructions using communication functions or built in I O does not have the appropriate parameter Action e Check the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again e Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and the mea
299. n be specified with each CH Shown here are the high speed counter numbers C235 to C255 of FX3 that can be selected with each CH ci o z 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 67 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function OTO JO O JO JOJOJOTOLTOTOLO E LA LL Ly TZ IT LT LT I Ll LL LIN Q I O0O 0QI IDN al ajajf aj aj aj a OJO OJO OJO OJO C C O IJI I A AJ A C C L KR A o cH cr O Change is possible pop 1 O Change is impossible gnment of the high speed counter and the maximum frequency when the FX3 comp e function is valic Shown below is the assignment of the high speed counter and the maximum frequency when the FX3 compatible function is valid O zone ET IE ET IE ET IE ET EI ET IE ET EI ET MAN a CN an EN como he Y OT cm fem SSCs PY ca fer po 1 CT CH3 200 KHz CH5 200 KHz CH1 200 KHz CH7 200 KHz CH3 E 200 KHz 0 C242 LC42 C244 LC44 E A C244 OP LC44 C245 LC45 a A CA B o i o A a zi a A 200 KHz A CH8 C245 OP LC45 CH1 C246 LC46 A 200 KHz 200 KHz a im IMEI ato one ato a EN I cu foarte Cd ce foe ho CT cow caer tom CH A A T gt RT A MENTA A 200 KHz 200 KHz E 200 KHz 200 KHz a E ce LE ee A A A 1 C249 LC49 A A 4 C250 LC50 1 C251 1 edge count LC51 A p C 200 KHz 200 KHz 1 C251 4 edge count LC51 A JB O 50
300. n excess of the upper limit the instructions after the upper limit do not operate Instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time DHSCS Up to 4 instructions can be driven at the same time DHSCR There is no limitation in the number used in programs DHSZ e Configuring high speed comparison tables with parameters When configuring high speed comparison tables with parameters the number of instructions driven at the same time decreases by 1 for each table setting Set up the program and configure the settings within the range calculated with the following equation due to the limitations described above 4 gt Number of driven high speed comparison tables Number of DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions driven at the same time Operation when the all output disable flag SM8034 is ON When the all output disable flag SM8034 is turned ON the outputs that were turned ON by high speed comparison tables high speed comparison instructions or multi point output high speed tables are turned OFF The image remains ON If SM8034 is turned OFF the outputs that were turned OFF return to the original state For high speed comparison tables and high speed comparison instructions high speed counters do not stop and comparison processing is performed even when SM8034 is ON and the image turns ON if there is a match The actual output is output when SM8034 is OFF For multi point output high speed comparison tables the high spee
301. n is the same as for the DHSCR instruction For information on the DHSCR instruction refer to LLTIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks MSelf reset When comparison value 1 matches the current value of the set high speed counter the current value becomes the preset value When the preset value is set by self reset comparison processing is not performed Operation is the same as self reset for the DHSCR instruction For information on the DHSCR instruction refer to LAMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Zone Compare Based on the current high speed counter value comparison value 1 and comparison value 3 one of the three output devices from the head output device will be set The rest are reset Set Comparison value 1 gt Current value Head output device Comparison value 1 lt Current value lt Comparison value 2 Head output device 1 Current value gt Comparison value 2 Head output device 2 Operation is the same as for the DHSZ instruction For information on zone comparison and DHSZ instruction refer to LLIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Comparison start stop for high speed comparison table High speed comparison tables cannot execute comparison by setting the parameter alone The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop the high speed comparis
302. n modules bus conversion module and connector conversion module Battery WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION O Do not bundle the power line control line and communication cables together with or lay them close to the main circuit high voltage line load line or power line As a guideline lay the power line control line and connection cables at least 100 mm 3 94 away from the main circuit high voltage line load line or power line Noise may cause malfunctions STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING O Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electric shock or malfunctions O Before modifying the program in mid operation forcing output running or stopping the PLC read this manual and the associated manuals carefully and ensure complete safety An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents O Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices such as an engineering tool and a GOT at the same time Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program O Use the battery for memory backup in conformance to the FX5 User s Manual Hardware Use the battery for the specified purpose only Connect the battery correctly Do not charge disassemble heat put in fire short circuit connect reversely weld swallow or burn the battery or apply excessive force vibration impact drop etc to the battery Do not store or us
303. n start SM5615 Built in positioning remaining distance operation start OFF Remaining distance operation standby R W axis 4 ON Remaining distance operation start SM5628 Built in positioning pulse output stop command axis 1 OFF Pulse output is not stopped R W ON Pulse output immediate stop SM5629 Built in positioning pulse output stop command axis 2 OFF Pulse output is not stopped R W ON Pulse output immediate stop SM5630 Built in positioning pulse output stop command axis 3 OFF Pulse output is not stopped R W ON Pulse output immediate stop SM5631 Built in positioning pulse output stop command axis 4 OFF Pulse output is not stopped R W ON Pulse output immediate stop SM5644 Built in positioning pulse decelerates stop command axis OFF Pulse output is not stopped R W 1 With remaining distance operation ON Pulse output decelerates stop APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List No SM5645 SM5646 SM5647 SM5660 SM5661 SM5662 SM5663 SM5676 SM5677 SM5678 SM5679 SM5772 SM5773 SM5774 SM5775 SM5804 SM5805 SM5806 SM5807 SM5820 SM5821 SM5822 SM5823 SM5868 SM5869 SM5870 SM587 1 Description Peet R Pulse output is not stopped ON Pulse output decelerates stop OFF Pulse output is not stopped ON Pulse output decelerates stop Built in positioning pulse decelerates stop command axis OFF Pulse output is not stopped 4 With remaining distance operation
304. nal A Al Ad Ag Ad AD Ab ag AIG All Ald Ald Ald ALS ATG Al General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input General purpose Input Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default General Interrupt Pulse Set the function to be used e General purpose Input General purpose Catch Set to Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch e Interrupt Rising Input e Interrupt Falling e Interrupt Rising Falling e Interrupt Rising Pulse Catch Poj oint Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 19 4 Pulse Catch Function 85 Operation of pulse catch function Operation of the pulse catch function is explained below Basic operation of pulse catch function The corresponding input device is turned ON for the duration of the scan following the scan where the pulse signal is detected The input device is turned OFF at the END instruction Operation when input signal is used as pulse catch function The rising edge of the external input signal X0 is detected and the input device is turned ON only during the following scan Step 0 gt END Step0 _ END Step 0
305. nal clock counts up down by 1 MHz clock External input is not used E Maximum frequency The maximum frequency that each type of counter can count is as follows For details concerning maximum frequency by input assignment refer to L Page 120 Input assignment wise maximum frequency for high speed counters 1 phase 1 input counter S W 200 KHz 1 phase 1 input counter H W 200 KHz 1 phase 2 input counter 200 KHz 2 phase 2 input counter 1 edge count 200 KHz 2 phase 2 input counter 2 edge count 100 KHz 2 phase 2 input counter 4 edge count 50 KHz Internal clock 1 MHz fixed 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 11 19 1 High speed Counter Function T Precautions e The input circuit of the CPU module has restrictions for maximum frequency FX5U 32MO FX5UC 32MO FX5U 64MO FX5U 80MO Maximum frequency e If input response time is set maximum frequency is affected by the setting value Under ordinary circumstances the internal clock counts at 1 MHz fixed during operation Matched output performance If output is to YO to Y17 using high speed comparison instructions DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instruction high speed comparison table or multiple point output high speed comparison table time from pulse input gt comparison of count value match gt output to Y is 5 us input response time If output is to Y20 or subsequent time from pulse input to output is affected by communication and user interrupt Count rang
306. nce At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At interrupt occurrence At interrupt occurrence At interrupt information occurrence and system configuration information APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code 285 Error code 3694 H 36A1H 36A2H 36A3H 36A4H 36B1H 36B2H 36B3H 36B4H 36FOH 3780H 3781H 286 Axis 4 positioning table shift error table shift Axis 1 interpolation operation error no counterpart axis Axis 2 interpolation Operation error no counterpart axis Axis 3 interpolation operation error no counterpart axis Axis 4 interpolation operation error no counterpart axis Axis 1 interpolation operation error reference counterpart axis error Axis 2 interpolation operation error reference counterpart axis error Axis 3 interpolation operation error reference counterpart axis error Axis 4 interpolation operation error reference counterpart axis error ABS sum error High speed comparison table maximum excess error Preset value range outside error
307. nction module Input modules extension cable type Output modules extension cable type Bus conversion module extension cable type and Intelligent function modules Input modules extension connector type Output modules extension connector type Input output modules Bus conversion module extension connector type and Connector conversion module extension connector type Generic term for input modules output modules Input output modules and powered input output modules Generic term for Input modules extension cable type and Input modules extension connector type Generic term for FX5 8EX ES and FX5 16EX ES Terms e Input module extension connector type Output module e Output module extension cable type e Output module extension connector type Input output modules Powered input output module Extension power supply module e FX5 extension power supply module e FX3 extension power supply module Intelligent module Intelligent function module e FX5 intelligent function module e FX3 intelligent function module Simple motion module Expansion board e Communication board Expansion adapter e Communication adapter e Analog adapter Bus conversion module e Bus conversion module extension cable type e Bus conversion module extension connector type Battery SD memory card Peripheral device GOT MSoftware packages Engineering tool GX Works3 Manuals User s manual e User s manual Startup
308. nd lower positioning limits Note that when the CPU module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the CPU module occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machine operation in such a case Note that the output current of the 24 V DC service power supply varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension modules If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machine operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay or transistor of an output circuit the output might stay on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machine operation O Construct an interlock circuit in the program to ensure safe operation for the whole system when executing control for data change of the PLC in operation Read the manual thoroughly and ensure complete safety before executing other controls for program change parameter change forced output and operation status change of the PLC in operation Otherwise the machine may be damaged and accidents may occur due to erroneous operations O In an outpu
309. ndard Functions Function Blocks PWM output function execution procedure The procedure for executing the PWM output function is explained below 1 Check the specifications of PWM output Check specifications such as pulse output performance of PWM output Page 193 PWM output specifications 2 Connect the CPU module to the external device For details on wiring to external devices refer to the following manual L IMELSEC iQ F FX5U User s Manual Hardware LLIMELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware 3 Set the parameters Set the output destination cycle pulse width output pulse logic etc of the PWM in parameters gt Page 195 PWM output parameters 4 Create the program Create the program for using PWM output 5 Run the program 194 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function PWM output parameters This section explains the PWM output parameters Set the PWM output parameters in GX Works3 Outline of parameters PWM output parameters are output destination pulse width cycle unit output pulse logic pulse width and period Parameter setting This section explains how to set the PWM output parameters Set the output destination pulse width cycle unit output pulse logic pulse width period etc of the channel to be used O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Output Function gt PWM gt Detail Setting Window
310. ned below e Personal computer antitheft measures using a wire lock etc e Management of personal computer users deletion of unwanted accounts strict control of login information introduction of fingerprint authentication etc Also when a personal computer registered with a security key malfunctions locked project data cannot be accessed viewed or edited Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any loss that may occur as a result of this with the customer other individuals or organizations For this reason the customer must adopt sufficient measures as explained below e Export registered security keys and import them into another personal computer e Store files containing exported security keys in a safe location 18 SECURITY FUNCTIONS 113 19 BUILT IN 1 0 FUNCTION The built in input output 1 0 function of the CPU module is explained below Each respective function is set by parameters in GX Works3 Function Reference High speed counter function Page 124 Pulse density measurement mode Page 126 Rotational speed measurement mode Page 129 FX3 compatible high speed counter function Page 165 Pulse width measurement function Page 174 Pulse catch function Pulse catch function Page 184 FX3 compatible pulse catch function Page 188 General purpose input functions Page 191 PWM function Page 193 Built in positioning function MELSEC Q F FX5 User s Manual Positioning Control 19 1 High spe
311. nels A list of special relays by high speed counter channel is provided below R W Read or Write R Read only Function Je SM4505 High speed counter operation CH6 SM4506 High speed counter operation CH7 SM4507 High speed counter operation CH8 SM4515 SM4518 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH3 SM4519 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH4 SM4520 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH5 SM4521 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH6 SM4522 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH7 SM4523 High speed counter pulse density Rotation speed measurement CH8 SM4531 SM4532 High speed counter overflow CH1 Has occurred Has not occurred OFF R W SM4533 High speed counter overflow CH2 SM4534 High speed counter overflow CH3 SM4535 High speed counter overflow CH4 SM4547 SM4548 High speed counter underflow CH1 Has occurred Has not occurred OFF R W SM4555 High speed counter underflow CH8 SM4563 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 1 High speed Counter Function 37 138 SM4564 SM4565 SM4566 SM4567 SM4568 SM4569 SM4570 SM4571 SM4572 to SM4579 SM4580 SM4581 SM4582 SM4583 SM4584 SM4585 SM4586 SM4587 SM4588 to SM4595 SM4596 SM4597 SM4598 SM4599 SM4600 SM4601 SM4602 SM4603 SM4604 to SM4611 SM4612 SM4613 SM4614 SM4615 SM4616 SM4617
312. nfigured status when the high speed counter starts nter ring length setting These devices enable or disable the ring length setting for ring counters ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4644 SM4645 SM4646 SM4647 SM4648 SM4649 SM4650 SM4651 144 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Enables the ring length setting for a ring counter Disables the ring length setting for a ring counter Counts in the range of 0 to ring length counter 1 Counts in the range of 2147483648 to 2147483647 These devices do not operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e When ON by the user e When OFF by the user e When set to enabled with parameters e When set to disabled with parameters e Cannot be modified while the high speed counter is operating Operates in the configured status when the high speed counter starts e The ring length setting is disabled if the pulse density measurement mode or rotational speed measurement mode is selected If these devices are turned on when a high speed counter s current value is out of the ring length range the current value when the high speed counter is operated is as follows e Lower than lower limit value gt Lower limit value e Higher than u
313. nformation category code The following codes are stored into the information category code 0 N A 1 Program position information 2 Drive number and file name 3 Annunciator number 4 Parameter information 5 System configuration information SD113 to SD143 Detailed information 2 e Detailed information 2 corresponding to the error code SDO is stored e There are four types of information to be stored as shown in the following figures e The type of detailed information 2 can be obtained using SD112 the value of the Detailed information 2 information category code stored in SD112 corresponds to the following figures 2 to 5 2 Drive number and file name b15 bO b15 b2 b1b0 SD113 With or without specification en 1st character File name 2nd character 3rd character File name first 8 characters of 4th character Unicode character 5th character string 6th character 7th character 8th character 3 Annunciator number b15 b0 b15 b1 b0 SD114 Annunciator No 4 Parameter information b15 __b7 b6 b5 b4b3 b2 b1 b0 SD113 With or without specification SD114 Parameter storage destination Parameter storage destination SD1 15 Module position al Parameter type SD116 Module position SD117 Network No Parameter No SD118 Station No Network No SD119 Station No SD120 System information 2 SD memory card SD121 4 Data ey SD122 b15 b4 b3 b0 SD123 Module p
314. ng completed SD10692 Predefined protocol ready 0 R 1 Ready SD10710 Predefined protocol setting data error information protocol When a protocol setting data error is detected stores the protocol R number number where the error was detected SD10711 Predefined protocol setting data error information setting 0 is stored if an error is detected in the packet setting or element type setting 1 is stored if an error is detected in the protocol detailed setting SD10712 Predefined protocol setting data error information packet When an error is detected in the protocol setting data stores the R number packet number that detected the error SD10713 Predefined protocol setting data error information Element When an error is detected in the protocol setting data stores the R number element number where the error was detected 264 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD10714 SD10722 SD10723 SD10724 SD10725 SD10740 SD10742 SD10743 SD10744 SD10745 SD10746 SD10747 SD10748 SD10749 SD10750 SD10751 SD10752 SD10753 SD10754 SD10755 SD10756 SD10757 Connection No 1 protocol execution status Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 1 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 2 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive packet No 3 Connection No 1 received data verification result receive pack
315. ng zero point signal count start axis 3 OFF Near point DOG backward end R W ON Near point DOG forward end Built in positioning zero point signal count start axis 4 OFF Near point DOG backward end R W ON Near point DOG forward end Built in positioning pulse decelerates stop command axis 2 With remaining distance operation Built in positioning pulse decelerates stop command axis 3 With remaining distance operation APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 231 Built in analog The special relays for built in analog are shown below R Read only R W Read Write 232 SM6020 CH1 A D conversion completed flag OFF A D conversion not completed R ON A D conversion completed SM6021 CH1 A D conversion enable disable setting OFF A D conversion enable R W ON A D conversion disable SM6022 CH1 Over scaling detection flag OFF No over scaling R ON Over Scaling SM6024 CH1 Over scaling over detection setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6025 CH1 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag OFF Reset not completed R ON Reset completed SM6026 CH1 Maximum value reset request OFF No reset request R ON Reset request SM6027 CH1 Minimum value reset request OFF No reset request R ON Reset request SM6028 CH1 A D scaling enable disable setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6029 CH1 Digital clipping enable disable setting OFF Enable R W ON Disable SM6031 CH1 Warning output flag Process alarm upper limit OFF No
316. ngineering tool method Refer to the following LIGX Works3 Operating Manual Method using external devices that use SLMP Execute by SLMP command For details on commands refer to the following manual LTIMELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual SLMP e Turns ON the PAUSE contact SM204 when executing the END process of the scan that has received the remote PAUSE command When a PAUSE contact is turned ON and the next scan is executed up to the END process the CPU module enters the PAUSE status and operation is stopped e When a remote RUN command is received once again an operation of the sequence program is executed from step 0 StepO gt END Step 0 gt END StepO0 gt ON StepO gt END Remote PAUSE command or Remote RUN command OFF e i ON 2 SM204 OFF EN 0 Turns ON when the PAUSE conditions are established RUN PAUSE status RUN PAUSE i PAUSED 11 REMOTE OPERATION 11 2 Remote PAUSE Precautions When keeping in forced ON or OFF status in advance When keeping in forced ON or OFF status in advance interlock using the PAUSE contact SM204 M20 AS Y70 The ON OFF status of Y70 is determined by the ON OFF status of M20 in PAUSE status XO SM204 p fp lt Y71 Tums OFF in PAUSE status MO Y72 gt Tums ON in PAUSE status SM204 11 3 Remote RESET This is an operation to reset the CPU module by an external operation when t
317. nimum value The minimum value of the pulse width is stored e When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from the rising edge up to the falling edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from the falling edge up to the rising edge e The minimum value of the pulse width can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows H2 7H SD5049 SD5048 SD5069 SD5068 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value SD5029 SD5028 SD5089 SD5088 ARA Period latest value The latest value of the period is stored e When logic switching is set to positive logic the difference from the previous rising edge up to the latest rising edge e When logic switching is set to negative logic the difference from the previous falling edge up to the latest falling edge e The latest value of the period can be changed only by the HCMOV instruction mCorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SD5051 SD5050 SD5071 SD5070 Update timing clear timing Same as the rising edge ring counter value Page 180 Rising edge ring counter value SD5031 SD5030 SD5091 SD5090 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 81 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function Period maximum value The maximum value of the p
318. nimum value High order CH3 SD5070 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle latest R W CH3 value CH3 SD5071 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value High order CH3 SD5072 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle maximum R W order CH3 value CH3 SD5073 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value High order CH3 SD5074 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle minimum R W order CH3 value CH3 SD5075 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value High order CH3 SD5080 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement rising ring R W order CH4 counter value CH4 SD5081 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value High order CH4 252 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD5082 SD5083 SD5084 SD5085 SD5086 SD5087 SD5088 SD5089 SD5090 SD5091 SD5092 SD5093 SD5094 SD5095 SD5300 SD5301 SD5302 SD5303 SD5304 SD5305 SD5306 SD5307 SD5316 SD5317 SD5318 SD5319 SD5320 SD5321 SD5322 SD5323 SD5332 SD5333 SD5334 SD5335 SD5336 SD5337 SD5338 SD5339 CO Y Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement falling ring o
319. ning SM402 Initial pulse SM402 Initial pulse X010 PID control is started after auto tuning X010 PID control is started after auto tuning X011 PID control is started without auto tuning M4 PID is executed STO Heater operation cycle M4 PID is executed M4 lt ST0 D502 STO lt D502 MOV RST SM6021 RST D502 MOV SET SET MOV MOV SET MOV MOV MOV MOV K 50 SET X011 PID control is started without auto tuning MON D500 SD6022 D510 D502 _ OUTHS STO K2000 STO Auto tuning is executed The target value is set to 50 C The sampling time is set to 500 ms The operation direction is set to backward operation PID instruction The upper and lower limits of initial setting output value is set to valid The output value upper limit is set to ON for 2 sec The output value lower limit is set to ON for O sec The auto tuning mode is set to limit cycle method The PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV is set to 5 0 C The output value upper limit ULV is set to ON for 1 8 sec The output value lower limit LLV is set to ON for 0 sec The wait setting parameter kW from the end of tuning cycle to PID control start is set to 50 wait is not provided Auto tuning initial setting Auto tuning is started O Enable CH1 SM6021 1 Disable The built in analog is set to used CH CH2 SM6061 The PID output is initialized
320. nly on either one 0 T ecautions The precautions on the boot operation are explained below e The parameter file existing on the module of the transfer destination is overwritten when a parameter file is set to the boot file Further if a parameter file is stored in the SD memory card but not set to the boot file the operation will follow the parameter file on the module e Note that the model of the program written on the SD memory card program specified in the boot file settings and the model of the CPU module must be the same 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 106 15 2 Boot Operation 16 DEvICE LABEL ACCESS SERVICE PROCESSING SETTING This is a function to optionally designate the frequency of execution of the service process that is carried out by the END process in the parameter Improvement of communication response with peripheral equipment and extension of scan time by the service process can be controlled by service process setting function With this building an optimal service process environment on the system is possible Bs bout device label access service processing Device label access service processing is a response process for the request statement from peripheral equipment that occurs asynchronously with the scan process A process of Interpretation of Request statement Internal processing based on the request gt Creating response statement for 1 request statement The execution timing o
321. normal mode 0 0 eee eee eee ees 124 High speed counter pulse density measurement mode 00 ee eee eee 126 High speed counter rotational speed measurement mMode 20 eee eee 129 High speed comparison table 0 0 cc eee eee ee eee eens 132 Multiple point output high speed comparison tables 0 0 ee ee eens 134 Speblal tela NS cosas ooo eee eee eee oe Ge eee byte gue sae rer R S ee Bb 137 Special relay details 2242244442 e 0006 2244 43965688 6 h5446S S448 ca05 a 140 Sp cial registers SSA 148 Special register deals sra raros a 152 Special relays special registers capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction 161 Precautions when using high speed COUNterS ee ee eee eens 163 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function 0 000 ce es 165 FX3 compatible high speed counter function overview 2 0 0 eee eee 165 How to start stop the high speed counter using the LC device 0 0 cc ee ne 165 The elements of the composition of the LC device 0 2 anaana aaaea 166 The comparison between the UDCNTF instruction and HIOEN instruction o o 166 Assignment for FX3 compatible high speed counters 0 naa aaa cc eee eee 167 FX3 compatible high speed counter setting 0 0 0 ee ee eens 169 FX3 compatible high speed counter 169 Special relay Us 22 psoe liar coo sete tee ee eee net ras ae ses 171 S
322. ns e Start the positioning within specifications Detailed Diagnostic information timing Error location At END information instruction and system execution configuration information Error location At END information instruction and system execution configuration information Error location At END information instruction and system execution configuration information Error location At END information instruction and system execution configuration information Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration instruction information execution Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration instruction information execution Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration instruction information execution Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration instruction information execution Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration interrupt information occurrence Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration interrupt information occurrence Error location At END information instruction and system execution at configuration interrupt information occurrence APPENDIX 283 Appendix 3 Error Code Error code 3634H Axis 4 positioning address error 3641H Axis 1 command speed error
323. ns ranges and data types Applicable devices 4 Only D SD R can be used Bain a e Once the target value s1 measured value s2 and PID parameters s3 to s3 6 are set and the program is executed the operation result MV is transferred to the output value d at every sampling time The sampling time is specified by s3 Command input e en ES Output value MV Parameters Measured value PV Target value SV 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 3 How to Use PID Instruction Set item Set item Description Occupie d points s1 Target value The target value SV is set 1 point SV The PID instruction does not change the settings Caution on using the auto tuning limit cycle method If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value in the PID control it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added and then store the actual target value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF s2 Measured value This is the input value of the PID operation 1 point PV It is necessary to read a normal measurement data before the execution of the PID operation for the measurement value of PID PV If an input value from an analog input is used for the PID operation use caution to its conversion time s3 Parameter PID control 25 points 25 devices are occupied from the head device specified in s3 Auto tuning In the limit cycle 1 29 points 29 devices are occupied from the head dev
324. nted 1 past maximum negative value e Does not operate when ring length setting is enabled e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Underflow occurs This is updated with the END processing When the FX3 When OFF by the user compatible high speed counter function is valid the updating is made also e Power ON reset when UDCNTF instruction is executed ON e STOP PAUSE gt RUN e SM50 turned ON 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 141 nter 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input count direction monitor Device for monitoring counter direction when using 1 phase 2 input 2 phase 2 input counter ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM4564 SM4565 SM4566 SM4567 SM4568 SM4569 SM4570 SM4571 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows High speed counter counting in direction whereby current value is reduced High speed counter counting in direction whereby current value is increased Down counting Up counting t These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows Down counting This is updated with the END processing When the FX3 e Up counting When the FX3 compatible high speed counter funct
325. nter preset input logic CH6 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4602 High speed counter preset input logic CH7 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4603 High speed counter preset input logic CH8 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4612 High speed counter preset input comparison CH1 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4613 High speed counter preset input comparison CH2 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4614 High speed counter preset input comparison CH3 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4615 High speed counter preset input comparison CH4 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4616 High speed counter preset input comparison CH5 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4617 High speed counter preset input comparison CH6 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4618 High speed counter preset input comparison CH7 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4619 High speed counter preset input comparison CH8 OFF Disabled R W ON Enabled SM4628 High speed counter enable input logic CH1 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4629 High speed counter enable input logic CH2 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4630 High speed counter enable input logic CH3 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4631 High speed counter enable input logic CH4 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4632 High speed counter enable input logic CH5 OFF Positive logic R W ON Negative logic SM4633 High speed counter enable input logic CH6
326. nter reset e When the RST CU instruction is executed CO coil is also turned OFF If the execution conditions for the OUT CO instruction are ON after the RST CO instruction is executed the CO coil is turned ON when the OUT CT instruction is executed and the current value is updated count value 1 MO K10 Co CO r RST CO In the example circuit given above the CO coil is turned ON by MO turning OFF ON and the current value is updated When CO counts up the CO contact turns ON and current value of CO is cleared by execution of the RST CO instruction The CO coil is also turned OFF at this time If MO is ON for the next scan the CO coil turns OFF gt 0N when the OUT CO instruction is executed so the current value is updated Current value becomes 1 END OUT CO RST CO END OUT CO RST CO END Program ON me OFF ON CO coil Current value update be ae Current value is updated since turning ON the the coil of CO turns OFF gt 0N contact RST CO OFF Count value cleared the contact turned OFF 21 DEVICES 21 2 User Devices 21 3 To handle this arrange so that CO coil is not turned OFF while OUT CO instruction execution condition MO is ON by inserting the NC contact execution condition of the OUT CO instruction in the execution condition of the RST CO instruction as shown by the following circuit example MO K10 w Co MO RST CO e When a counter is reset by the RST instruction it cannot count until the RST instru
327. nterrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled 234 APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List cription SM8059 10010 disable Counter interrupt disable OFF Interrupt enabled ON Interrupt disabled SM8063 Serial communication error ch1 OFF No error ON Error SM8067 Operation error OFF No error ON Error No error FF SM8090 Block comparison signal Block comparison signal ON when all comparison results are ON R W R R SM8068 Operation error latch OFF No error R ON Error latch i i PR SM8099 High speed ring counter OFF High speed ring counter stop R W ON High speed ring counter start SM8151 Inverter communication ch1 ON during inverter communication R R R R ication R R R R i R W SM8154 IVBWR instruction error ch1 OFF No error ON Error SM8156 Inverter communication ch2 ON during inverter communication SM8157 Inverter communication error ch2 OFF ON Error SM8158 Inverter communication error latch ch2 OFF No error ON Error latch SM8159 IVBWR instruction error ch2 OFF No error ON Error SM8161 8 bit operation mode OFF 16 bit operation mode ON 8 bit operation mode SM8168 SMOV data mode BIN gt BCD conversion will not be performed if a SMOV instruction R W is executed after turning on SM8168 IW IW IW i BET SM8152 Inverter communication error ch1 OFF No error ON Error SM8153 Inverter communication error latch ch1 OFF No error ON Error latch a ae B
328. nu LAGX Works3 Operating Manual Using SM SD The values stored in SD210 clock data to SD216 clock data are written to the CPU module after END processing execution of scan when SM210 clock data set request is changed from OFF gt 0N If the data from SD210 to SD216 is out of the valid range SM211 clock data set error is turned ON the values from SD210 to SD216 are not written in the CPU module END END T Writes the SD210 to SD216 clock data to the CPU module q ao ON SM210 OFF ON lt 7 If the SD210 to SD216 clock data is out of the range SM211 Using instructions Writes the clock data to the CPU module using the TWR P instruction QAMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 6 1 Time Setting Reading clock data There are the following methods to read clock data e Using SM SD e Using instructions Using SM SD Clock data is read to SD210 to SD216 when SM213 clock data read request is turned ON Using instructions Clock data is read from the CPU module using the TRD P instruction LLIMELSEC Q F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Precautions The following describes precautions when setting the time When setting the clock for the first time The clock is not set when the product is shipped Correcting the clock data Before correcting any part of the clock data y
329. number of output pulse current value monitor is fixed at 0 e The number of output pulse current value monitor can be changed even while pulses are being output 1 98 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function Cautions when using the PWM function e Set the pulse width to a value 2 us more and period to a value 5 us more e Set the value so that pulse width lt period e The PWM instruction is not executed when a channel number not selected for PWM output in parameters setting is specified by the PWM instruction Examples of program An example of a program using the PWM function is explained below ameter setting This program assumes that parameters are set as follows CH2 CH3 and CH4 need not be set Output destination YO Output pulse logic Negative logic Output from OFF Pulse width 50 ms Cycle 60 ms An operation diagram and program are shown below Operation diagram XO input YO lt Delay time 50 ms PWM output PWM output start 1 pulse output 10 ms 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function 199 Program e Example of program for PWM output using the HIOEN instruction SM400 SM402 DHCMOV SD5300 KO o o o oo o o Interrupt pointer 10 SM400 SM402 DHCMOV SD5300 KO a o Interrupt pointer lO 200 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function Interrupt program is permitted The number of pulses to be output is set YO is reset
330. o detect the error Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system operates safely even in such a case Check method of error This section describes the check methods when error occurs Check method using special relay and special register When the CPU module detects an error it turns SMO Latest Self diagnostics error annunciator on included and SM1 Latest Self diagnostics error annunciator on not included on and stores the error code corresponding to the error definition in SDO diagnostics error If multiple errors are detected the latest error code is stored in SDO Use SMO SM1 and SDO on the program for the CPU module or mechanical interlock Besides the error code up to 16 pieces for the error contents being currently generated will be stored into SD10 Self diagnostics error code to SD25 Self diagnostics error code The error code for the error content of 17th piece on and after will not be stored Check method using LED The error occurrence conditions can be checked through the lighting conditions of ERR LED LLIMELSEC Q F FX5U User s Manual Hardware L TIMELSEC iQ F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware Check method using the engineering tool The error being currently generated can be checked in the Module diagnostics window RAGX Works3 Operating Manual MExisting errors Up to 16 errors description of errors currently existing in the CPU mod
331. ocks Edited contents spanning multiple portions can be written to the CPU module at once Interrupt function Multiple interrupt function When an interrupt occurs while an interrupt program triggered by Page 53 another cause is running stops the program if its priority is lower than that of the new interrupt and runs the higher priority program whenever its execution condition is satisfied PID control function Performs PID control by the PID control instruction Page 55 Constant scan Keeps the scan time constant and executes program repeatedly Page 84 Remote operation Remote RUN STOP Changes the CPU module status to the RUN STOP PAUSE status Page 86 Remote PAUSE externally while the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module is in RUN status Remote RESET Resets the CPU module externally while the CPU module is in the STOP status Device label memory area setting Sets the capacity of each area in the device label memory Page 92 Initial device value setting Sets the initial values of devices used in the program directly not via Page 97 the program to the devices Latch function Holds the contents of the device and label of the CPU module when Page 99 the power is turned ON etc Memory card function SD memory card forced Makes the SD memory card unavailable without turning OFF the Page 103 stop power even when the function accessing the SD memory card is executed Boot operation Transfers the file stored in the SD
332. odule specification error Intelligent function module specification error Intelligent function module specification error APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code e The specified file capacity cannot be obtained e Review the specified file capacity and execute the request again e Execute again after a while e The specified device name cannot be handled e Check the specified device name e The specified device No is outside the range e The CPU module cannot handle the specified device e Check the specified device No e Check the device assignment of the CPU module e Check the specified device name e The request contents cannot be executed in the specified intelligent function module e Check whether the specified module is the intelligent function module having the buffer memory e The access range exceeds the buffer memory range of the specified intelligent function module e Check the start address and access number of points and access within the range that exists in the intelligent function module e The specified intelligent function module cannot be accessed e Check that the specified intelligent function module is operating normally e Check the specified module for a hardware fault e The intelligent function module does not exist in the specified position e Check the I O number of the specified intelligent function module Error code 4053H 4060H 4080H 4081H 408BH 4121H 412
333. of the maximum error described above may cause a problem In such a case execute the PID instruction in the constant scan mode or program it in a timer interrupt routine e When the sampling time TS is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC A PID operation error occurs however when PID operation is executed the sampling time TS is equal to the operation cycle of the PLC In such a case use the PID instruction in a timer interrupt and clear s3 7 just before executing the PID instruction Operation setting S3 1 Forward operation backward operation Set the PID control direction forward or backward e During auto tuning for the limit cycle method It is necessary to set the PID control direction forward or backward for auto tuning e During auto tuning for the step response method The PID control direction forward or backward is not required as the direction is automatically set when auto tuning is complete Operation setting S3 1 b0 Operation Forward As the measured value PV becomes larger than the target value Temperature operation SV the output MV increases p bO OFF For example cooling is a forward operation Measured value PV Target value SV Time Backward As the measured value PV becomes smaller than the target value Temperature operation SV the output MV increases p bO 0N For example heating is a backward operation Target value SV Measured value PV Time 9 PID CON
334. oin tr If 17 or more annunciator s are ON the numbers are not stored in SD64 to SD79 21 DEVICES 21 2 User Devices 207 How to turn annunciator F OFF Annunciators F are turned OFF by the following instruction Instruction Application RST FO instruction Used to turn OFF annunciator F number set by SET FO instruction BKRST instruction Used to turn a specified range of annunciator F numbers OFF in a batch Poi oint You can turn OFF by OUT FO as well but Processing when annunciator F is OFF described below is not carried out even if annunciator numbers are turned OFF by OUT FO instruction If annunciator F numbers are turned OFF by OUT FO instruction you must execute the RST FO BKRST instruction given above m Processing when annunciator F is OFF Data stored in the special register becomes as follows e Data stored in SD62 to SD79 when RST FO instruction or BKRST instruction is executed 1 Annunciator F numbers specified in the RST FO instruction or the BKRST instruction are erased and annunciator F numbers stored subsequent to those erased are moved up 2 If annunciator F numbers stored in SD64 are turned OFF new annunciator F numbers stored in SD64 are stored in SD62 3 Decrements contents of SD63 by 1 If SD63 is 0 SM62 is turned OFF SET F50 SET F25 SET F1023 RST F25 es FO a a sD62 0 50 Seef o 1 2 SD64 n SD65 0 gt SD66 SD67 0 sora 0 a a Link special relay SB
335. ol 0 0 ooo 55 Hexadecimal o 221 A o 219 Hexadecimal constant H 221 Priority for interrupt cause o 220 High speed comparison table 132 PURE CAIN soria rar whew a da 184 High speed counter 114 Pulse width measurement 174 High speed counter normal mode 124 PWI ua o nd oa dae a 193 High speed counter pulse density measurement mode 126 R High speed counter rotational speed measurement mode 129 Real constant E o ooooooo 221 High speed timer o o o oo ooo oo 209 Remote Operati0N o ooooo 86 Remote PAUSE 0 0002 eee ees 88 298 Remote RESET 89 Remote RUN 00 00 ooo ooo 86 Remote STOP o oooooooooooooooo o 86 Retentive timer ST o o 209 Routine timer o o ooooooooo oo 209 RUN status 0 0 0 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee 35 S Scan execution type prograM 21 Scan monitoring function 44 Scan ME aii mr ween a dw eww Ss 18 Scan time monitoring time setting 44 SD memory card o ooo ooooooooooo 38 SD memory card forced stop 103 Security fUnctiON o oooooooooo 113 Security key authentication 113 Special register SD 215 Special relay SM o o o o oooo o 215 Stand by type program
336. on IVBWR instruction error ch2 OFF No error R ON Error Inverter communication ch3 OFF No communication R ON Communication IVBWR instruction error ch3 OFF No error R ON Error Inverter communication ch4 OFF No communication R ON Communication IVBWR instruction error ch4 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Master station OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 1 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 2 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 3 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 4 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 5 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 6 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication error Slave station No 7 OFF No error R ON Error Data communication in execution OFF Data communication in execution R ON Data communication in nonexecution Station No setting SD latch enabled OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled Slave station total number setting SD latch enabled OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 239 Appendix 2 Special Register List Diagnostic information The special register for diagnostic information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SDO This register stores the latest self diagnosis error code SD1 Th
337. on equivalent to C241 e LC44 Operation equivalent to C244 e LC46 Operation equivalent to C246 e LC47 Operation equivalent to C247 e LC49 Operation equivalent to C249 e LC51 Operation equivalent to C251 e LC52 Operation equivalent to C252 e LC54 Operation equivalent to C254 CH2 e LC36 Operation equivalent to C236 e LC37 Operation equivalent to C237 e LC42 Operation equivalent to C242 I wm e LC45 Operation equivalent to C245 CH4 LC38 Operation equivalent to C238 e LC48 Operation equivalent to C248 e LC50 Operation equivalent to C250 e LC53 Operation equivalent to C253 e LC55 Operation equivalent to C255 e LC48 Operation equivalent to C248 OP e LC53 Operation equivalent to C253 0P e LC39 Operation equivalent to C239 e LC43 Operation equivalent to C243 CH6 LC40 Operation equivalent to C240 CH7 LC44 Operation equivalent to C244 OP e LC54 Operation equivalent to C254 OP CH8 LC45 Operation equivalent to C245 Not available for FX3 compatible high speed counters i i E Set pulse input mode 2 Phase 1 Multiple e 2 Phase 4 Multiple CH5 Operation Mode Pulse Input Mode 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function 170 Preset Input Enable Disable Not available for FX3 compatible high speed counters
338. on files e Parameter files e Files that contain device comments etc Device label memory Data areas for internal devices labels etc are located in this memory SD memory card This is for storing files that contain device comments etc and folders and files that are created by SD memory card functions ata memory The following files are stored in data memory O N Program Program file 1 Mbytes FB files 16 Up to 15 for user D 00 1 Mbytes 1 Mbytes Restored information Restored information files Parameters Parameter files common to system CPU parameter file Module parameter file Remote password Global label setting file Module extension parameter for protocol setting 2 Device initial values file Comments Device comment file 2 Mbytes Device label memory Device label memory has the following areas Device label memory standard 96 Kbytes R W SW labels and latch labels can be placed in this memory in variable lengths R and W can be backed up in the event of a power interruption only when the optional battery is installed Also latch label capacity can be increased when the battery is installed Device label memory fast 24 Kbytes Bit devices T ST C LC D Z LZ labels and latch labels can be placed in this memory in variable lengths For saving device label memory 25 Kbytes This memory is for saving latch devices and devices in fast area that require a latch in
339. on information The information for the system configuration such as I O No is indicated 1 The step No which is displayed in the program position information is the step No that is counted from the head of the file It might be sometimes different from the step No of the program which is displayed in error jump of engineering tool Operation when an error occurs There are two types of errors continuation errors and stop errors Stop error If a stop error occurs the CPU module stops its operation and the operating state will be in STOP Modules can communicate with the CPU module even after a stop error occurs in the CPU module Continuation error If a continuation error occurs the CPU module continues its operation The operating state will remain the same APPENDIX 274 Appendix 3 Error Code How to clear errors Continuation errors can be cleared Page 112 Error Clear List of error codes Self diagnostics error codes of the CPU module 1000H to 3FFFH The following table lists the error codes detected by the self diagnostics function of the CPU module Error details and cause Detailed Diagnostic information timing Error code 1080H 1090H 1130H 1800H 1810H 1811H 1900H 1920H 1921H 1930H 1931H 1FEOH 1FE1H 1FE2H 1FESH 1FE4H ROM write count error Battery error IP address duplication error Annunciator ON Operation error Operation error Const
340. on table For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Point The DHIOEN instruction is required to start stop high speed counters as well when using a high speed comparison table Measurement is not conducted by starting the high speed comparison table alone and the high speed comparison table therefore does not operate Precautions Number of tables that can be set Up to 4 tables can be set Empty tables are not included in the number of tables MWProcessing order High speed comparison tables are processed in sequence starting from the first table Operation start timing High speed comparison tables are updated during END processing If started stopped by the DHIOEN instruction the table is applied starting from the next scan Caution must be exercised when controlling high speed comparison tables using the DHIOEN instruction several times within the same scan Ex Table operation is as follows when multiple DHIOEN instructions are executed within the same scan Tables 1 2 and 4 are started at the 1st DHIOEN instruction Tables 3 and 5 are started and 2 and 4 are stopped at the 2nd DHIOEN instruction Table 2 is started and 5 is stopped at the 3rd DHIOEN instruction Tables 1 2 and 3 operate Operation when using internal clock Self reset cannot be used for channels set to internal clock by pulse input mode 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 19 1 Hig
341. on type program B Initial execution type program C Scan execution type program O END Y 9 END nn k A Initial scan time is the sum of the execution time of initial execution type programs and the END processing time Precautions The precautions for initial execution type programs are explained below MRestrictions in programming With initial execution type programs do not use instructions that require several scans to complete execution instructions for which completion devices exist e g RBFM and WBFM instructions 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 4 Execution Type of Program Scan execution type program This program type is executed only once per scan from the scan following the scan where an initial execution type program was executed STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan Ath scan END processing Initial execution type program A Scan execution type program A 0 END 0 END 0 Scan execution type program B y O END END Scan execution type program C Scan time When multiple scan execution type programs are executed the execution time of the scan execution type programs becomes the time until execution of all scan execution type programs is completed Note however that when an program event execution type program is executed before a scan execution type program is completed the execution time of these programs is included in the scan time Fixed scan execution type program An interrupt program
342. ons High speed counter specifications are explained below Types of high speed counters Types of high speed counters are as follows E1 phase 1 input counter S W Counting method of 1 phase 1 input counter S W is as follows ON A phase input BEL OFF Count direction switching bit OFF ON Up counting Down counting Pe ad SS Current value W1 phase 1 input counter H W Counting method of 1 phase 1 input counter H W is as follows ON A phase input BEGiibib OFF B phase input Count direction switching input OFF ON Up counting Down counting Current value 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 41 19 1 High speed Counter Function O M1 phase 2 input counter Counting method of 1 phase 2 input counter is as follows A phase input ON depre input 1 when OFF ON OFF B phase input ON eee a ee UN 1 when OFF gt 0N OFF Up counting Down counting wee es Current value E2 phase 2 input counter 1 edge count Counting method of 2 phase 2 input counter 1 edge count is as follows At up counting 1 count up when phase A input is ON and phase B input switches OFF gt 0N At down counting 1 count down when phase A input is ON and phase B input switches ON gt 0FF At up counting At down counting A phase input 1 B phase input E2 phase 2 input counter 2 edge count Counting method of 2 phase 2 input counter 2 edge count is as follows At up counting 1 count up when phase A input is ON and phase
343. ons refer to gt Page 184 Pulse Catch Function Poin tr The pulse catch function and FX3 compatible pulse catch function can be used simultaneously Specifications of FX3 compatible pulse catch function This specifications of the FX3 compatible pulse catch function are explained below Performance specifications FX3 compatible pulse catches can be used on inputs XO to X7 Minput response time Input response times are shown below FX5U 32MO FX5UC 32MO FX5U 64MO FX5U 80MO Input response time MHAssignment of input numbers and special relays The assignments of input numbers and special relays are explained below Input number Corresponding special relay XO SM8170 X1 SM8171 X2 SM8172 X3 SM8173 X4 SM8174 X5 SM8175 X6 SM8176 X7 SM8177 4 88 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 5 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function FX3 compatible pulse catch function execution procedure The procedure for executing the FX3 compatible pulse catch function is explained below 1 Check the FX3 compatible pulse catch specifications Check specifications such as the input response time and corresponding special relay of the FX3 compatible pulse catch Page 188 Specifications of FX3 compatible pulse catch function 2 Connect the CPU module to the external device For details on wiring to external devices refer to the following manual L IMELSEC Q F FX5U User s Manual Hardware L IMELSEC Q F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware 3 Set
344. ontent of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows High speed counter counting in direction whereby current value is reduced High speed counter counting in direction whereby current value is increased Down counting Up counting Update timing The timing of device update is as follows Down counting This is updated with the END processing When the FX3 e Up counting This is updated with the END processing When the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid the updating is made also compatible high speed counter function is valid the updating is made also when UDCNTF instruction is executed ON when UDCNTF instruction is executed ON e Power ON reset e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Special relays LC devices capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction Shown below are the special relay LC device that can read and write the latest value with the HCMOV instruction when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid When special relays and special registers are specified for s and d of instructions other than the HCMOV instruction the operation is the same as one compatible with the MOV instruction The same operation as when the FX3 compatible high speed counter is not valid is made for the special relay special register capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction other than those described in the list below O High speed transfer capable special relay is immediately updated A
345. ord OTK Word Total Bit Device 15 7K Bit 26 1K Bit Device standard Setting details window Device om Symbol Latch File Register R 32768 Oto 32767 No Settings No Setting eee a M aa me Link Special Registe S 512 0ta 1FF Total Device 33 0K Word 0 0 Word Total Word Device 330K Word DIK Word Total Bit Device 0 0k Bit 0 0k Bit Poin tr Specify each item so that the total number of points for each user device does not exceed the capacity of the device area L Page 94 Device Label Memory Area Setting 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 12 4 Device Setting 95 Range of use of device points The following table lists the range of use of device points to be set in the device setting high speed Setting I mw ooo koo o bem E I ow oo p pe O z Seprey SOOO standard Setting File registers Ro RO to R32767 4 points Word Link register WO to W7FFF 4 points Word Link special register SWO to SW7FFF 4 points 96 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 12 4 Device Setting 1 3 INITIAL DEVICE VALUE SETTING Directly sets the initial value of a device used by the program i e not via the program CPU module SM402 MOV H100 DO MOV H2020 DO 1 If initial device values are used a program to set data to the devices becomes unnecessary 13 1 Setting Initial Device Values This section describes the settings required to use initial device values Setting initial device values This sec
346. orresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4503 SD4533 SD4563 SD4593 SD4623 SD4653 SD4683 SD4713 SD4502 SD4532 SD4562 SD4592 SD4622 SD4652 SD4682 SD4712 MDescription These devices stores the maximum values of the high speed counters Poin tr e To rewrite the maximum value only the HCMOV instruction can be used e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid 152 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Update timing When the current value of a high speed counter exceeds the maximum value the value is updated in END processing When the value is read using the HCMOV instruction it is first updated to the latest value and then read Further when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid the value is updated also when UDCNTF instruction is executed mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset High speed counter minimum value These devices store the minimum values of the high speed counters ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4505 SD4535 SD4565 SD4595 SD4625 SD4655 SD4685 SD4715 SD4504 SD4534 SD4564 SD4594 SD4624 SD4654 SD4684 SD4714 MDescription These devices stores the minimum values of the high speed counters Poin tr
347. osition SD124 System information Parameter type SD125 1 System parameter SD126 2 CPU parameter 3 Module parameter SD127 4 Module extension parameter SD128 5 Memory card parameter Module position SD129 Built in high speed I O Intelligent module Built in serial communication OH 1H to 10H 41H Built in analog Expansion board Expansion adapter 5 System configuration information b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b7b6b5b4b3b2b1b0 SD113 With or without specification SD114 Head Y No 8 Head X No 8F SD115 Function No Module position SD116 Free Fixed to 0 Inteligent module No SD117 Network No SD118 Station No i Module position Built in high speed I O Built in serial communication Built in analog Expansion board Expansion adapter Function No System Sequence operation Built in A D Built in D A 42H 60H 71H to 76H Head X No Head Y No Module position Function No Intelligent module No Free Network No Station No 0H 41H 42H 60H 71H to 76H 0 21 12 Built in positioning PWM 10 Built in high speed counter Pulse width measurement 20 Built in serial communication 30 Either XY head No or intelligent module No is set APPENDIX 243 Appendix 2 Special Register List System information The special registers for system information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD200 Switch Status This regi
348. ou must write all data into the CPU module again 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 4 6 1 Time Setting 7 48 6 2 Setting Time Zone The time zone used for the CPU module can be specified Specifying the time zone enables the clock of the CPU module to work in the local time zone O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Operation Related Setting gt Clock Related Setting O Glock Related Setting i REO Tee ATT O en Tee eR ee A o a Bases Comment e UTC 13 e UTC 12 e UTC 11 e UTC 10 e UTC 9 30 e UTC 9 e UTC 8 e UTC 7 e UTC 6 30 e UTC 6 e UTC 5 45 e UTC 5 30 e UTC 5 e UTC 4 30 e UTC 4 e UTC 3 30 e UTC 3 e UTC 2 e UTC 1 e UTC e UTC 1 e UTC 2 e UTC 3 e UTC 3 30 e UTC 4 e UTC 4 30 e UTC 5 e UTC 6 e UTC 7 e UTC 8 e UTC 9 e UTC 10 e UTC 11 e UTC 12 Comment Enters a comment for the time zone e g name of the city 1 to 32 letters Time Zone Sets the time zone used by the CPU module UTC 9 To reflect the time zone setting on the CPU module the module must be restarted If no parameter is set for the CPU module factory setting it operates with UTC 9 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 6 2 Setting Time Zone 6 3 There are two types of system clocks one is to execute ON OFF by the system and the other is to execute ON OFF in the System clock intervals specified by the user Special relay used for system clock Special relays used for system clock are
349. output MV value from the measured PV value Through combining the P proportional action integral action and D derivative action the target SV value can be obtained e Alarm output function The alarm function can be set for input variation measured value or output variation value e Setting limit values The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value e Auto tuning function The proportional gain KP integral time TI and differential time TD can be set automatically for both the limit cycle method and step response method e Operation method of the PID instruction Both PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed Measured value PV CPU module Target value SV PID instruction Controlled object Output value MV 9 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction The PID instruction executes using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression According to the contents of s3 1 bit O operation setting ACT specified by s3 in the PID control either forward operation or backward Operation is executed Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter s3 or later Basic operation expression for PID control Forward operation OFF EVn Deviation in sampling at this time EVn 1 Deviation in previous cycle SV Target value PV nf Measured value in sampling at this time a
350. ows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 1 High speed Counter Function of High speed counter ring length These devices set the ring length of the high speed counters ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4515 SD4545 SD45705 SD4605 SD4635 SD4665 SD4695 SD4725 SD4514 SD4544 SD4574 SD4604 SD4634 SD4664 SD4694 SD4724 MDescription These devices set the ring length of the high speed counters These set values are valid when the ring length setting is set to enabled Point e While the high speed counter is operating the value is not reflected even if modified It operates in the status when the high speed counter starts e These devices do not operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e Power ON Reset STOP gt RUN Precautions If the ring length is set to less than the lower limit value or more than the upper limit value the ring length operates at the lower limit value or the upper limit value However the set value is stored as is High speed counter measurement unit time These devices set the measurement unit of pulse density measurement mode ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 SD4517 SD4547 SD4577 SD4607 SD4637 SD4667 S
351. pecial relays LC devices capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction 172 Precautions when using FX3 compatible high speed counters 0 0 00 ee eee 173 19 3 Pulse Width Measurement Function 0 00 ccc ees 174 Pulse width measurement function overview eee eee eens 174 Pulse width measurement specifications 0 nanana aaaea ee ee ee eens 174 Pulse measurement function execution procedure 175 Pulse width measurement parameters ee eee eee eee 176 List of special relays special registerS 2 6 ee ee eee eee 177 Details of special relays special registers 1 0 ee eee ee eens 178 Cautions when using the pulse width measurement function n nanana aa aaaea ee eee 182 Examples OF DlOOhalW 2z 2 4 224 bbe a oe es oS ee ee oe ee See ee ee 183 19 4 Pulse Cate Funcion sois ore eros ei cud 184 Outline of pulse catch function ee ee eee ee eee ees 184 Specifications of pulse catch function 2c ee eee eee eee 184 Pulse catch function execution procedure 184 Pulse catch parameters 185 Operation of pulse catch function ee ee eee eee eens 186 Cautions when using the pulse catch function 0 0 cc eee eee eee ene 187 19 5 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function 00 0 ee eee ees 188 Outline of FX3 compatible pulse catch function 00 cc ee eee 188 Specifications of FX3 compatible pulse catch function 0
352. peed counter preset value CH4 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4603 SD4604 High speed counter ring length CH4 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4605 SD4606 High speed counter measurement unit time CH4 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4607 SD4608 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH4 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4609 SD4610 to SD4619 SD4620 SD4621 IO A O E High speed counter current value CH5 2147483648 to 2147483647 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function 149 150 SD4622 SD4623 SD4624 SD4625 SD4626 SD4627 SD4628 SD4629 SD4630 SD4631 SD4632 SD4633 SD4634 SD4635 SD4636 SD4637 SD4638 SD4639 SD4640 to SD4649 SD4650 SD4651 SD4652 SD4653 SD4654 SD4655 SD4656 SD4657 SD4658 SD4659 SD4660 SD4661 SD4662 SD4663 SD4664 SD4665 SD4666 SD4667 SD4668 SD4669 SD4670 to SD4679 SD4680 SD4681 SD4682 SD4683 SD4684 SD4685 SD4686 SD4687 High speed counter maximum value CH5 High speed counter minimum value CH5 High speed counter pulse density CH5 High speed counter rotational speed CH5 High speed counter preset control switch CH5 High speed counter preset value CH5 High speed counter ring length CH5 High speed counter measurement unit time CH5 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH5 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 to 2147483647 0 to 2147483647 0 to 21
353. pleted up to the last set table SM5001 turns ON The high speed counter current value is not cleared Operation start timing Multiple point output high speed comparison tables are enabled as soon as the HIOEN instruction is executed MW Table operation interval The comparison value or input frequency must be set so the comparison value and high speed counter current value match at intervals of 100 us or more for each table MWProcessing order Multiple point output high speed comparison tables are processed in sequence starting from the first table Only 1 table per count is processed MH Table setting value update timing When using user devices you can change the table setting values by modifying the values of the device However the comparison value and output data values of the table currently being compared and the next table cannot be changed If you modify the comparison values or output data you can modify data of the next table in the sequence and those subsequent The table number of which the table is being currently compared can be checked in the special register SD5000 MHOther precautions There are common precautions when using high speed counters For details refer to L Page 163 Precautions when using high speed counters 1 36 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Special relay list A list of special relays used for high speed counters is provided below Special relays for individual chan
354. point output high speed comparison table completion Multi point output high speed comparison tables not finished The comparison of the final table has finished The comparison has not finished up to the final table These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows When multi point output high speed comparison tables have finished e When OFF by the user processing the set amount of tables e Power ON reset STOP PAUSE 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 147 19 1 High speed Counter Function Special registers list The following list shows the special registers used with high speed counters All set values except for ring length are handled as signed Special registers for individual channels The following list shows the special registers for individual high speed counter channels R W Read or Write R Read only SD4500 High speed counter current value CH1 2147483648 to 2147483647 R W SD4501 SD4502 High speed counter maximum value CH 1 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 R W SD4504 High speed counter minimum value CH1 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647 R W SD4506 High speed counter pulse density CH 1 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4507 SD4508 High speed counter rotational speed CH1 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4509 SD4510 High speed counter preset control switch CH 1 0 Rising edge R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when
355. points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of B device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of SB device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of F device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of L device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of D device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of W device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of SW device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of T device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of ST device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of C device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of LC device points used as 32 bit value SD300 Z Device Size This register stores the number of Z device points used R R SD302 LZ Device Size This register stores the number of LZ device points used 244 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List R Device Size Lower This register stores the number of R device points used as 32 bit R Device Size Upper value m clock The special registers for system clock are shown below R Read only R W Read Write One second counter e This register is incremented by 1 for each second after the CPU module is set to RUN e A counting cycle from 0 to 3276
356. ponse time so that the above condition is satisfied Pulse catch function execution procedure The procedure for executing the pulse catch function is explained below 1 Check the pulse catch specifications Check specifications such as the input response time of the pulse catch 1 gt Page 184 Specifications of pulse catch function 2 Connect the CPU module to the external device For details on wiring to external devices refer to the following manual L IMELSEC Q F FX5U User s Manual Hardware LLIMELSEC Q F FX5UC User s Manual Hardware 3 Set the parameters Set the pulse catch setting and other parameters Page 185 Pulse catch parameters 4 Create the program 5 Run the program 184 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 4 Pulse Catch Function Pulse catch parameters This section explains the pulse catch parameters Set the pulse catch parameters in GX Works3 Outline of parameters Pulse catch parameters are pulse catch setting and input response time Parameter setting This section explains how to set pulse catch parameters For input response time refer to Page 191 General purpose Input Functions XX Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt General Interrupt Pulse Catch gt Detail Setting Window Item setting General Interrupt Pulse Catch Setting Set the eeneral interrupt pulse catch of input termi
357. positioning address and command speed The value of an operand in the table is abnormal Other than the positioning address and command speed The value of an operand in the table is abnormal Other than the positioning address and command speed e Tables which cannot be used together were specified for continuous operation e The counterpart axis for the interpolation operation table was specified e Tables which cannot be used together were specified for continuous operation e The counterpart axis for the interpolation operation table was specified e Tables which cannot be used together were specified for continuous operation e The counterpart axis for the interpolation operation table was specified e Tables which cannot be used together were specified for continuous operation e The counterpart axis for the interpolation operation table was specified e Table shift cannot be completed in time because one or more tables shifted per 10 ms e Table shift cannot be completed in time because one or more tables shifted per 10 ms e Table shift cannot be completed in time because one or more tables shifted per 10 ms e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning e Eliminate the error that has caused the stop and restart the positioning Set the correct value to the table Set the correct value to the table Set the correct value to the table e Set the correct va
358. pper limit value gt Upper limit value parison table high speed compare instruction operation This device is for monitoring the operational status of the high speed counter s high speed comparison table and the high speed comparison instruction Corresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SM4980 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows High speed comparison table operating High speed comparison table stopped When the high speed counter current value and the high speed comparison Even when the high speed counter current value and the high speed table set value or the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instruction set value are equal comparison table set value or the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instruction set the specified bit device is set or reset value are equal the specified bit device does not change These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Match output driven by the DHIOEN instruction e Match output stopped by the DHIOEN instruction and DHSCS DHSCR e ON execution by DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instruction DHSZ instructions all OFF e Power ON reset STOP PAUSE 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 14 19 1 High speed Counter Function 5 yarison table high speed compare instruction error occurrence This device turns ON when driving the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions in e
359. pping the counting of the high speed counter using the LC device is as follows Programs example In the case of a program shown below the counting starts when MO turns ON and the counting stops when MO turns OFF When the counter increases from 6 or less to 5 or higher during an execution of the UDCNTF instruction the counter contact turns ON and the counter contact turns OFF when the counter decreases from 5 or higher to 6 or lower MO LC355 Poin tr Setting value constant Indirect specification is possible e The current value of LC35 is updated when the UDCNTF instruction is executed e When LC35 is set to s of the DHCMOV instruction the newest value can be read out e When a high speed comparison instruction DHSCS instruction DHSCR instruction DHSZ instruction a high speed comparison table or a multi point output high speed comparison table are used an accurate comparison and matched output processing can be executed The set value positive or negative can be specified by a constant K or the contents of data registers D When data registers are used 32 bit data composed of two consecutive devices are treated as set values If DO is specified the pair of D1 and DO are the setting value of 32 bits Operation example The operation of LC35 in the programming example described above is as shown below Count direction Up count Down count Up count X000 Pulse input LC35 Current value LC35 Count con
360. puts a user defined analog value by setting the output enable disable flag to enabled when the CPU module is stopped and changing the digital value Function to output warning when digital values exceed the specified range DEVICES LABELS This part consists of the following chapters 21 DEVICES 22 LABELS 203 21 DEVICES This chapter explains devices 21 1 List of Devices A list of devices is provided below Division Type Device name Symbol Notation EE number number number number UO GO number E E CO arca nani Point Specify code of timer retentive timer counter long counter by T ST C LC if type is determined like instruction when specifying device If type is not determined specify by code from among contact coil or current value according to type Current value can however also be specified by T ST C LC 21 DEVICES 204 21 1 List of Devices 21 2 User Devices This section explains user devices Input X Provides the CPU module with commands and data by external devices such as push buttons selector switches limit switches digital switches etc Push button switch CPU Module Selector switch Input X Digital switch Concept of input You can think each input point as having a virtual relay Xn built into a single CPU module The program uses NO NC contact of Xn Virtual relay l xo PLCs PB2 X1 l PB16 X7 mo I i lt mm c
361. r a a Gove wise reia de Ste weed 101 Decimal 221 Latem Tolay E iei catarro de 206 Decimal constant K o o o o o 221 Link register W ooomommormommeoncnnas 215 Device initial value o o o 97 Linkrelay B s se smangcmaeeinced ys g 206 Device label access service processing setting 107 Link special register SW o o 215 Device label MeMOory nnaou annuun nuna 37 Link special relay SB 0o 208 Low speed tiMer oo ooooooooooo 209 E M END processing aonan anana aeaa 17 C Error Ode 274 Memory card parameter 297 Event execution type program 25 Memory configuration ATEO 37 Execution type of prograM 20 Module access device o oooooo 216 Module parameter oooooooo o 292 Multiple interrupt o ooooooo 53 F Multiple point output high speed comparison table 134 File password 32 o o oooooooooooo 113 File register R o o o ooooooo 218 N MESS ase oa nd ada e es Gwe de 39 Fixed scan execution mode 23 NESUNGIN raras rro es 218 Fixed scan execution type prograM 21 FX3 compatible high speed counter 165 O FX3 compatible pulse catch 188 Online change 0 000 ooo 50 G Output Y 0 eee 205 Global pointer o o oooooooo o 219 P H PAUSE vos id be en o da eee ee 35 Y PID contr
362. r error The contents of the parameters are e Rewrite the project Parameter corrupted information Parameter error The parameter set value is out of range e Modify the parameter set value and rewrite Parameter the project information Parameter error The parameter set value is out of range e Modify the parameter set value and rewrite Parameter the project information e The module parameter settings and the Appendix 3 Error Code specified in the I O assignment setting of the parameters overlap those of other modules The I O method of the input output module is different The type of the CPU module is different The model of the module connected is different from that of the module set in the parameters The total number of I O points excluding remote I O exceeded 256 The number of input output input output and intelligent function modules connected is equal to or greater than 17 The number of communication adapters connected is equal to or greater than 3 The number of analog adapters connected is equal to or greater than 5 The number of extension power supply modules connected is equal to or greater than 3 The number of expansion boards connected is equal to or greater than 2 An unsupported module was detected An SD memory card error was detected The SD memory card may have been removed without the SD memory card disabled An SD memory card error was detected The SD memory card may not be
363. r stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W order CH7 rotation CH7 SD4699 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH7 SD4710 High speed counter current value Low order CH8 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH8 R W SD4711 High speed counter current value High order CH8 SD4712 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH8 This register stores the high speed counter maximum value R W SD4713 High speed counter maximum value High order CH8 CH8 250 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List No SD4714 SD4715 SD4716 SD4717 SD4718 SD4719 SD4720 SD4722 SD4723 SD4724 SD4725 SD4726 SD4727 SD4728 SD4729 SD4982 SD5000 SD5020 SD5021 SD5022 SD5023 SD5024 SD5025 SD5026 SD5027 SD5028 SD5029 SD5030 SD5031 SD5032 SD5033 SD5034 SD5035 SD5040 SD5041 High speed counter minimum value Low order CH8 High speed counter minimum value High order CH8 High speed counter pulse density Low order CH8 High speed counter pulse density High order CH8 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH8 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH8 High speed counter preset control switch CH8 High speed counter preset value Low order CH8 High speed counter preset value High order CH8 High speed counter ring length Low order CH8 High speed counter ring length Hig
364. r stores the power failure detection period R W When the power supply voltage is 200 V AC the time can be change to 10 to 100 ms APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List D D D B B DIDID 257 258 No SD8018 SD8019 SD8039 SD8040 SD8041 SD8042 SD8043 SD8044 SD8045 SD8046 SD8047 SD8049 SD8063 SD8067 SD8099 SD8136 SD8137 SD8140 SD8141 SD8142 SD8143 SD8152 SD8154 SD8157 SD8159 SD8173 SD8174 SD8175 SD8201 SD8202 SD8203 SD8204 SD8205 SD8206 SD8207 SD8208 SD8209 SD8210 SD8211 Name RTC Year data RTC Day of week data Constant scan duration ON state number 1 ON state number 2 ON state number 3 ON state number 4 ON state number 5 ON state number 6 ON state number 7 ON state number 8 Lowest active Annunciator Serial communication error code ch1 Operation error High speed ring counter PLSY Output number Low order PLSY Output number High order PLSY Accumulated number of pulses output Low order axis 1 PLSY Accumulated number of pulses output High order axis 1 PLSY Accumulated number of pulses output Low order axis 2 PLSY Accumulated number of pulses output High order axis 2 Error No of Inverter communication ch1 Error parameter No of IVBWR ch1 Error No of Inverter communication ch2 Error parameter No of IVBWR ch2 Station number Total number of slave stations Refresh range Current
365. r use counter or not Disable Disable Enable Operation Mode Set operation mode e Normal Mode e Pulse Density Assumption Mode Rotation Speed Measurement Mode Pulse Input Mode Set pulse input mode e 1 Phase 1 Input S W Up Down Switch e 1 Phase 1 Input H W Up Down Switch e 1 Phase 2 Input e 2 Phase 1 Multiple 2 Phase 2 Multiple e 2 Phase 4 Multiple e Internal Clock 1MHz 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 12 19 1 High speed Counter Function 9 Preset Input Enable Not available for high speed counters rotational speed Disable measurement mode Input Logic Preset Value Input Comparison Enable Disable Control Switch Enable Input Enable Set whether to enable or disable the enable input e Disable Disable e Enable Input Logic Set the enable input logic value e Positive Logic e Negative Logic Ring Length Enable Not available for high speed counters rotational speed Disable measurement mode Ring Length Measurement Unit Time Set measurement unit time Unit ms 1 to 2147483647 Pulses No of per Rotation Set the No of pulses per rotation Unit ms 1 to 2147483647 Poin tr Parameters are enabled when the CPU module is powered ON or after a reset In addition operations different from the parameter settings are possible by transferring values to special relays and special registers while changing these values in the program For details concerning special relays and spe
366. rameter gt Interrupt Settings gt Fixed Scan Interval Setting Window Hem Setting F E Fixed Scan Interval Setting Interrupt Setting from Internal Timer 3 128 100 ms 129 40 me lad 20 me 131 10 me Displayed items Interrupt Setting from Internal 128 100 ms 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 5 Program Type 33 34 Processing at startup of interrupt program Processing is as follows when an interrupt program is started up e Purge restore of index registers Z LZ WPurge restore of index registers Z LZ When an interrupt program is started up the values of the index registers Z LZ in the currently executing program are purged and those values are handed over to the interrupt program Then when an interrupt program is terminated the purged values are restored to the currently executing program Precautions The precautions for interrupt programs are explained below HRestrictions in programming e The PLS PLF instructions execute OFF processing at the scan following instruction execution ON devices remain ON until the interrupt program runs again and the instruction is executed e Only a routine timer can be used in an interrupt program Timers T ST cannot be used HSplitting of data Processing may be interrupted during instruction execution and an interrupt programs can be executed Accordingly splitting of data might occur if the same devices are used by both the interrupt program and the program t
367. rameter set value Parameter set value Parameter set value 2147483648 R W 2147483647 R W MA i SD4688 High speed counter rotational speed CH7 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4689 SD4690 High speed counter preset control switch CH7 0 Rising edge Parameter set value R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON SD4692 High speed counter preset value CH7 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4693 SD4694 High speed counter ring length CH7 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4695 SD4696 High speed counter measurement unit time CH7 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4697 SD4698 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH7 1 to 2147483647 Parameter set value R W SD4699 Zo SD4710 High speed counter current value CH8 2147483648 to 2147483647 R W SD4712 High speed counter maximum value CH8 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483648 R W SD4714 High speed counter minimum value CH8 2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647 R W SD4716 High speed counter pulse density CH8 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4718 High speed counter rotational speed CH8 0 to 2147483647 R W SD4720 High speed counter preset control switch CH8 0 Rising edge Parameter set value R W 1 Falling edge 2 Both edges 3 Constant when ON SD4721 SD4722 High speed counter preset value CH8 2147483648 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD4723 SD4724 High speed counter ring length CH8 2 to 2147483647 Parameter set value SD472
368. ration 5 Differential gain KD 0 to 100 When 0 is set differential gain is not provided s3 6 Differential time TD 0 to 32767 x10 ms When 0 is set differential is not executed s3 7 to These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation Do not change data s3 20 Input variation incremental 0 to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b1 of s3 1 is alarm set value 4 s3 21 Input variation decremental 0 to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b1 of s3 1 is alarm set value Ir s3 22 1 Output variation incremental O to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b2 of s3 1 is alarm set value 1 and ACT b5 of s3 1 is 0 Output upper limit set value 32768 to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b2 of s3 1 is 0 and ACT b5 of s3 1 is 1 s3 23 Output variation decremental 0 to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b2 of s3 1 is alarm set value 1 and ACT b5 of s3 1 is O Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 It is valid when operation setting ACT b2 of s3 1 is 0 and ACT b5 of s3 1 is 1 s3 24 Alarm output 0 Input variation incremental is not exceeded It is valid when operation setting ACT b1 or b2 of 1 Input variation incremental is exceeded s3 1 is 1 0 Input variation decremental is not exceeded 1 Input variation decremental is exc
369. rd Total Bit Device 15 7k Bit 261K Bit Latch Range Setting window Latch 1 Latch 2 3 Check the tab for the latch type select the device to set and set the latch range Start e PR MI a aai au i End MO del 7180 500 7679 2 5 3596 500 4095 3 ST 16 0 15 4 C 100 100 199 5 LG 44 20 63 E D 7800 200 7999 7 y 10 11 12 13 14 LATCH FUNCTION 14 3 Latch Settings 100 Setting latch on labels This subsection describes latch setting on labels Operating procedure Label edit window 1 ProgPou PRG Local Label Setting Easy Display lt Display Setting Check Label Name Data Type Class Initial Walue pS 1 Label Word Unsigned Bit String 16 bit Extended Display Automatic Device Label Memory Area Detailed Setting window 2 In the label edit window specify RETAIN for label attribute There are two types of latch for labels latch 1 and latch 2 Select one The Item Setting Gl Bewice Label Memory Arca A A mma selected latch type is applied to all Device high speed Setting Detailed Setting gt K labels of with latch attribute Device Standard Setting Detailed Setting B Latch type setting of the latch relay LA Latch 1 z L Navigation window gt Parameter gt Latch Label Latch Type Latch 1 Latch area of the latch label Standard Latch Area FXSUCPU CPU Parameter 7 Memory
370. rd output initial output device DO Output points 1 Current value 0 to 9 DO 0 Current value 10 to 12 DO 100 Current value 13 to 18 DO 300 y Current value 19 to DO 10 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 3 19 1 High speed Counter Function 5 Comparison start stop for multiple point output high speed comparison table Multiple point output high speed comparison tables cannot execute comparison by setting the parameter alone The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop multiple point output high speed comparison tables For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Point The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop high speed counters as well when using a multiple point output high speed comparison table Measurement is not conducted by starting the multiple point output high speed comparison table alone and the high speed comparison table therefore does not operate Precautions Setting number Up to 128 tables can be set MDevice value when using user device Parameters and user devices are handled as follows when using user devices Ex If DO is set to initial device Table number User device Comparison value Output data Table 1 D1 DO D3 D2 Table 2 D5 D4 D7 D6 Table 3 D9 D8 D11 D10 Table 4 D13 D12 D15 D14 Table 5 D17 D16 D19 D18 When final table comparison is complete When comparison processing has been com
371. rder CH4 counter value CH4 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value High order CH4 Pulse width measurement latest value Low order CH4 This register stores the pulse width measurement latest value Pulse width measurement latest value High order CH4 604 Pulse width measurement maximum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement maximum CH4 value CH4 Pulse width measurement maximum value High order CH4 Pulse width measurement minimum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement minimum value CH4 CH4 Pulse width measurement minimum value High order CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle latest CH4 value CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value High order CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle maximum order CH4 value CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value High order CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle minimum order CH4 value CH4 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value High order CH4 This register stores the PWM pulse output number CH 1 This register stores the PWM pulse width CH1 This register stores the PWM cycle CH1 PWM Number of output pulses current value monitor Th
372. re explained below This operation is possible only when the operation status of the CPU module is the STOP status O Can be executed No corresponding operation Program FB files Parameters Device initial values Global label setting file Restored information 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 3 2 Files 39 MEMO 40 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 3 2 Files FUNCTIONS This part consists of the following chapters 4 FUNCTION LIST 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 7 ONLINE CHANGE 8 INTERRUPT FUNCTION 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 10 CONSTANT SCAN 11 REMOTE OPERATION 12 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING 13 INITIAL DEVICE VALUE SETTING 14 LATCH FUNCTION 15 MEMORY CARD FUNCTION 16 DEVICE LABEL ACCESS SERVICE PROCESSING SETTING 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 18 SECURITY FUNCTIONS 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 20 BUILT IN ANALOG FUNCTION 41 42 FUNCTION LIST The following table lists the functions of the CPU module Scan monitoring function Detects an error in the hardware and program of the CPU module by Page 44 Watchdog timer setting monitoring the scan time Clock function This function is used for the time management in the function which Page 46 the system operates such as the date of the error history Online change Changing ladder blocks Writes the part of a program edited on the ladder editor using the Page 50 while online engineering tool to the CPU module in units of ladder bl
373. rent address user unit Low order This register stores the current address user unit of built in axis 2 positioning axis 2 SD5541 Built in positioning current address user unit High order axis 2 SD5542 Built in positioning current address pulse unit Low This register stores the current address pulse unit of built in order axis 2 positioning axis 2 SD5543 Built in positioning current address pulse unit High order axis 2 SD5544 Built in positioning current speed user unit Low order This register stores the current speed of built in positioning axis axis 2 2 SD5545 Built in positioning current speed user unit High order axis 2 254 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List R SD5546 Built in positioning execution table number axis 2 This register stores the execution table number of built in positioning axis 2 SD5550 Built in positioning error code axis 2 This register stores the error code of built in positioning axis 2 R W SD5551 Built in positioning error table number axis 2 This register stores the error table number of built in positioning R W axis 2 SD5556 Built in positioning maximum speed Low order axis 2 This register stores the maximum speed of built in positioning R W axis 2 SD5557 Built in positioning maximum speed High order axis 2 SD5558 Built in positioning bias speed Low order axis 2 This register stores the bias speed of built in
374. reshold hysteresis width SHPV 8325 8325 D535 Output value upper limit ULV s3 26 D536 ne Output value lower limit LLV Output value lower limit LLV lower limit LLV 3 27 D537 Wait setting from end of tuning cycle to start of PID s3 28 D538 control KW Output value MV D502 According to operation This is an item not occupied o gt 1 The setting is always necessary 2 When CH1 is used 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 8 Examples of Program Program SM402 MOV K5000 D500 MOV K500 D510 7 SET D511 0 SET D511 5 MOV K2000 D532 o MOV K3000 D513 7 oe MOV K2000 D514 7 MOV K5000 D516 SM402 Initial pulse SM402 RST D502 Initial pulse X011 PID control is started X011 PD D500 SD6022 D510 D502 PID control is started M3 OUTHS STO K2000 PID operation is executed STO Heater operation cycle M3 PID operation is executed M3 lt ST0 D502 H STO lt D502 PID operation is executed The target value is set to 50 C The sampling time is set to 500 ms The operation direction is set to backward operation The upper and lower limits of output value is set to valid The output value upper imit is set to ON for 2 se PID instruction initial setting The output value lower limit is set to ON for 0 sec The proportional gain is set to 3000 The integral time is set to 2000x 100ms The differential time is set to 5000x100ms CH1 SM6021 1 Disable
375. rite R Read only A SM5300 Operation monitor CH1 A The operation stopped status of PWM output on the target channel can be checked SM5301 Operation monitor CH2 OFF Stopped SM5302 Operation monitor CH3 ON In operation SM5303 Operation monitor CH4 R W R W R W SD5301 SD5300 CH1 number of output pulses SD5303 SD5302 CH1 pulse width SD5305 SD5304 CH1 period SD5307 SD5306 CH1 Number of output pulses current value monitor SD5317 SD5316 CH2 number of output pulses SD5319 SD5318 CH2 pulse width SD5321 SD5320 CH2 period SD5323 SD5322 CH2 Number of output pulses current value monitor SD5333 SD5332 CH3 number of output pulses SD5335 SD5334 CH3 pulse width SD5337 SD5336 Ch3 period SD5339 SD5338 CH3 Number of output pulses current value monitor SD5349 SD5348 CH4 number of output pulses SD5351 SD5350 CH4 pulse width SD5353 SD5352 CH4 period The period is stored SD5355 SD5354 CH4 Number of output pulses The current value of the number of output pulses is stored current value monitor Details of special relays special registers Details of special relays special registers used in PWM output are explained below The number of pulses to output are stored The pulse width is stored The period is stored A The current value of the number of output pulses is stored R W R W R W The number of pulses to output are stored The pulse width is s
376. rmation Program e An instruction that should start from the e Rewrite the program file Error location structure error bus line is not connected to the bus line information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Program The program structure of the ST e Check the syntax of the ST language FB Error location structure error language FB and functions is invalid and functions information Diagnostic timing At END instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At END instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At END instruction execution at interrupt occurrence At instruction execution Error code 33F3H 3400H 3401H 3402H 3403H 3405H 3406H 3420H 3500H 3502H 3503H 3504H 3505H 3506H 350AH 350CH 350DH 350EH 350FH 3510H 3511H 3512H 3513H Program structure error Error details and cause More than two STL instructions for the same S number are programmed
377. ruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution At instruction execution 281 Error code 3514H 3515H 3516H 3517H 3518H 3519H 351AH 350BH 350CH 350DH 3580H 3581H 3582H 3600H 282 Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error Operation error APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code Error details and cause e The auto tuning result in the step response method is abnormal e The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less e The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the deviation at start of auto tuning e The operation direction estimated from the measured value at the start of auto tuning in the step response method was different from the actual operatio
378. ruction is executed e END processing mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Point e If the number of output pulses written is equal to or smaller than the number of pulses that have already been output pulse output is stopped after the pulses being currently output are completed e If the number of output pulses written is greater than the number of pulses that have already been output pulse output is stopped after the specified number of pulses are output e If the number of output pulses is set to 0 output without any limitation the value cannot be changed while pulses are being output e The number of output pulses cannot be changed to 0 output without any limitation while pulses are being output Pulse width The pulse width of PWM output is stored Corresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 SD5303 SD5302 SD5319 SD5318 SD5335 SD5334 SD5351 SD5350 Update timing The timing to reflect the device in operation is as follows e When the HCMOV instruction is executed values updated immediately e When the PWM instruction is executed e END processing mClear timing The timing when the device is cleared is as follows e STOP PAUSE gt RUN Point f e The pulse width and cycle can be changed even while pulses are being output e The pulse width and cycle are stored in the unit specified by the parameter
379. ructions becomes correct e Modify the program so that the mutual relationship between instructions becomes correct e Modify the program so that the mutual relationship between instructions becomes correct e Modify the program so that instruction or pointer use becomes correct e Modify the program so that the mutual relationship between pointer and return instruction becomes correct e Check the syntax of the ST language FB and functions Error details and cause Action Detailed information e The relationship between FOR and NEXT instructions is invalid Error location information FOR NEXT e A BREAK instruction was executed e The BREAK instruction must be executed Error location instruction error outside the FOR syntax inside the FOR syntax information Error location information Error location information Error location information Pointer execution There is no pointer to the jump e Specify the correct jump destination in the Error location error destination program information Error location information Pointerexecution A RET instruction was executed without e Check where there is any invalid jump to Error location error a CALL or XCALL instruction executed subroutine programs information Error location information Error location information Program The relationship among MPS MRD and e Rewrite the program file Error location structure error MPP is invalid info
380. rupt becomes allowed Even if execution condition was satisfied twice or more only one execution is performed a Delay behind the cycle l sys ig a Cycle interval of TEISYU Execution condition satisfied l o 6 times l l l a S a l l l J l l D l LOJ l l h EE ls TEISYU S v d Number of executions Fixed scan execution type program E A X x z 4 times Section where interruptions A The program is executed once and the fixed period are disabled i execution of the program is maintained Even if execution condition was satisfied twice or more only one execution is made MFixed scan execution mode setting Use the fixed scan execution mode setting O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Interrupt Settings gt Fixed Scan Execution Mode Setting A Fixed Scan Executions Mode Setting DAS es E E Fixed Scan Execution Mode Precede Fixed Scan Fixed Scan Execution For Precede Fixed Scan the periodicity of the program is maintained For e Precede Fixed Scan Precede Fixed Scan Mode Execution Count Takes Priority the program is executed for all pending number e Execution Count of executions Takes Priority 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 4 Execution Type of Program Event execution type program Execution of this program type is triggered by a user specified event 1 gt Page 25 Trigger type STOP PAUSE RUN 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd s
381. s are cleared All output points turn OFF STOP gt RUN Program execution starts from Operation results are output The states of device memories Operation results are output step 0 after the PLC is run for the immediately before the CPU after the PLC is run for the duration of one scan module entered the RUN mode duration of one scan are held Note however that when device initial values are set the device initial values are set The CPU module performs the following processing regardless of RUN or STOP status or paused status e Refreshing of input output modules e Automatic refreshing of intelligent function modules e Self diagnostic processing e Device label access service processing e Setting of values to special relays special registers set timing when END processing is executed For this reason the following operations can be performed even in the STOP status or paused status e Monitoring of I O or test operations by the engineering tool e Reading writing from external device using SLMP e N N Network e MODBUS RTU slave 2 PROCESSING OF OPERATIONS ACCORDING TO CPU MODULE OPERATION STATUS 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 3 1 Memory Configuration CPU module memory is explained below Memory configuration The configuration of CPU module memory is explained below CPU built in memory Data memory The following files are stored in this memory e Program files FB files e Restored informati
382. s operation status of the CPU module by the combination of remote operation and RUN STOP status of the CPU module RUN RUN STOP PAUSE Operation not possible STOP STOP STOP STOP RESET 4 When executing by the RUN contact setting of RUN contact is required in the CPU parameter 2 Remote reset setting is required in the CPU parameter 3 When a CPU module is changed to STOP status by a remote operation remote reset is possible 4 Includes even the cases where CPU module has stopped due to an error 11 REMOTE OPERATION 91 11 4 Relationship Between Remote Operation and CPU Module 92 1 2 DEVICE LABEL MEMORY AREA SETTING The capacity of each area in device label memory can be specified Device Label Memory Arca Setting E Option Battery Setting Device Label Memory Device Area Device high speed Area Capacity Device standard Area Capacity Label Area Label Latch Labe Label Area Capacity Latch Label Area S Device Label Memory Device high speed Device Standard Setting Item Area Capacity Setting Use Device Area Setting Capacity rea Detailed Setting Setting Item Symbol Tomt X Output Y Internal Relay bi Link Relay E Special Link Rela SB Annuwnciator F Step Relay E Timer T Retentive Timer ST Courter G Lone Counter LE Data Register D Latch Relay L Total Device Total Word Device Total Bit Device Not Mounted 12 K Word 35 K Word Standard rea 12 K Word 1 K
383. s or ad debs ouch stant ewewead a de a eee 2 29 Herup DO AI av eco Jan sra osea ee eee Bd She eee aa geese eee eee aa 30 CHAPTER 2 PROCESSING OF OPERATIONS ACCORDING TO CPU MODULE OPERATION STATUS 35 CHAPTER 3 CPU MODULE MEMORY CONFIGURATION 37 3 1 Memory Cong aon tose tae errores ean eee der ne eon sed eae ee cur ee ee 37 Memory COMMGUIAIION 26435225 adas od a debe bacudus it dada 37 3 2 gl eee eee ee ee ee ee eee a ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee 39 File type and storage destination memory 6 ee eee es 39 Executable file operations ee eee ee eee eens 39 PART 2 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION LIST 42 CHAPTER 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION 44 5 1 Scan time monitoring time Setting 0 nannan 44 5 2 Resetting of the watchdog tiMer o ooooocooo nanna nnnnn nannan 44 5 3 PreCaUNlONS sis 0214 60040 din be hoe on oe wee ee ee ee dee ee ea ee 44 Watchdog timer reset when executing a program repeatedly 2 0 0 ce eee 44 Scan time when the WDT instruction is used a a a eee eee ee ee ee ee ee eens 45 CHAPTER 6 CLOCK FUNCTION 46 6 1 TMG SCGING session Gees serena EEES 46 Y e Le e 4 443454 E E oho ed aera ee de eee CONS eed eee eu ee Fee eee eee eee deen ees 46 Changing We Cock dala 32225 bac est a oe cba Ph ee ee eee a ieee ee 46 Reading clock data seis ae eee eee Ba Meee ee eee See eed oS a ena bee oe oe 47 PECAUMOMG cue es ernus erent ace bm pedia eur hm eed aod Oe wren era dh d
384. s register stores the pulse width measurement cycle maximum value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle minimum value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement rising ring counter value CH2 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 251 SD5042 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement falling ring R W order CH2 counter value CH2 SD5043 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value High order CH2 SD5044 Pulse width measurement latest value Low order CH2 This register stores the pulse width measurement latest value R W SD5045 Pulse width measurement latest value High order CH2 CH2 SD5046 Pulse width measurement maximum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement maximum R W CH2 value CH2 SD5047 Pulse width measurement maximum value High order CH2 SD5048 Pulse width measurement minimum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement minimum value R W CH2 CH2 SD5049 Pulse width measurement minimum value High order CH2 SD5050 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle latest R W CH2 value CH2 SD5051 Pulse width measurement cycle latest value High order CH2 SD5052 Pulse width measurement cycle maxim
385. s set to constant when ON the preset input comparison does not operate MW Timing at which the instruction is enabled The DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions are enabled at the END instruction for the scan in which the instructions are driven Even when the comparison value is changed it is updated at the END instruction for the scan in which it was changed Configuring high speed comparison tables with parameters Operations of DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions of the same comparison value are executed after high speed comparison tables set with parameters The high speed comparison table is processed sequentially from the top of the table 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 19 1 High speed Counter Function 63 WHigh speed counter current value modification operation by instructions The table below shows the operations when the current value of a high speed counter is rewritten by instructions Instruction High speed counter current value HCMOV instruction gt Page 161 Special relays special registers capable of high speed transfers with the HCMOV instruction MOV instruction etc RST instruction Cannot reset The special register value is overwritten in END processing ZRST instruction Cannot reset The special register value is overwritten in END processing ML imitation in the number of instances of each instruction in a program and number of instructions driven at the same time When DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions are driven at the same time i
386. s the high speed counter pulse density CH6 R W SD4658 High speed counter rotation speed Low order CH6 SD4659 High speed counter rotation speed High order CH6 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH6 R W SD4660 High speed counter preset control switch CH6 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch R W CH6 SD4662 High speed counter preset value Low order CH6 SD4663 High speed counter preset value High order CH6 SD4664 High speed counter ring length Low order CH6 SD4665 High speed counter ring length High order CH6 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH6 R W This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH6 R W SD4666 High speed counter measurement unit time Low order This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit R W CH6 time CH6 SD4667 High speed counter measurement unit time High order CH6 SD4668 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation Low This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per R W order CH6 rotation CH6 SD4669 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation High order CH6 SD4680 High speed counter current value Low order CH7 This register stores the high speed counter current value CH7 R W SD4681 High speed counter current value High order CH7 SD4682 High speed counter maximum value Low order CH7 This register stores
387. sable table data Disable Disable Enable Set the device used for table data Word device D R Comparison Value Sets value comparison value to be compared with 2147483648 lt Comparison current value of high speed counter value lt 2147483647 Output Device Sets the output destination device of output data e Bit Output Y M e Word Output D R Point e When using user devices you can change comparison value or output data while the program is running e When using user devices each table occupies 4 devices Word devices are used in order starting from the initial device 134 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function int output high speed comparison table operation Operation of each type high speed comparison table is explained below MBit output When comparison value 1 matches the current value of the set high speed counter output data is transferred to the output devices Ex Bit output initial output device YO Output points 16 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 YS Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO Y17 Yi6 Yio Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 YS Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO_ 1 Y17_Y16_Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO Current value 13 to 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 o 1 E 1 y Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y YS Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 YO Word output When comparison value 1 matches the current value of the set high speed counter output data is transferred to the output devices Ex Wo
388. same interrupt is generated multiple times before the CPU module changes to the RUN status PAUSE RUN Interrupt occurrence Enable Interrupt El Main routine program Execution Interrupt Program 77 Not executed because the CPU module Executed as soon as PAUSE RUN and is in the STOP status the interrupt program execution status changes to enabled When multiple interrupts are generated at the same time while in an interrupt enabled status Interrupt programs are executed in order starting from program having the highest priority Interrupt programs also run in order of priority rank when multiple interrupt programs having the same priority are generated simultaneously Simultaneous occurrence of Enable Interrupt El multiple interrupt factors Main routine program 337777777777 110 116 l I0 interrupt program Execution l l IRET 110 interrupt program o Execution LLL Wait stat ait status RE l 116 interrupt program 2 2 2___L O Execution Wait status IRET When an interrupt is generated during standby while executing constant scan The interrupt program for that interrupt is executed When another interrupt is generated during execution of the interrupt program If an interrupt such as a fixed scan execution type program including an interrupt which triggers the event execution type program is triggered while an interrupt program is being executed the program operates in accordance
389. signment setting of the parameters is not connected Parameters for a standard input output module are set to a high speed input output module The number of writes to the data memory Replace the CPU module exceeded 20 000 times e Check the connection of the battery e Replace the battery as soon as possible e Overlapping IP addresses were e Check the IP address detected e Check the program of that number annunciator number e Verify that the channel specified by instructions using communication functions or built in I O is not used by other instructions e Verify that the number of times that applied instructions are used in the program does not exceed the specified limit e Check and correct the constant scan time setting Recheck the setting time of the constant scan e Recheck the values such as the IP address setting SD8492 to SD8497 e Verify that write request and clear request SM8492 and MS8495 do not turn from OFF to ON simultaneously e Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data e Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the parameters are consistent with the connections e Make sure that the p
390. sion supported by the target CPU module 4423H Security function e The specified target of security key operation is inaccurate e Set target of security key operation to CPU module error 4B00H Target module e An error occurred in the access destination or relay station e Take corrective action after checking the error that occurred error e The specified transfer setup request destination module at the specified access destination or the relay station to the number is invalid accessed station e Check the transfer setup request destination module number or PLC number in the request data of SLMP MC protocol e Check the stop error and take action 4B02H Target module e The request is not addressed to the CPU module e Perform operation to a module that can execute the error specified function 4B03H Target module e The specified route is not supported by the specified CPU e Check whether the specified route is supported or not error module version e Check the mounting status of the CPU module The communication target CPU module is not mounted e Check the stop error and take action APPENDIX 290 Appendix 3 Error Code Appendix 4 Parameter List A parameter list is shown below System parameters I O Assignment Setting CPU parameters Model Name Intelligent Module No Serial Communication ch CPU Module Operation at Error Detection Name Setting Operation Related Setting Interrupt Settings Service Pro
391. smatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 SD10898 SD10899 Connection No 8 protocol execution count Connection No 8 protocol cancellation specificatio
392. speed Absolute max input Insulation method No of occupied input output points 1 Analog output specifications Digit refers to digital values Item No of analog output points Digital input Analog output Voltage Output characteristics max resolution Digital input value Max resolution Precision 2 Ambient temperature 25 5 C Precision for the max analog output value Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Conversion speed Insulation method No of occupied input output points 4 2 Specifications 2 points 2 channels 0 to 10 V DC input resistance 115 7 kQ Unsigned 12 bit binary 0 to 4000 2 5 mV Within 0 5 20 digit Within 1 0 40 digit 30 us CH data refreshed every operation cycle 0 5 V 15 V Inside the PLC and the analog input circuit are not insulated Between input terminals channels is not insulated 0 point does not pertain to the max No of input output points of the PLC Specifications 1 point 1 channel Unsigned 12 bit binary 0 to 10 V DC external load resistance 2 k to 1 MQ 0 to 4000 2 5 mV Within 0 5 20 digit Within 1 0 40 digit 30 us data refreshed every operation cycle Inside the PLC and the analog output circuit are not insulated 0 point does not pertain to the max No of input output points of the PLC There is a dead band near 0 V output which is an area where some digital input values do not reflect analog output v
393. ssing time Program processing time eS a YN Scan execution Scan execution Scan execution END 0 program A program B WDT END 0 program A WDT WDT measurement time Next WDT measurement measurement time time Clear E Scan time Next scan time WDT reset CPU module WDT reset CPU module internal processing internal processing 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION 4 5 3 Precautions 5 46 6 CLOCK FUNCTION The CPU module has an internal clock and is used to manage time in functions performed by the system such as dates of the error history 6 1 Time Setting Time operation continues with the large internal capacitor in the CPU module even though the power in the CPU module is turned OFF or the power failure exceeds the allowable momentary power failure time If an optional battery is used operation continues by the battery Clock data The clock data handled in the CPU unit is described below Data name Description Year 4 digits in calendar year 1980 to 2079 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Leap year auto detect Hour 0 to 23 24 hour system Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Day of the week 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday Changing the clock data The clock data can be changed using the following methods e Using engineering tools e Using SM SD e Using instructions Using the engineering tool Clock data can be changed using Set Clock from the me
394. ster stores the CPU switch status 0 RUN 1 STOP SD201 LED status This register stores the LED status R R SD203 CPU Status This register stores the CPU Status b0 RUN b2 STOP b3 PAUSE R SD218 Time zone setting value The time zone setting value specified in the parameter is stored in increments of minutes SD250 Loaded Max I O This register stores high order 2 digits of the final I O number of R connected modules 1 in 8 bit binary R SD260 X Device Size Lower This register stores the number of X device points used as 32 bit SD261 X Device Size Upper value SD262 Y Device Size Lower SD263 Y Device Size Upper SD264 M Device Size Lower SD265 M Device Size Upper SD266 B Device Size Lower SD267 B Device Size Upper SD268 SB Device Size Lower SD269 SB Device Size Upper SD270 F Device Size Lower SD271 F Device Size Upper SD274 L Device Size Lower SD275 L Device Size Upper SD280 D Device Size Lower SD281 D Device Size Upper SD282 W Device Size Lower SD283 W Device Size Upper SD284 SW Device Size Lower SD285 SW Device Size Upper SD288 T Device Size Lower SD289 T Device Size Upper SD290 ST Device Size Lower SD291 ST Device Size Upper SD292 C Device Size Lower SD293 C Device Size Upper SD298 LC Device Size Lower SD299 LC Device Size Upper This register stores the number of Y device points used as 32 bit value This register stores the number of M device
395. struction error A A occurrence SM5000 Multi point output high speed comparison table operation A KA x SM5001 Multi point output high speed comparison table completion Ja Ja O A 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 61 19 1 High speed Counter Function This section only lists the devices for high speed counter CH1 The devices for high speed counter CH2 and subsequent counters have the same operation as CH1 O High speed transfer capable special register is immediately updated A Normal transfer capable special register is updated in END processing x Transfer not possible read only SD4500 SD4501 High speed counter current value CH1 SD4502 High speed counter maximum value CH1 SD4503 SD4504 High speed counter minimum value CH1 SD4505 SD4506 High speed counter pulse density CH1 SD4507 SD4508 High speed counter rotational speed CH1 SD4509 SD4510 SD4512 High speed counter preset value CH1 SD4513 SD4514 High speed counter ring length CH 1 SD4515 SD4516 High speed counter measurement unit time CH 1 SD4517 SD4518 High speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH 1 SD4519 Always use DHCMOV 32 bit instruction for devices that use 2 words When the HCMOV instruction 16 bit instruction is used it operates the same as the normal MOV instruction Ey pe ecial registe are j by all channels O High speed transfer capable special register is immediately updated A Normal transfer cap
396. structions is invalid e An instruction or interrupt pointer that cannot be used in the main routine program is used e The relationship among a global pointer interrupt pointer and return instruction is invalid The program structure of the ST language FB and functions is invalid e Make sure that FOR and NEXT instructions are each executed the same number of times In addition check syntax for any invalid jump instructions e Make sure that the number of nesting levels is 16 or lower In addition check subroutine programs for any invalid jump instructions e Make sure that the number of nesting levels is 16 or lower In addition check the FOR syntax for any invalid jump instructions e Make sure that the number of nesting levels is 16 or lower In addition check the relationship between DI and El instructions e The END FEND GOEND and STOP instructions can be executed only in the main routine program e Check the detailed information error location information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool display the error program step by clicking the Error Jump button and check the program The step number displayed in the error location information is counted from the top of the file It may be different from the step number in the program displayed by the jump function e Rewrite the program file e Modify the program so that the mutual relationship between inst
397. sult did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 No SD10858 SD10859 SD10860 SD10862 SD10863 SD10864 SD10865 SD10866 SD10867 SD10868 SD10869 SD10870 SD10871 SD10872 SD10873 SD10874 SD10875 SD10876 SD10877 Connection No 6 protocol execution count Connection No 6 protocol cancellation specification Connection No 7 protocol execution status Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 1 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 2 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 3 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 4 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 5 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 6 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 7 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 8 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 9 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 10 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 11 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 12 Connection No 7 received data verification result receive packet No 13 Connection No 7 received data verification result r
398. sured value and then execute auto tuning again e Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value for the input filter constant After changing the setting execute auto tuning again instruction are not overwritten in the program Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during auto tuning The operation is continued with KP 32767 Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement The operation is continued with KP 32767 Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check the result for improvement The operation is continued with KP 32767 Modify the program so that no instruction whose use is disabled by the interrupt routine
399. t intervals J Direction switching ss A dea AUTO Current value 10 OANWAHRODN OO Operation when counting in the minus direction Pulse density can also be measured when pulses are input in the direction whereby current value of high speed counter is reduced Operation at overflow of high speed counter current value Pulse density measurement can continue even when current value of high speed counter overflows during measurement HRelationship with the SPD instruction Measurement time specified by operand of the SPD instruction is overwritten in the special register for measuring unit time used by the pulse density measurement function Measurement results of the SPD instruction are also stored in the special register of measurement results If pulse density measurement has already been started by the HIOEN instruction the SPD instruction cannot be used for the same channel Inversely if pulse density is currently being measured by the SPD instruction pulse density measurement cannot be started for the same channel Other precautions There are common precautions when using high speed counters For details refer to L Page 163 Precautions when using high speed counters 128 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function High speed counter rotational speed measurement mode The rotational speed measurement mode for high speed counters is explained below When in rotational speed measurement mod
400. t circuit when a load current exceeding the current rating or an overcurrent caused by a load short circuit flows for a long time it may cause smoke and fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as a fuse O For the operating status of each station after a communication failure of the network refer to relevant manuals for the network Incorrect output or malfunction may result in an accident DESIGN PRECAUTIONS CAUTION O After the CPU module is powered on or is reset the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration parameter settings and or program size Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of this variation in time INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION O Connect the expansion board and expansion adapter securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions O Connect the extension cables peripheral device cables input output cables and battery connecting cable securely to their designated connectors Loose connections may cause malfunctions When using an SD memory card insert it into the SD memory card slot Check that it is inserted completely Poor contact may cause malfunction Turn off the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the following devices Failure to do so may cause device failures or malfunctions Peripheral devices expansion board and expansion adapter Extensio
401. t did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 8 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 9 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 10 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 11 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 12 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 13 Element No where the verification result did not match bO to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 14 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 15 Element No where the
402. t is executed when the preset input changes ON OFF Preset input ore _ L O Count input of JU UU UU UU UUUUUUUU Current value O O NO0 0d0o y OW O e Operation when preset input logic positive logic preset control switch rising edge falling edge The preset is executed when the preset input changes OFF gt ON and when it changes ON OFF ON Preset input ore LS Count input of JUUUUUUYUUUUUUUUU2 Current value O OANWABRODN OW O 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 19 1 High speed Counter Function 99 e Operation when preset input logic positive logic preset control switch constant when ON The preset is constantly executed while the preset input is ON ON Preset input ar TT S ON Count input of JU UU UU UU UU UU UU UU Current value lt O OANWAHRODN OW O e Operation when preset input logic negative logic preset control switch rising edge The preset is executed when the preset input changes ON gt 0FF ON Preset input OFF Count input of JU UU UU UU UU UU UU UU Current value OA NWAHRODN OW O e Operation when preset input logic negative logic preset control switch falling edge The preset is executed when the preset input changes OFF gt 0N ON Preset input OFF ON Count input of JU UU UU UU UU UU UU UU Current value O O NO0 0d0 Y OW 0 156 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter
403. t mode CH4 OFF Always measurement mode R W ON 1 time measurement mode SM5300 PWM function operation CH1 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5301 PWM function operation CH2 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5302 PWM function operation CH3 OFF Stopped R ON Operation APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 229 230 No Name escrito RW SM5303 PWM function operation CH4 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5500 Built in positioning instruction activation axis 1 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5501 Built in positioning instruction activation axis 2 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5502 Built in positioning instruction activation axis 3 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5503 Built in positioning instruction activation axis 4 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5516 Built in positioning pulse output monitor axis 1 OFF Stopped R ON Output SM5517 Built in positioning pulse output monitor axis 2 OFF Stopped R ON Output SM5518 Built in positioning pulse output monitor axis 3 OFF Stopped R ON Output SM5519 Built in positioning pulse output monitor axis 4 OFF Stopped R ON Output SM5532 Built in positioning error axis 1 OFF No error R W ON Error SM5533 Built in positioning error axis 2 OFF No error R W ON Error SM5534 Built in positioning error axis 3 OFF No error R W ON Error SM5535 Built in positioning error axis 4 OFF No error R W ON Error SM5580 Built in positioning table shift instructions axis 1 OFF No ta
404. t of illegal access by a third party Use of the security functions according to the following purposes 1 Protection of customer assets on PC Prevents theft tampering or erroneous operation through unauthorized access from third parties Personal computer outside the company gt Customer assets Personal ea computers 2 Protection of customer assets in FX5 system module Prevents theft tampering or erroneous operation due to unauthorized access by third parties CPU module Customer assets FX5 system Projects To prevent illegal accessing and viewing of programs in Block password function GX Works3 Operating Manual program component units Password is used To prevent illegal accessing and viewing of programs in Security key authentication program file units Security key is used function CPU Module To prevent illegal execution of programs Security key is used To prevent illegal reading writing of files File password 32 function Password is used To limit access from outside a specific communication path Password is used Remote password function GX Works3 Operating Manual MELSEC iQ F FX5 User s Manual Ethernet Communication Precautions When a personal computer registered with a security key is misused by a third party the outflow of program assets cannot be prevented For this reason the customer must adopt sufficient measures as explai
405. t of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Multi point output high speed comparison table operating Multi point output high speed comparison tables stopped When the high speed counter current value is equal to the set value specified Even when the high speed counter current value is equal to the set value in the multi point output high speed comparison table parameters the specified in the multi point output high speed comparison table parameters specified pattern of output or the data transfer operates the specified pattern of output or the data transfer is not executed These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid 146 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 1 High speed Counter Function Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Match output driven by the HIOEN instruction e Match output stopped by the HIOEN instruction and DHSCS DHSCR e ON execution by DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instruction DHSZ instructions all OFF e Power ON reset STOP PAUSE e SM8034 turned ON A Iti point output high speed comparison table completion This device turns ON when the high speed counter s multi point output high speed comparison tables have finished comparing all of the set tables ECorresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SM5001 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows Multi
406. t slave R station No 1 SD9063 Code of communication error at slave station No 2 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 2 SD9064 Code of communication error at slave station No 3 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 3 SD9065 Code of communication error at slave station No 4 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 4 SD9066 Code of communication error at slave station No 5 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 5 SD9067 Code of communication error at slave station No 6 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 6 SD9068 Code of communication error at slave station No 7 This register stores the code of communication error at slave R station No 7 SD9080 Station number setting This register stores the station number setting R W SD9081 Total slave station number setting This register stores the total slave station number setting R W SD9082 Refresh range setting This register stores the refresh range setting R SD9083 Retry count setting This register stores the retry count setting R SD9084 Communication time out setting This register stores the communication time out setting R Built in Ethernet The special registers for built in Ethernet are shown below R Read only R W Read Write No Mame eee RM SD10050 This register stores the local node IP address S
407. tact LS o A Y001 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 4 6 19 2 FX3 compatible high speed counter function O The elements of the composition of the LC device Each element that composes the LC device is shown below Item Description Counting coil This is the activation contact to start the counting of the LC device When the UDCNTFE instruction is turned OFF ON the status turns ON and the counting of the input signal becomes possible Setting value This is KO specified with UDCNTF LCO KO An indirect specification is acceptable Current value This is the current value of the counter The value increases or decreases depending on the input pulse Counter contact This turns ON when the current value of the LC device changes from a value less than the setting value to the setting value or higher This can be used as LD LCO Reset coil This turns ON when the RST instruction with the LC device specified turns OFF gt 0N and turns OFF when the RST instruction turns ON gt 0FF When the reset coil is ON the counting is not executed even if the count coil is ON and the current value is always 0 The comparison between the UDCNTF instruction and HIOEN instruction The comparison between the UDCNTF instruction and the HIOEN instruction is described below The availability of use when the FX3 compatibility function is enable disable FX3 compatible function enable disable UDCNTF instruction HIOEN instruction Disable E O Use Not use 6 Point
408. tarting stopping high speed counter measurement High speed counters cannot count by setting the parameter alone The HIOEN instruction is required to start stop the count For the HIOEN instruction refer to LEIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Read write of current value of high speed counter The current value of the high speed counter is stored in a special register for each channel You can check current value by monitoring the value The value may however differ from the actual value because the special register is updated during END processing You can read the latest value using the HCMOV instruction For details concerning specials registers for high speed counters refer to L Page 148 Special registers list For information for the HCMOV instruction refer to LLIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks Precautions e Input used varies according to channel selected and pulse input mode e If not using preset input or enable input you can use it as input for other functions e If mode is other than normal mode preset input cannot be used e Use the HIOEN instruction to start high speed counter measurement e There are common precautions when using high speed counters For details refer to k Page 163 Precautions when using high speed counters 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 12 19 1 High speed Counter Function 5 High speed
409. ter stores the END processing time us SD528 Constant scan waiting time ms This register stores the constant scan wait time ms SD529 Constant scan waiting time us This register stores the constant scan wait time us SD530 Scan program execution time ms This register stores the scan program execution time ms D D B B B B B B B B B DID AD SD531 Scan program execution time us This register stores the scan program execution time us a Ea a5 The special registers for drive information are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD600 Memory Card Installation This register stores the enable disable classification of the inserted SD card SD604 SD memory card usage status This register stores the memory card usage condition R A SD606 SD memory card capacity This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity unit 1 K byte R Free space value after formatting is stored SD607 SD memory card capacity This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity unit 1 K byte R Free space value after formatting is stored SD608 SD memory card capacity This register stores the drive 2 storage capacity unit 1 K byte R Free space value after formatting is stored APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List 245 Free space value after formatting is stored R SD634 Index for the number of data memory write operations SD635 Stores an index for the number of write operations to data memor
410. terrupt pointer Page 25 Generation of interrupt by interrupt pointer 1 21 DEVICES 21 8 Pointer P 219 Interrupt causes of the interrupt pointer numbers A list of interrupts is provided below Input interrupt I0 to 115 interrupt pointer used for input interrupt of CPU module Up to 8 points can be used High speed comparison 116 to 123 Interrupt pointer used for high speed comparison match interrupt of CPU module match interrupt Interrupt by internal timer 128 to 131 Interrupt pointer used for fixed cycle interrupt by internal timer Interrupt from module I50 to 1177 interrupt pointer used for interrupt from intelligent function module The priority for the interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors The priority for the interrupt pointer numbers and interrupt factors are indicated 10 Input interrupt The default value for priority is 2 i 2 a 5 e 7 CO a eo o 110 113 115 116 High speed comparison 1 to 3 The default value for priority is 2 117 match interrupt 118 119 120 123 128 Interrupt by internal timer 1to 3 The default value for priority is 2 129 130 150 to 1177 The default value for priority is 3 The highest priority rank is 150 and the lowest is 1177 e The interrupt priority is the order which is executed at the time of the multiple interrupt The lower the numerical value the higher the interrupt priority e The interrupt priority order is the order which is execute
411. th measurement rising ring counter value Low order CH2 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value High order CH2 Descinon O This register stores the high speed counter minimum value CH8 This register stores the high speed counter pulse density CH8 This register stores the high speed counter rotation speed CH8 This register stores the high speed counter preset control switch CH8 This register stores the high speed counter preset value CH8 This register stores the high speed counter ring length CH8 This register stores the high speed counter measurement unit time CH8 This register stores the high speed counter number of pulses per rotation CH8 R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W This register stores the high speed comparison table high speed R W compare instruction error code This register stores the multi point output high speed comparison R table comparison number This register stores the pulse width measurement rising ring R W counter value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement falling ring counter value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement latest value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement maximum value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement minimum value CH1 This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle latest value CH1 Thi
412. th the SPD instruction 2 Can be stopped when the high speed comparison table is not set with parameters m Precautions for the counting operation when the current value is changed For the high speed counter instructions high speed comparison tables and multi point output high speed comparison tables comparison processing is performed when the current value of the high speed counter has changed due to pulse input When the preset input comparison function is also enabled comparison processing is also performed when the preset is executed However please note that the comparison processing is not performed when the current value of the high speed counter is changed with the following methods e When the current value of a high speed counter was rewritten with the HCMOV instruction e When the current value of the high speed counter is reset with the RST instruction or the ZRST instruction when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid e When the current value of the high speed counter was changed by a self reset When the preset input comparison function is disabled e When high speed counter current value is the ON or OFF output result of the comparison of the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions e When high speed counter current value is the ON or OFF output result of the comparison of a high speed comparison table m Preset input comparison operation When the preset input comparison is enabled and preset control switching i
413. the parameters Set the pulse catch setting and other parameters E Page 189 FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters 4 Create the program Create the program for using pulse catch 5 Run the program FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters This section explains the FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters Set the FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters in GX Works3 Outline of parameters FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters are pulse catch setting and input response time Parameter setting This section explains how to set FX3 compatible pulse catch parameters For input response time refer to K Page 191 General purpose Input Functions O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt Module Parameter gt High Speed I O gt Input Function gt General Interrupt Pulse Catch gt Detail Setting Window ltem setting General Interrupt Pulse Catch Setting Set the general interrupt pu Ise catch of input termmal w ment cre Fl General purpose Input Fe General purpose Input Ha General purpose Input Hd General purpose Input D General purpoze Input Ab General purpoze Input E General purpose Input AO General purpose Input 211 General purpose Input ATA General purpose Input 13 General purpose Input 214 General purpose Input RAH General purpose Input 16 General purpose Input Hl General purpose Input 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 1 89 19 5 FX3 Compatible Pulse Catch Function Displayed items Item
414. this device is set to ON the PLC starts to send R SM8572 Receive completion flag ch2 This device turns ON when receiving is completed R APPENDIX Appendix 1 Special Relay List 237 No Rw SM8573 Carrier detection flag ch2 This device turns ON in synchronization with the CD DCD signal R SM8574 Data set ready flag ch2 This device turns ON in synchronization with the DR DSR signal R SM8575 Time out check flag ch2 This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time out time setting device SM8585 Time out check flag ch3 This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time Dj DD out time setting device SM8595 Time out check flag ch4 This device turns ON when data receiving is suspended and the next set of receive data is not given within the time set by the time A D D D D DW out time setting device SM8740 Station No setting SD latch enabled ch1 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8750 Station No setting SD latch enabled ch2 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8760 Station No setting SD latch enabled ch3 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8770 Station No setting SD latch enabled ch4 OFF Latch disabled R ON Latch enabled SM8800 MODBUS RTU communication ch1 OFF Communication stop R ON Communication
415. tion CH3 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5023 Pulse width measurement operation CH4 OFF Stopped R ON Operation SM5036 Pulse width measurement rising flag CH1 OFF Cycle measurement not completed R ON Cycle measurement completion SM5037 Pulse width measurement rising flag CH2 OFF Cycle measurement not completed R ON Cycle measurement completion SM5038 Pulse width measurement rising flag CH3 OFF Cycle measurement not completed R ON Cycle measurement completion SM5039 Pulse width measurement rising flag CH4 OFF Cycle measurement not completed R ON Cycle measurement completion SM5052 Pulse width measurement falling flag CH1 OFF Pulse width measurement not completed R ON Pulse width measurement completion SM5053 Pulse width measurement falling flag CH2 OFF Pulse width measurement not completed R ON Pulse width measurement completion SM5054 Pulse width measurement falling flag CH3 OFF Pulse width measurement not completed R ON Pulse width measurement completion SM5055 Pulse width measurement falling flag CH4 OFF Pulse width measurement not completed R ON Pulse width measurement completion SM5068 Pulse width measurement mode CH1 OFF Always measurement mode R W ON 1 time measurement mode SM5069 Pulse width measurement mode CH2 OFF Always measurement mode R W ON 1 time measurement mode SM5070 Pulse width measurement mode CH3 OFF Always measurement mode R W ON 1 time measurement mode SM5071 Pulse width measuremen
416. tion incremental alarm set value O to 32767 s3 23 Output variation decremental alarm set value Oto 32767 Variation means Previous value Current value 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 6 Details of Parameters Upper and lower limits for output value When the upper and lower limit settings of the output value are valid the output value is as shown in the chart The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can moderate the increase of the integral item in the PID control When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value make sure to set s3 1 b2 to OFF Set item Setting description Setting range Operation setting s3 1 b2 Output variation alarm Make sure to set it to OFF s3 1 b5 Output value upper lower limit setting ON Used OFF Not used Output value MV When the upper limit and These values are not output lower limit of output value are not set s3 22 Output value upper limit A A A RAD eee SPN s3 23 Output value lower limit a ee These values are not output When the upper limit and lower limit of output value are set l Time Input filter constant s3 2 The input filter a is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value PV caused by noise By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level the effect of noise can be reduced If the input filter value is too small the filter effect
417. tion describes the settings of initial device values Setting procedure The procedure for using initial device values is as follows 1 First the user must create an initial device value file To set initial values to a global device create an initial device value file with any name which sets these initial values and specify the range of the values 2 On the device memory set up initial device value data within the range specified in the initial device value file LAGX Works3 Operating Manual 3 Inthe Device Memory Register Diversion select the device memory which was set up in Step 2 Setting Device Memory Register Diversion enables data set up on the device memory to be used as initial device values for the device which is specified in the initial device value file LAGX Works3 Operating Manual 4 Configure CPU parameters Page 98 Initial value setting 5 Write the set initial device value file and the CPU parameters to the CPU module LTIGX Works3 Operating Manual 6 The data in the specified initial device value file is automatically set to the specified device when the CPU module is powered off and on reset or the status changes from STOP to RUN 13 INITIAL DEVICE VALUE SETTING 13 1 Setting Initial Device Values 97 98 Initial value setting Configure the initial value setting O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt File Setting gt Initial Value Se
418. tion is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time scan time The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value The operation is continued with the maximum or minimum value Calculation is continued with the output upper limit value and output lower limit value transposed e The operation is continued without alarm output Detailed information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information Error location information APPENDIX Appendix 3 Error Code Diagnostic timing At power on at RESET at STOP RUN state At inst
419. tive e Check the file password 32 of the boot source file e Allow sufficient capacity on the boot destination or recheck the file size of the boot source e Check the security information of the boot source file e Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data e Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data e Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data Set the CPU module to STOP and write a set of project data e Verify that the connected module is powered on e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected e Implement anti noise measures e If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module or in the extension cables e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected e Implement anti noise measures e If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module or in the extension cables Error location information Error location information Drive file information Drive file information Drive file information Drive file information Drive file information configuration information Error location information and system configuration information Diagnostic timing At ins
420. to the CPU module e Recheck the remote password parameter setting or module configuration e Verify that the connected module is powered on e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Implement anti noise measures e If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module Replace the connected module e Avoid connecting a module during operation e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected e If the version of the CPU module is correct there may be a malfunction in the connected module Replace the connected module e Review the program and check the contents of the operands used in the applied instructions e Verify that the specified buffer memory exists in the counterpart equipment e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected time or program e Correctly set the interrupt pointer for module interrupt e Specify the correct module number e Check the device range and modify the program e Check the range of devices used by each operand and modify the program e Check the usage of the instruction and modify the program Detailed information Drive file information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information System configuration information Error
421. tored The period is stored The current value of the number of output pulses is stored R W R W R W The number of pulses to output are stored The pulse width is stored The period is stored A The current value of the number of output pulses is stored R W R W R W The number of pulses to output are stored The pulse width is stored A T 1 A n monitor This monitor is a device for monitoring the in operation stopped status of PWM output ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows SM5300 SM5303 Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e PWM output driven by HIOEN instruction e PWM output stopped by HIOEN instruction e PWM instruction ON execution e After end of output of the specified number of pulses e PWM instruction OFF execution e Activation contact turned OFF e Power OFF ON reset RUN gt STOP PAUSE 196 19 BUILT IN I O FUNCTION 19 7 PWM Function Number of output pulses The number of output pulses of PWM output is stored When 0 is set output is continued without any limitation ECorresponding devices The device numbers corresponding to each channel are as follows CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 SD5301 SD5300 SD5317 SD5316 SD5333 SD5332 SD5349 SD5348 Update timing The timing to reflect the device in operation is as follows e When the HCMOV instruction is executed values updated immediately e When the PWM inst
422. total transfer distance before and after the interrupt of the DVIT instruction or 1 speed positioning with interruption exceeded 7FFFFFFFH Pulses of 7FFFFFFFH or greater are needed to specify an absolute address The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the positioning address was converted The total transfer distance before and after the interrupt of the DVIT instruction or 1 speed positioning with interruption exceeded 7FFFFFFFH Pulses of 7FFFFFFFH or greater are needed to specify an absolute address The 32 bit range was exceeded when the unit of the positioning address was converted The total transfer distance before and after the interrupt of the DVIT instruction or 1 speed positioning with interruption exceeded 7FFFFFFFH Pulses of 7FFFFFFFH or greater are needed to specify an absolute address Action e Modify the value of the special register and restart PWM e Modify the value of the special register and restart PWM e Modify the value of the special register and restart PWM e Modify the value of the special register and restart PWM e Recheck the relationship between the near point dog and limits e Recheck the relationship between the near point dog and limits e Recheck the relationship between the near point dog and limits e Recheck the relationship between the near point dog and limits e Start the positioning within specifications e Start the positioning within specificatio
423. truction execution At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At power on at RESET At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At END instruction execution At power on at RESET At instruction execution Error code 3057H 3060H 3061H 3142H 3200H 3202H 3203H 3210H 3211H 3212H 3213H 3302H 3320H 3340H Detailed information Error details and cause System bus error A timeout occurred during communication with a connected module when an instruction was executed e Verify that extension cables are correctly connected e Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected Implement anti noise measures If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module or in the extension cables System configuration information Error location information System bus error e A signal error was detected while accessing a connected module when an instruction was executed Verify that extension cables are correctly connected Verify that the version of the CPU module is compatible with the module where the error was detected Implement anti noise measures If there is no problem there may be a malfunction in the connected module or in the extension cables System
424. tting fen E Joitial Value Setting crio Me tes Setting of Device Initial Value Use Or Not Not Use lt Target Memory Data Memory Global Device Initial Value File Name eee Setting of Device Initial Sets whether or not to use initial device values e Not Use Not Use Value Use Or Not e Use Target Memory Sets the storage memory for the initial device value file e Memory card Data Memory e Data Memory Global Device Initial Sets the name of the initial global device value file 60 characters or less Value File Name 4 If nothing is specified initial global device values are not applied Number of initial device value settings and maximum range of one range Up to 1000 ranges can be set in one initial device value file Up to 8000 data points can be set in one range 13 2 Applicable Devices For details on devices to which initial device label values can be set refer to the following LAGX Works3 Operating Manual 13 INITIAL DEVICE VALUE SETTING 13 2 Applicable Devices 14 LATCH FUNCTION The contents of each device label of the CPU module is cleared in the cases described below and changed to its default value e At power OFF ON of the CPU module e At reset e A power failure that exceeded allowable momentary power interruption The contents of each device label with latch setting will be maintained in case of power failure even in the above mentioned cases Therefore when the data is managed
425. tting Standard Area Label rea Capacity 12 K Word Latch Label rea Capacity 1 K Word the capacity of each area Displayed items Item Description Setting range Default Option Battery Setting Set when using option battery e Not Mounted Not Mounted The points which can be held can be increased by e Mounted this setup The latch device of standard area can be held with a battery The latch area of latch label can be changed to battery latch area from standard latch area nonvolatile memory Device Label Device Area Device high speed Set the capacity of device high speed area gt Page 93 The 12 K word Memory Area Area Capacity Setting Range of the Capacity Setting Capacity of Each Area Device standard Set the capacity of device standard area gt Page 93 The 35 K word Area Capacity Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area Label Area Label Latch Label Select the used device area of label and latch label e Standard Area Standard Use Device Area from standard area and high speed area e HighSpeed Area Area Setting When device high speed area label area latch label area is 12 K word or less it is possible to set label area label latch area in high speed area Label Area Capacity Sets the capacity of the label area to be used for gt Page 93 The 12 K word non latched labels Setting Range of the Capacity of Each Area Latch Label Area Sets the capacity of the latch label area to be used gt Page 93 The 1 K wor
426. ty program whenever its execution condition is satisfied During interruption execution Interruption occurred During interruption stop L Program stops Program restarts e When the multiple interruption function is enabled e When not set at default Priority e 110 High e 10 Low 110 interrupt program 110 interrupt program 10 interrupt program 10 interrupt program Main routine program Main routine program Time _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ gt Time _ _ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ X __ gt 1 A high priority interrupt is executed by interrupting a low priority interrupt 2 Even if a high priority interrupt occurs it enters the waiting status until the executing interrupt is completed Interrupt priority If the interrupt priority of a program for which its execution condition has been satisfied is higher than that of the running program the programs are executed in accordance with their interrupt priority If the interrupt priority of the new program is the same or lower it enters the waiting status until the running program finishes 8 INTERRUPT FUNCTION 8 1 Multiple Interrupt Function 53 94 Interrupt priority setting The interrupt priority 1 to 3 of interruptions from modules can be changed O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FX5UCPU gt CPU Parameter gt Interrupt Settings gt Interrupt Priority
427. uch as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for railway companies or public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the user s discretion 301 TRADEMARKS Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD 3C LLC The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company 302 Manual number JY997D55401C Model FX5 U OU E Model code 09R537
428. uction execution at instruction execution At END instruction execution at instruction execution Error code 3663H 3664 H 3671H 3672H 3673H 3674H 3681H 3682H 3683H 3684H 3691H 3692H 3693H Axis 3 error stop immediately stop Axis 4 error stop immediately stop Axis 1 positioning table operand error Axis 2 positioning table operand error Axis 3 positioning table operand error Axis 4 positioning table operand error Axis 1 positioning table shift error table specification Axis 2 positioning table shift error table specification Axis 3 positioning table shift error table specification Axis 4 positioning table shift error table specification Axis 1 positioning table shift error table shift Axis 2 positioning table shift error table shift Axis 3 positioning table shift error table shift Error details and cause e When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC stopped the pulse output immediately by the pulse stop command or detection of the all outputs disable flag When pulses were being output or positioning was rising the PLC stopped the pulse output immediately by the pulse stop command or detection of the all outputs disable flag The value of an operand in the table is abnormal Other than the positioning address and command speed The value of an operand in the table is abnormal Other than the
429. ue that meets the following relational equation for the setting time of the constant scan WDT setting time gt Constant scan setting time gt Maximum scan time of the program When the maximum scan time of the program is longer than the setting time of the constant scan it results in error The constant scan time is ignored and it is executed with the scan time of the program Ex When the constant scan time is set to 4 ms Constant scan 4 ms A 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4ms END o END 0 END 0 END 0 fuma 1ms Ta los 1 ms 2 ms 1 ms 1 ms 2ms ms 4ms 5 3 ms 4 ms 4 ms J Scan where the ensign scan setting is not applied Wait time from the execution of END process until the beginning of the next scan When there is a processing mentioned below requested during wait time the processing of the program is interrupted and the corresponding process is carried out e Interrupt program e Event execution type program which triggers the generation of interruption e Device label access service processing 10 CONSTANT SCAN 8 10 1 Constant scan settings O 1 1 REMOTE OPERATION A remote operation is an operation to externally change the operation status of the CPU module with the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module set to the RUN position The following items show the types of remote operation e Remote RUN STOP e Remote PAUSE e Remote RESET 11 1 Remote RUN STOP This operation externall
430. ule can be displayed However even when an additional error occurs after a stop error the error information is not refreshed Poin tr The maximum number of displayable errors is 15 for continuation errors and 1 for stop errors When 15 continuation errors are displayed and another one occurs description of the new error is not displayed Also when an error with the same code has already been displayed the date and time of occurrence and detailed information of the relevant error are not updated 17 RAS FUNCTIONS 4 17 1 Self Diagnostics Function 09 CPU Module Operation Upon Error Detection Setting Configure each CPU Module Operation setting when an error is detected E rror Detection Setting Sets whether or not to detect errors TZ Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt RAS Setting gt Error Detections Setting E Battery Error Detect ee Module Verify Error Detect Battery Error Detect Sets whether or not to detect the battery error e Detect Not Detected Sets whether or not to detect the module verification error e Detect Not Detected Sets the CPU module operation upon error detection O Navigation window gt Parameter gt FXSUCPU gt CPU Parameter gt RAS Setting gt CPU Module Operation Setting at Error Detected gt Module Verify Error Detect El CPO Module Oper fon scing at Ena Betec E Instruction Execution
431. um value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle maximum R W order CH2 value CH2 SD5053 Pulse width measurement cycle maximum value High order CH2 SD5054 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement cycle minimum R W order CH2 value CH2 SD5055 Pulse width measurement cycle minimum value High order CH2 SD5060 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement rising ring R W order CH3 counter value CH3 SD5061 Pulse width measurement rising ring counter value High order CH3 SD5062 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value Low This register stores the pulse width measurement falling ring R W order CH3 counter value CH3 SD5063 Pulse width measurement falling ring counter value High order CH3 SD5064 Pulse width measurement latest value Low order CH3 This register stores the pulse width measurement latest value R W SD5065 Pulse width measurement latest value High order CH3 CH3 SD5066 Pulse width measurement maximum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement maximum R W CH3 value CH3 SD5067 Pulse width measurement maximum value High order CH3 SD5068 Pulse width measurement minimum value Low order This register stores the pulse width measurement minimum value R W CH3 CH3 SD5069 Pulse width measurement mi
432. units 2000 ms scan After 2nd Scan Sets the scan time monitoring time WDT for the second and later 10 to 2000 ms 10 ms units 200 ms scans 5 2 Resetting of the watchdog timer Resets the watchdog timer when the END FEND instruction is executed When the CPU module operates normally and executes the END FEND instruction within the watchdog timer setting the time of the watchdog timer will not time up If the END FEND instruction cannot be executed within the watchdog timer setting due to increased program execution as a result of hardware error or interrupt in the CPU module the time of the watchdog timer will time up 5 3 Precautions The following precautions relate to the scan monitoring function Watchdog timer reset when executing a program repeatedly The watchdog timer can be reset by executing the WDT instruction in a program If the time of the watchdog timer is up while executing a program repeatedly by the FOR instruction and NEXT instruction use the WDT instruction to reset the watchdog timer FOR K1000 O l Program repeatedly executed AE Repeated 1 000 times WDT Resetting of the watchdog timer NEXT 5 SCAN MONITORING FUNCTION 5 1 Scan time monitoring time setting Scan time when the WDT instruction is used Even though the watchdog timer is reset using the WDT instruction the scan time value is not reset The scan timer value is the value measured up to the END instruction Internal Internal proce
433. urn axis 4 Built in positioning zero return dwell time axis 4 CH1 Digital output value 2a E Deron o This register stores the zero return dwell time of built in positioning axis 3 This register stores the current address user unit of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the current address pulse unit of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the current speed of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the execution table number of built in positioning axis 4 R W R This register stores the error code of built in positioning axis 4 R W This register stores the error table number of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the maximum speed of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the bias speed of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the acceleration time of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the deceleration time of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the zero return speed of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the creep speed of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the zero point address of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the number of zero point signal for zero return of built in positioning axis 4 This register stores the zero return dwell time of built in positioning axis 4 Description
434. used used Not used Output variation incremental alarm set value s3 22 D532 A used Not used Output upper limit set value Output variation decremental alarm set value s3 23 D533 Not used Not used Output lower limit set value Alarm output Input variation incremental is s3 24 bO D534 0 Not used Not used exceeded Input variation decremental s3 24 b1 D534 1 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation incremental s3 24 b2 D534 2 Not used Not used is exceeded Output variation decremental s3 24 b3 D534 3 Not used Not used is exceeded PV value threshold hysteresis width SHPV s3 25 D535 500 5 0 C Not used Output value upper limit ULV s3 26 D536 2000 2 second Not used Output value lower limit LLV s3 27 D537 0 0 second Not used Wait setting from end of tuning cycle to start of PID s3 28 D538 50 Wait is not provided Not used control KW Output value MV D502 According to operation Not used This is an item not occupied o gt 1 The setting is always necessary 2 When CH1 is used 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 76 9 8 Examples of Program Program X010 MOV Auto tuning is started MOV SET SET i OV MOV MOV MOV K 50 SET SM402 Initial pulse D511 4 RST D502 Auto tuning is executed X010 Auto tuning is started D511 4 o D500 SD6022 D510 D502 Auto tuning is executed OUTHS STO K2000 M4 Auto tuning is executed
435. ution IRET 29 IMenrupi program s s e en leosecs Poin tr e Only one interrupt program can be created with one interrupt pointer number e Interrupt pointers need not be programmed starting with the smallest number e Interrupt programs can also be managed as separate programs by turning them into standby type programs Page 28 Stand by type program 30 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 5 Program Type Operation when an interrupt is generated Operation when an interrupt is generated is explained below Wif an interrupt cause occurs when interrupt is disabled DI The interrupt that was generated is stored and the stored interrupt program is executed the moment that the status changes to interrupt enabled An interrupt is stored only once even if the same interrupt is generated multiple times Note however that all interrupts cause are discarded when interrupt disable is specified by the IMASK and SIMASK instructions Interrupt occurrence Enable Interrupt El Main routine program Execution Interrupt Program Not executed because the interrupt program Executed as soon as the interrupt program execution is in disabled status Dl execution status changes to enabled When an interrupt cause is generated by a PAUSE status The interrupt program is executed the moment that the CPU module changes to the RUN status and the status changes to interrupt enabled An interrupt is stored only once when the
436. uto tuning method to ON b6 in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 1 When bit 6 is set to OFF the step response method is selected 3 Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON b4 in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 1 4 Setthe input filter Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 2 5 Set the sampling time Set the sampling time s3 6 Setthe Upper Limit Value Set the Upper Limit Value ULV ULV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 26 7 Set the Lower Limit Value LLV Set the Lower Limit Value LLV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 27 8 Set the threshold hysteresis SHPV Set the threshold hysteresis width SHPV in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 25 9 Set the target value SV Set the target value SV in PID instruction 10 Set the PID instruction command input ON to start auto tuning Auto tuning is executed according to the measured value PV When auto tuning is completed the auto tuning flag b4 and b6 turns OFF in the operation setting parameter ACT s3 1 9 PID CONTROL FUNCTION 9 7 Auto Tuning Step Response Method For acquiring satisfactory control results during PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable for the control target This paragraph explains the step response metho
437. verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 Stores the verification results of receive packet No 16 Element No where the verification result did not match b0 to b7 The cause of mismatch verification result code b8 to b15 No SD10818 SD10819 SD10820 SD10822 SD10823 SD10824 SD10825 SD10826 SD10827 SD10828 SD10829 SD10830 SD10831 SD10832 SD10833 SD10834 SD10835 SD10836 SD10837 Connection No 4 protocol execution count Connection No 4 protocol cancellation specification Connection No 5 protocol execution status Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 1 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 2 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 3 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 4 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 5 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 6 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 7 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 8 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 9 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 10 Connection No 5 received data verification result receive packet No 11 Conn
438. which the coil is ON Measurement starts when the retentive timer s coil is turned ON and when the current value matches the setting value time up the retentive timer s contact is turned ON The current value and ON OFF status of the contact are maintained even if the retentive timer s coil is turned OFF When the coil is turned back ON measurement resumes from the current value maintained The current value is cleared and the retentive timer is turned OFF by the RST STO instruction ON di OFF A 2 sag XO K200 lt 4 STO STO coil 1 OFF 1 STO lt 15 seconds gt n o Current value of 0 3 STO y X1 Current value is held even if r RST STO 2 the coil 1 is turned OFF STO contact 3 OFF Contact remains ON even if l RST STO the coil 1 is turned OFF Instruction instruction 4 execution ELow speed timer Timer High speed timer T ST Low speed timers timers and high speed timers are the same device The timer is specified by instruction as a low speed timer timer or high speed timer If for example you specify OUT TO the timer is a low speed timer 100 ms if you specify OUTH TO it is a timer 10 ms if you specify OUTHS TO it is a high speed timer 1 ms The same goes for retentive timers Routine timer T The routine timer is a timer 100ms that can operate even with a program that is not necessarily executed with every scan Eight timers can be used at th
439. with the interrupt priority 1 PROGRAM EXECUTION 1 1 5 Program Type 3 32 Wif an interrupt cause with the same or a lower priority occurs while the interrupt program is being executed e For 10 to 123 and 150 to 1177 The occurred interrupt cause is memorized and the interrupt program corresponding to the factor will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes Even if the same interrupt factor occurs multiple times it will be memorized only once The second interruption cause and later causes that occur during the execution of an interruption are not memorized Main routine program 10 interrupt program 00 1s executed 180 is not executed for 150 interrupt program the second time 180 interrupt program After the interruption being executed is completed the interruptions are executed from 10 which has higher 180 is executed priority level 150 which 150 is not executed for has higher priority rank is the second time executed ahead of 180 which has the same priority ay Time 1100 interrupt program e For 128 to 131 The interrupt cause that occured is memorized and the interrupt program corresponding to the cause will be executed after the running interrupt program finishes If the same interrupt cause occurs multiple times it will be memorized once but operation at the second and later occurrences depends on setting of the fixed scan execution
440. xcess of the limitation of the number of instructions driven at the same time mCorresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SM4982 Operation Description The content of the operation when ON and when OFF is as follows DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions operated in excess of the limitation of When there is no error the number of instructions driven at the same time DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions can operate e Even when this device turns ON the DHSCS DHSCR DHSZ instructions within the range of the number of instructions driven at the same time will operate For the limitation of the number of instructions driven at the same time refer to LLIMELSEC iQ F FX5 Programming Manual Instructions Standard Functions Function Blocks e These devices also operate when the FX3 compatible high speed counter function is valid Update timing The timing of device update is as follows e Updated in END processing e When OFF by the user e If an error occurs while the FX3 compatible DHSCS DHSCR and DHSZ e Power ON reset instruction ON execution an operation is made also when the high speed counter function is valid output high speed comparison table operation This device is for monitoring the operational status of the high speed counter s multi point output high speed comparison tables ECorresponding devices The device number is shared for all channels SM5000 Operation Description The conten
441. y changes the CPU module to RUN STOP status with the RUN STOP RESET switch of the CPU module set to the RUN position It is used to reach a CPU module in an inaccessible place or in case of changing the status of the CPU module in the control box to RUN STOP status with an external signal Applications of remote RUN STOP It is usable in the following cases e When the CPU module is in an inaccessible place e When changing the status of the CPU module in the control box to RUN STOP from outside Operation during remote RUN STOP In case of remote RUN STOP the operation of the program is as shown below At remote STOP A program is executed up to END instruction and changes to STOP status At remote RUN When remote RUN is executed in the STOP status once again the CPU module turns to RUN status and the program is executed from step 0 Method of execution of remote RUN STOP The following are the methods of execution of remote RUN STOP Contact method Set the RUN contact in the parameter The allowable device range is XO to X17 Execute remote RUN STOP by contact ON OFF Set the correspondence of ON OFF and RUN STOP operation of the contact in CPU parameters e When set to RUN at contact ON When contact is set to OFF the CPU module is in the STOP status When contact is set to ON the CPU module is in the RUN status END END END Step 0 END END END ON RUN contact OFF RUN 0 RUN STOP status
442. y currently However the index does not equal the actual number of write operations ction related The special registers related to instruction execution are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD757 Current interrupt priority This register stores the interrupt priority of the interrupt program being executed 1 to 3 The interrupt priority of interrupt program executed 0 The interrupt is not executed default value SD758 Interrupt disabling for each priority setting value This register stores the disable interrupt priority according to the disable interrupt instruction Dl disable interrupt after the setting priority instruction DI and enable interrupt instruction El 1 Disable interrupt priority 1 or less Disable interrupt of all priority default value Disable interrupt priority 2 or 3 Disable interrupt priority 3 No priority Enable interrupt of all priority N at rn of interrupt pointers The special registers for the mask pattern of interrupt pointers are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD1400 Mask pattern This register stores the IMASK instruction mask pattern b15 to bO 115 to 10 Mask pattern This register stores the IMASK instruction mask pattern I b15 to bO 131 to 116 SD1401 The special registers dedicated to FX are shown below R Read only R W Read Write SD4110 Error code 1 details This register stores the self diagnosis error code
443. y flag OFF R ON Carry flag ON SM8023 Real time clock access error SM8023 turns ON at the time of RTC access reading writing R error occurrence SM8026 RAMP mode OFF Standard mode R ON RAMP mode SM8029 Instruction execution complete OFF Instruction execution not complete R ON Instruction execution complete SM8031 Non latch memory all clear OFF No clear R ON Non latch memory all clear SM8032 Latch memory all clear OFF No clear R ON Latch memory all clear SM8033 Memory hold stop OFF Clear R ON Hold SM8034 All output disable OFF Normal operation R ON All output disable SM8039 Constant scan mode OFF Normal operation R W ON Constant scan mode SM8040 STL transfer disable OFF Normal operation R W ON Transfer disable SM8045 All output reset disable Disables the all output reset function when the operation mode is R W changed SM8050 1000 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8051 1100 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8052 1200 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8053 1300 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8054 1400 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8055 1500 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8056 1600 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8057 1700 disable OFF Interrupt enabled R W ON Interrupt disabled SM8058 1800 disable OFF I
444. y power failure SD61 This register stores the I O module verify error module No SD62 This register stores the earliest detected annunciator F No SD63 This register stores the number of annunciator F detections SD64 to Annunciator F Detection No table This register stores the annunciator F detection No SD79 SD80 Detailed information 1 information category e Detailed information 1 information category code is stored PRR R il R Vl A A iT LAI O DO JO PO Pi fii ica ZZZ al e b15 to b8 b7 to bO Not used fixed to 0 Information category code The following codes are stored into the information category code N A Program position information Drive number and file name Parameter information System configuration information Number of times information Time information 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 240 APPENDIX Appendix 2 Special Register List SD81 to SD111 Detailed information 1 e Detailed information 1 corresponding to the error code SDO is stored e There are six types of information to be stored as shown in the following figures e The type of detailed information 1 can be obtained using SD80 the value of the Detailed information 1 information category code stored in SD80 corresponds to the following figures 1 2 4 to 7 1 Program location information b15 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Argument No SD81 With or without specification Argument No Fixed to 0

MELSEC iQ-F FX5 User`s Manual (Application)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents